INTRODUCTION TO ORGANIC COMPOUNDS 5.

If a bond is made up of a large number of organic

compound, then the bond is termed as?
CHEMICAL BOND a) Ionic bond
1. Which among the following chemical bond were b) Metallic bond
c) Covalent bond
described by Kossel and Lewis?
a) Metallic bond d) Dipolar bond
View Answer
b) Polar covalent bond
c) Coordinate bond Answer: c
d) Ionic and Covalent bond Explanation: This is because they have the tendency to
View Answer transfer electrons.
Answer: d 6. Which among the following is not an example of
Explanation: Both Ionic and Covalent bond arise from the hydrogen bond?
tendency of atoms to attain stable configuration of a) H20
electrons. b) Liquid HCl
c) NH3
2. Which among the following is not a property of Ionic
bond? d) CHCl3
a) Losing of electrons View Answer
b) Gain of electrons Answer: b
c) Sharing of electrons Explanation: There is no hydrogen bond in liquid HCl since
d) Transfer of electrons the bond breaks up when dissolved in water.
View Answer
7. Atoms undergo bonding in order to ?
Answer: c a) Attain stability
Explanation: Ionic bond results from a), b) and d). But the b) Lose stability
transfer of electrons is a property of Covalent bond. c) Move freely
d) increase energy
3. Which among the following formation is not an example
View Answer
of Covalent bond?
a) LiF Answer: a
b) NH3 Explanation: Atoms undergo bonding to attain stable
c) CF4 electronic configuration and to gain energy.
d) HF
View Answer 8. An atom differs from its ion in which among the
following ?
Answer: a a) Mass number
Explanation: LiF (Lithium Fluoride) is an example of Ionic b) Atomic number
bond, as the formation takes place by transfer of electrons c) Neutrons
and not by sharing. d) Number of protons
4. State whether the given statement is true or false “Ionic View Answer
bonds are non-directional” Answer: d
a) True Explanation: When an atom loses or gains electrons its
b) False forms its corresponding ion, and hence it differs in proton
View Answer number.
Answer: a 9. Which among the following is both a molecule and a
Explanation: The ionic bond breaks up when dissolved in compound?
water and allow the charged particles to move freely. a) C6 H12 O6
b) H2O 3. Ten covalent bonds in the Lewis structure of Propane
c) CO2 will account for how many valence electrons?
d) NaCl a) 10
View Answer b) 20
c) 14
Answer: b d) 12
Water H2O is both a molecule and a compound. This is View Answer
because the atoms which make them are not the same.
Answer: b
10. Bond energy and the corresponding bond length vary Explanation: From the Molecular formula of Propane
directly with each other. comment whether the statement (C3H8), 3C has 3*4=12 valence electrons and 8H has 8*1=8
is true or false. valence electrons and hence total valence electrons is
a) True given by their sum: 12+8=20.
b) False
View Answer 4. What is the hybridization of oxygen in water?
a) sp
Answer: b b) sp2
Explanation: Smaller the bond energy, greater will be the c) sp3
bond length and vice versa and hence the two vary 4) sp3d
inversely with each other. View Answer

Answer: c
HYBRID ORBITALS Explanation: water has a linear shape as hydrogen shares
its electron with p-orbital.
1. The energy which must be transferred to any atom to
5. The electronegativity difference between the covalently
dislodge an electron is called?
a) Free energy bonded atoms is
b) Ionization Energy a) Less than 0
b) 0-0.3
c) Quantum mechanical energy
c) 0.3-1.7
d) Dissociation Energy
View Answer d) Over 1.7
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: b
Explanation: If the energy is absorbed it is called
endothermic and if the energy is released it is called Explanation: The electronegativity difference between
exothermic energy. covalent bond atoms is 0-0.3, whereas for polar covalent
bonded atoms it is between 0.3-1.7 and for ionic it is over
2. Potassium Ion K+ has the same electronic configuration 1.7.
as that of which noble gases mentioned below ?
a) Krypton 6. What is the hybridization of Carbon atom in CF4?
a) sp2
b) Xenon
c) Argon b) sp
c) sp3d
d) Radon
d) sp3
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Potassium has atomic number 19, hence it Answer: d
has 19 electrons and therefore K+ has 18 electrons, which Explanation: CF4 has a tetrahedral structure and carbon in
is the same as noble gas Argon. it has a hybridization of sp3.
7. Which one has zero dipole moment? b) Linear
a) C6H6 c) Tetrahedral
b) NH3 d) Pyramidal
c) H2S View Answer
d) NO
View Answer Answer: a
Explanation: It forms a single bond with one oxygen atom,
Answer: a double bond with another oxygen atom and there exists
Explanation: The ring of benzene is completely closed and one more non-bonded atom. Thus, it forms a trigonal
is of perfect stability and hence it has zero dipole moment. planar structure.

8. Which one have both sigma and pi bonds? 2. In which molecule there is a complete linear
a) H2S arrangement of all atoms?
b) NO2 a) BF3
c) HClO b) NH3
d) NaCN c) CO2
View Answer d) CH4
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In NaCN both double bond and triple bond is Answer: c
present and hence it has both sigma Explanation: BF3 has trigonal planar structure,NH3 has a
and pi bonds. trigonal bipyramidal structure, CH4 has tetragonal
structure and hence CO2 is the one with linear structure.
9. PH3, So3, and HF are examples of polar molecules. State
true or false 3. Choose the one which is incorrect
a) True a) BrO4 – tetrahedral
b) False b) PF3 – pyramidal
View Answer c) ClO4 – tetrahedral
d) BeBr2 – linear
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: SO3 is not an example of polar molecule as it
does not contain a hydrogen bond. Answer: b
Explanation: PF3 has a trigonal pyramidal structure as it
10. What is the hybridization of sulphur in H2S? has three bonding pairs and one non-bonding pair.
a) sp
b) sp2 4. Which among the following is not a physical property?
c) sp3 a) Melting point
d) sp3d b) Boiling point
View Answer c) Solubility
d) Reactivity
Answer: c View Answer
Explanation: S has two pairs of electrons and two atoms
bonded to H with a total of 4 electrons and hence it has a Answer: d
hybridization of sp3. Explanation: Reactivity is a chemical property and it is not
a physical property.

5. A crystalline solid possess which one of the following

STRUCTURE AND PHYSICAL PROPERTIES property?
a) Irregularity
1. Name the geometry of the central oxygen atom in the
ozone molecule (o3) b) Non- symmetric
a) Trigonal planar c) Perfect geometric pattern
d) non- stability a) Methanol
View Answer b) Ethanol
c) Water
Answer: c d) Both methanol and water
Explanation: A crystalline solid is one which possesses View Answer
perfect geometry, high stability, symmetric and regularly
arranged. Answer: d
Explanation: Like water, it is a liquid with boiling point
6. Melting is process which can be stated by the below which is abnormally high for a compound of its size and
statements except, polarity.
a) Change from a highly disordered stated to an ordered
state 10. Which among the following does not match with the
b) Change from particles in crystal lattice to liquid state term solubility?
c) Thermal energy of particles overcome the a) The structural units get separated from each other
intercrystalline forces that hold them b) The ion-dipole bond is very strong
d) Change from low temperature to high temperature c) The spaces in between the structures are occupied by
View Answer solvent molecules
d) The electrostatic attraction between the oppositely
Answer: a charged ions and their corresponding ends are called ion-
Explanation: Melting is a process which proceeds by dipole bond
changing from a highly ordered state to a disordered state. View Answer
7. Which among the following is not associated with Answer: b
intermolecular forces? Explanation: The bond is weak but in the aggregate they
a) They hold neutral molecules supply enough energy to overcome the interionic forces.
b) Non- electrostatic in nature
c) attraction of oppositely charged particles
d) dipole-dipole interaction and van der Waals forces
View Answer ACIDS AND BASES

Answer: b 1. Which one is correctly matched?

Explanation: Intermolecular forces are electrostatic in a) Acids – pH range above7
nature. b) Acids – pH range below 7
c) Acids – pH range 7( neutral)
8. Which among the following statement is not true? d) Acids – pH range 8-9
a) In liquid, particles are less regularly arranged and are View Answer
free to move
b) Boiling involves breaking up of group of molecules in Answers: b
liquid Explanation: Acids have a pH range less than 7, Water is
c) Boiling involves clubbing of oppositely charged ions the only solvent that has a pH of 7 (neutral).
d) Thermal energy of particles overcome cohesive forces
2. A Strong acid is same as concentrated acid. State true or
that hold them false
View Answer
a) False
Answer: c b) True
Explanation: Boiling involves separation of oppositely View Answer
charged ions and makes them as individual ions. Answer: a
9. When one of the Hydrogen in Methane( CH4) is Explanation: Concentration of an acid depends upon the
replaced by a hydroxyl group, then structurally methane water content whereas the strength of an acid depends on
resembles? dissociation power.
3. When an acid reacts with a metal, which one of the d) LiOH
following gas is usually liberated? View Answer
a) ammonia gas
b) chlorine Answer: b
c) oxygen Explanation: since HCl is a base it turns red litmus to blue.
d) Hydrogen gas 8. What is the pH of 0.0001 molar HCl solution?
View Answer
a) 1
Answer: d b) 2
Explanation: When metal reacts with acid, a soap bubble is c) 3
formed and the bubble contains Hydrogen gas (example: d) 4
HCl, H2SO4). View Answer

4. Select the one which is wrongly mapped Answer: d

a) Sodium carbonate – Washing soda Explanation: It has a H+ concentration of 10-4. The value of
b) Sodium chloride – common salt negative exponent(^-4) gives pH value to be 4.
c) Calcium carbonate – slaked lime
9. What will be the product when HNO3 reacts with
d) Sodium hydroxide – caustic soda NH4OH ?
View Answer a) NH4 NO3
Answer: c b) 2NH4 NO3
Explanation: calcium hydroxide is commonly referred as c) NH4 (NO3)2
slaked lime. d) NH2NO3
View Answer
5. MgO + 2HCl —-> X + H2O
a) Mg2Cl Answer: a
b) 2MgCl Explanation: the reaction takes place as follows:
c) MgCl HNO3 + NH4OH —-> NH4NO3 + H2O.
d) MgCl2
10. Find the odd one out:
View Answer
a) Neutral salt : NaCl
Answer: d b) Acid salt : CuSO4.5H2O
Explanation: MgCl2 is the product formed when c) Basic salt: CuCO3.Cu(OH)2
magnesium oxide reacts with hydrochloric acid and water d) Nonhydrated salt: KNO3
is formed as a by-product. View Answer

6. Select the one which is neither an acid nor base Answer: b

a) CH3COOH Explanation: CuSO4.5H20 is a hydrated salt. An example of
b) HCl acid salt is NaHCO3.
c) KCl
d) CH3OH
View Answer ISOMERISM

Answer: c 1. Choose the incorrect option regarding Isomerism:

Explanation: CH3COOH and CH3OH are organic acids, HCl is a) They differ in both physical and chemical properties
strong acid and KCl is a salt. b) They have the different molecular formula
c) There are two types of Isomerism : Structural and Stereo
7. Which one will change from red litmus to blue? Isomerism
a) NaCl
d) Geometric and optical isomerism are two types of
b) HCl Stereo Isomerism
c) KOH View Answer
Answer: b Answer: a
Explanation: Isomers are compounds that have same Explanation: Alkenes like 1-hexene when flipped from top
molecular formula. to bottom they have identical structures and also they
have C=CH2 unit which does not exist as cis- trans isomers.
2. Isomerism that arises out of the difference in spatial
arrangement of atoms or groups about the doubly bonded 6. Which among the following is formed when an alcohol is
carbon atoms are called? (In specific) dehydrated?
a) Structural Isomerism a) alkane
b) Stereo Isomerism b) alkyne
c) Geometrical Isomerism c) alkene
d) Optical Isomerism d) aldehyde
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: c
Explanation: These geometrical isomers are not mirror Explanation: In elimination reaction, when protic acids
images of each other and they differ in spatial react with alcohol, they lose water molecule to form
arrangement from one another. alkenes.

3. Isomers with similar groups on the same side are called 7. A fat on hydrolysis would yield?
as ” trans” isomers. State true or false a) Glycerol and soap
a) True b) Ethanol and soap
b) False c) Ethanol and glycerol
View Answer d) Only soap
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: “Trans” isomers are those with similar groups Answer: a
arranged in opposite direction. The Isomers with similar Explanation: During saponification process, fat on
groups on the same side are called as “cis” isomers. hydrolysis will yield glycerol and soap.

4. Which among the following defines Meso forms of 8. Which among the following correctly defines
isomers Diastereomer?
a) Meso form is optically inactive due to external a) These have same magnitude but different signs of
compensation optical rotation
b) The molecules of the meso isomers are chiral b) Nonsuperimposable object mirror relationship
c) It can be separated into optically active enantiometric c) These differ in all physical properties
pairs d) Separation is very difficult
d) It is a single compound View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Answer: d Explanation: Diastereomers differ in all physical properties.
Explanation: Meso forms of isomers are single compound The rest of the points are related to Enantiomers.
and their molecules are achiral
and hence they cannot be separated into pairs. 9. The molecular formula C5H12 contains how many
isomeric alkanes?
5. Which among the following does not exhibit geometric a) 1
isomerism b) 2
a) 1-hexene c) 3
b) 2-hexene d) 4
c) 3-hexene View Answer
d) 4-hexene
View Answer
Answer: c Answer: b
Explanation: n-pentane, 2-ethylpropane, and 2- Explanation: Methane is the simplest member of alkane
methylbutane are the 3 isomeric alkanes of C5H12 family and indeed the simplest of organic compounds, as
(pentane). all other compounds are derived by altering this
compound.
10. Identify the chiral molecule among the following:
a) Isopropyl alcohol 4. Ethane is obtained by electrolyzing
b) 2-pentanol a) Potassium formate
c) 1-bromo 3-butene b) Potassium succinate
d) Isobutyl alcohol c) Potassium acetate
View Answer d) Potassium fumarate
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Chirality is the condition for a molecule to be Answer: b
optically active and here isobutyl alcohol is the only Explanation: By electrolyzing potassium succinate (the
compound is optically active and hence it is the chiral process is generally called Kolbe’s electrolysis), ethane is
molecule. obtained.

HYDROCARBONS 5. “Methane is a product of aerobic respiration”. State

true or false
1. Hydrocarbons are organic compounds with element a) False
a) Hydrogen b) True
b) Oxygen View Answer
c) Carbon
d) Both hydrogen and carbon Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: Methane is the end product of anaerobic
decay of plants due to the breakdown of very complicated
Answer: d molecules.
Explanation: These organic compounds are made up of
only carbon and hydrogen and hence the name 6. Calcium carbide on reaction with water gives?
hydrocarbons. a) Methane
b) Ethane
2. Find the odd one out: c) propane
a) Aromatic d) Acetylene
b) Alkanes View Answer
c) Alkynes
d) Alkenes Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: CaC2 + H20—-> C2H2 + Ca(OH)2.

Answer: a 7. Name the process associated with acylation of benzene

Explanation: aromatic is a separate branch of a) Friedel craft reaction
hydrocarbons. Whereas the alkanes, alkenes, and alkynes b) Wurtz reaction
are subfamilies of the branch aliphatic hydrocarbons. c) Wurtz fitting reaction
d) Debey Huckel reaction
3. The simplest member of organic compounds is ? View Answer
a) Methanol
b) Methane Answer: a
c) Formaldehyde Explanation: The electrophilic substitution reaction that
d) Formic acid takes place between ethanoyl chloride and benzene is
View Answer called as Friedel craft reaction
8. The hydrocarbon in which all the 4 valencies of carbon temperature of 250-400(degree) chlorine and methane
are fully occupied is called as react vigorously to give hydrogen chloride and
a) Alkene chloromethane (CH3Cl).
b) Alkyne
c) Alkane 2. The methyl chloride undergoes substitution to form
d) Cycloalkane a) CHCl
View Answer b) CH2Cl
c) CHCl2
Answer: c d) CH2Cl2
Explanation: Alkanes , the saturated hydrocarbons are View Answer
those in which the carbon atoms are bonded covalently to
each other (fully occupied). Each carbon atom is Answer: d
tetrahedrally surrounded by H-atoms Explanation: Chloromethane undergoes further
substitution to form hydrogen chloride and
9. Liquid hydrocarbon is converted into gaseous dichloromethane (CH2Cl2).
hydrocarbon by:
a) Oxidation 3. Methane reacts more readily with chlorine than with
b) Hydrolysis Fluorine. State true or false
c) Cracking a) True
d) Distillation b) False
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: b
Explanation: Under cracking with high temperature, the Explanation: Methane reacts with chlorine but not as
liquid form of hydrocarbon is converted into gaseous form vigorously as with fluorine. The reactivity order is as
follows: F2 > Cl2 > Br2 >I2.
10. Chlorination of alkanes is an example of
a) Radical 4. Identify the one which is not a type of chlorination
b) Elimination a) Free radical chlorination
c) Free radical b) Electrophobic chlorination
d) Addition c) Ketone chlorination
View Answer d) Chlorine addition reaction
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Free radical chlorination is a reaction that Answer: b
substitutes a chlorine for a hydrogen on an alkane Explanation: Electrophobic is not a kind of halogenation. It
is electrophilic chlorination, in which aromatic
substitutions takes place.

CHLORINATION 5. Which among the following on chlorination undergoes

substitution at the alkyl group
1. When chlorine gas reacts with methane, the product a) Ethers
formed is b) Hydroxyl groups
a) CHCl c) Carbonyl compounds
b) CH2Cl d) Carboxylic acids
c) CH3Cl View Answer
d) CH4Cl
View Answer Answer: a
Explanation: In the absence of sunlight, the alpha
Answer: c hydrogen of ethers undergoes substitution when treated
Explanation: Under the influence of UV light or with a with chlorine.
6. In the presence of red phosphorous, chlorine converts 10. The step in which Cl-Cl bond homolysis occurs is called:
the fatty acids having alpha hydrogen atoms into a) Initiation step
a) Halo acids b) Propagation step
b) Alpha-halo acids c) Intermediate step
c) Alpha,alpha-dihalo acids d) Termination step
d) Trihalo acids View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b Explanation: Each Cl atom in the initiation step has several
Explanation: The propionic acid, in the presence of Cl2/P valence electrons and is very reactive and hence it
gets converted into alpha chloro propionic acid due to the abstracts a hydrogen atom from methane and homolysis
action of the halogen chlorine. occurs.

7. Chlorine in the presence of which among the following

generates positively charged species?
a) Ferric chloride RATE OF REACTION
b) Anhydrous ferric chloride
1. The rate of the reaction is equal to the product of three
c) Ferrous chloride factors listed below except
d) Anhydrous ferrous chloride a) Collision frequency
View Answer b) Energy factor
Answer: b c) Orientation factor
Explanation: Ferric chloride is a lewis acid catalyst and in d) pH factor
the presence of chlorine, it converts nitrobenzene into 3- View Answer
chloro nitro benzene. Answer: d
8. p-nitrotoluene on reaction with chlorine forms Explanation: The reaction rate is given by the product of
hydrogen chloride and collision frequency (deals with concentration, pressure,
a) p-Nitrobenzyl chloride and arrangement), energy factor ( deals with distribution
b) o-Nitrobenzyl chloride of kinetic energy), and orientation factor (probability
c) m-Nitrobenzyl chloride factor).
d) Nitrobenzyl chloride 2. Temperature and pressure are the only factors which
View Answer affect the reaction rate. state true or false
Answer: a a) True
Explanation: p-Nitrotoluene reacts with chlorine in the b) False
presence of CCl4 at 80 (degree) C to form p-nitrobenzyl View Answer
chloride under the conditions of photochemical initiation. Answer: b
9. Chlorination of cyclobutane gives which among the Explanation: The rate of reaction is affected by three
following in addition to hydrogen chloride factors temperature, pressure, and concentration. All the
a) Cyclobutyl chloride three varies directly with the rate of the reaction.
b) Cyclobutyl chlorite
3. The frequency of molecular collision increases if
c) 1-chlorobutene
a) The concentration of product increases
d) 1,1-chlorobutene b) The concentration of product decreases
View Answer c) The concentration of reactant increases
Answer: b d) The concentration of reactant decreases
Explanation: All the hydrogens of cyclobutane are View Answer
equivalent and substitution of any gives the same product
as that of others.
Answer: c Answer: a
Explanation: The frequency of molecular collision increases Explanation: Calcium carbonate has large surface area and
varies directly with the concentration of the reactant. hence it increases the reaction rate.

4. Identify the true statement regarding catalyst 8. Which is not a type of catalyst:
a) Always decreases the rate of the reaction a) Positive catalyst
b) Always increases the activation energy of the reaction b) Negative catalyst
c) Actually participates in the reaction c) Autocatalyst
d) Changes the equilibrium concentration of the product d) homogeneous catalysis
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: d
Explanation: A catalyst is a substance which when added, Explanation: Homogeneous catalysis is a phenomenon in
only alters the reaction rate temporarily and does not which the catalyst takes part in the reaction and it is not a
have a permanent effect on them and hence, only the type of catalyst.
option b) gives a correct info from the given choices.
9. The speed of a chemical reaction
5. From the choices given below, identify the activation a) Is independent of the contact surface
energy of a reaction whose rate constant increases by 100 b) Is constant no matter what the temperature is
when the temperature changes from 300K to 360K c) Varies inversely with the absolute temperature
a) 53 d) Is extremely rapid between the ions in aqueous solution
b) 69 View Answer
c) 35
d) 42 Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: The speed of a chemical reaction is extremely
rapid between the ions in aqueous solution because there
Answer: b are no bonds that need to be broken.
Explanation: By substituting the appropriate values in the
formula: (R.T1.T2)/(T1-T2)*ln(k1/k2) 10. The overall order for the reaction 2A+ B—> 2C with
we can find the value of activation energy(Ea). rate equation rate=k[A]^2[B] is
a) 0
6. Identify the unit of “k” in moles/L for the rate law: b) 1
k[A][B]pow2 c) 2
a) L/mol/s d) 3
b) L(pow2)/mol/s View Answer
c) L(pow2)* s(pow2)/mol(pow2)
d) s Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: The order of A in this reaction is 2 and the
overall reaction is a third order reaction.
Answer: d
Explanation: Rate= k[A][B](pow2) and hence
k=rate/{[A][B](pow2)}. NOMENCLATURE
7. Which among the following catalyst increases the rate 1. Saturated hydrocarbons are otherwise referred as
of the reaction
a) Alkanes
a) Calcium carbonate
b) Alkenes
b) Calcium chloride c) Alkynes
c) Calcium hydroxide d) Alkaloids
d) Calcium sulphate View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a b) False
Explanation: Saturated hydrocarbons contain large View Answer
number of hydrogen atoms in them and hence they are
known as alkanes. Answer: b
Explanation: The first step is to find the number of carbon
2. Identify the correct alkane name for the molecular atoms present only in the main/ longest chain of the
formula C30H62 compound.
a) Propdecane
b) Eicosane 6. The substituent in the chain is named by replacing the
c) Triacontane “ane” in the alkanes by
d) Dodecane a) ene
View Answer b) ic
c) one
Answer: c d) yl
Explanation: Triacontane is the alkane with the molecular View Answer
formula C30H62 as alkanes have the general formula
CnH2n+2. Answer: d
Explanation: ene, ic and one are used for representing
3. Identify the smallest alkane which can form a ring alkenes, carboxylic acids, and ketones respectively, hence
structure (cycloalkane) yl is the term which is to be substituted in place on ane in
a) Cyclomethane the alkanes.
b) Methane
c) Cyclopropane 7. The C=C bond in the chain of the compound considered
d) Propane is shown by
View Answer a) Specifying the number of carbon atoms associated with
the bond
Answer: c b) Specifying the number of carbon atoms at beginning of
Explanation: Cyclopropane is the only smallest alkane that the C=C bond
can form a successful ring structure with C-C bond on c) Specifying the number of carbon atoms at end of the
removal of a hydrogen atom. C=C bond
d) Specifying the number of carbon atoms in the entire
4. In which among the following alkane, a carbon atom is chain
displaced so as to form a compactly structure with the View Answer
resemblance of a butterfly wing
a) Cyclopropane Answer: b
b) Cyclobutane Explanation: According to the rules of IUPAC, The C=C
c) Cyclopentane bond in the chain of the compound considered is shown
d) Cyclohexane by specifying the number of carbon atoms at beginning of
View Answer the C=C bond.

Answer: b 8. Dienes are the name given to compounds with

Explanation: If one of the carbon atoms of cyclobutane is a) Exactly a double bond
not displaced, then the C-C bond would be exactly at right b) Exactly a triple bond
angles to each other and they do not form a cyclic c) Exactly two double bond
structure. d) more than two double bond
View Answer
5. The first step in IUPAC nomenclature is to identify the
total number of carbon atoms present in the compound. Answer: c
State true or false Explanation: Alkenes are the name given to compound
a) True with one double bond and dienes are the one given to
compounds with two double bond.
9. Triple bond with two carbon atoms on either side is Answer: a
called Explanation: open chain compounds or acyclic compounds
a) Methnyl group are otherwise called as aliphatic compounds.
b) Ethynyl group
c) Propionyl group 3. Which among the following is not an example of Acyclic
d) Propargyl group compound
View Answer a) Acetaldehyde
b) Ethane
Answer: b c) Cyclopropane
Explanation: Triple bond with two atoms on either side are d) Isobutane
called as ethynyl group and those with one carbon on one View Answer
side and two carbon on another side are called as
propargyl group. Answer: c
Explanation: Cyclopropane is a ring (cyclic) compound and
10. The substituent groups that are commonly associated hence it does not come with the examples of open chain
with benzene ring are compounds.
a) Phenyl and benzyl
b) Propyl and phenyl 4. Which among the following is not an example of alicyclic
c) Methyl and benzyl compound
d) Butyl and phenyl a) Cyclohexane
View Answer b) Cyclohexene
c) Tetrahydrofuran
Answer: a d) Acetic acid
Explanation: Phenyl and benzyl are commonly associated View Answer
with benzene ring due to their closely associated structure
with difference in hydrogen atom. Answer: d
Explanation: Acetic acid is a linear chain compound
(acyclic) and hence it is not an example of ring compound
(alicyclic).
CLASSIFICATION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
5. Which among the following is not an aromatic
1. Organic compounds are broadly classified as compound(in specific)
a) Open chain compounds and acyclic compounds a) Naphthalene
b) Open chain compounds and linear chain compounds b) Aniline
c) Cyclic compounds and alicyclic compounds c) Pyridine
d) alicyclic compounds and acyclic compounds d) Tropolone
View Answer View Answer
Answer: d Answer: c
Explanation: Organic compounds are broadly classified Explanation: Pyridine is heterocyclic aromatic compound.
into open chain and closed chain compounds. Whereas naphthalene and aniline are benzenoid aromatic
2. Aliphatic compound is the other name for compounds and tropolone is a non-benzenoid aromatic
compound.
a) Acyclic compounds
b) Alicyclic compounds 6. Find the odd one among the following:
c) Ring compounds a) Alicyclic compounds
d) Closed chain compounds b) Heterogeneous compounds
View Answer c) Branched chain compounds
d) Aromatic compounds
View Answer
Answer: c groups
Explanation: Branched chain compound is a classification View Answer
of open-chain compounds. Whereas, alicyclic, aromatic
and heterogeneous compounds are sub-classifications of Answer: a
cyclic compounds. Explanation: The aromatic compounds (4n+2)pi electrons,
which comes under the classification of cyclic compounds
7. Identify the odd one among the following and hence they are not associated with aliphatic
a) Indene compounds.
b) Anthracene
c) o,m,p-xylene
d) Azulene RESONANCE AND AROMATICITY
View Answer
1. Resonance forms are in equilibrium with each other.
Answer: d State true or false
Explanation: Azulene is a non- benzenoid compound.
a) True
Whereas, Indene, anthracene, and o,m,p-Xylene are b) False
examples of benzenoid aromatic compounds.
View Answer
8. Organic compounds can be classified even based upon Answer: b
the function groups. Identify the one which is not a
Explanation: Resonance forms are hybrid in nature and
functional group
hence it is not correct to say that they are in equilibrium
a) Isocyanide
with each other.
b) Isocyano
c) Carboxyl 2. Identify the false statement regarding resonance
d) Carbonyl a) As the number of charges increases, the resonance
View Answer forms gets more significant
b) Zero charge of resonance is the most significant one
Answer: a c) Atoms with full octet resonance form are more stable
Explanation: Isocyanide is a compound and it is not a
when compared with the one with unfilled octet
functional group.
d) Resonance is unstable in case of unfilled octet of
9. Which among the following is not a class of organic nitrogen atom
compound View Answer
a) Carbonyl compound
Answer: a
b) Nitro compound Explanation: Greater the number of charges, less stable
c) Amides and less significant gets the resonance form.
d) Electro compounds
View Answer 3. Identify the correct sequence according to
electronegativity
Answer: d a) F> NH2> CH3>OH`
Explanation: Classes of organic compounds are those
b) NH2`> F`>CH3`> OH`
which involves organic compounds such as carbon, c) NH2`>OH`> CH3`>F`
hydrogen and oxygen. Hence, electro compounds is not a
d) F`> OH`>NH2`>CH3`
class of organic compounds.
View Answer
10. Which among these is not associated with aliphatic
Answer: d
compounds Explanation: In the sequence ” F`> OH`> NH2`> CH3`”, F’ is
a) They contain (4n+2)pi electrons the most stable one and CH3′ is the least stable one, as the
b) Contain straight chain compounds stability of the anions increases on moving towards the
c) Contain branched chain compounds right of the periodic table.
d) Has appropriate number of H-atoms and functional
4. Identify the correct sequence with respect to Inductive a) It is not hybridized
effects b) It is sp hybridized
a) CF3`> CH2F`> CHF2`> CF3` c) It is sp2 hybridized
b) CF3`> CHF2`> CH2F`> CH3` d) It is sp3 hybridized
c) CH3`> CH2F`> CHF2`> CF3` View Answer
d) CH3`> CHF2`> CH2F`v CF3`
View Answer Answer: c
Explanation: As a result of its overall structure and
Answer: b electron delocalization, it becomes a sp2 hybridized,
Explanation: As electron withdrawing substituent is aromatic molecule.
greater in CF3, it is more stable and CH3 is the least stable
one and hence the sequence. 9. Can a linear molecule have aromaticity?
a) Yes
5. Stability sequence: primary carbocation> secondary b) No
carbocation > tertiary carbocation. View Answer
Is this sequence correct?
a) Yes Answer: b
b) No Explanation: A molecule can have aromaticity if it is closed
View Answer loop or ring-shaped or has p-orbitals and hence linear
molecule cannot have aromaticity.
Answer: b
Explanation: The tertiary carbocation has the highest 10. Select the incorrect statement:
stability and the primary carbocation has the least a) A resonance may sometimes cause sp3 atoms to
stability, as it lies close to electron withdrawing group and become sp2 hybridized
hence the sequence is not correct. b) Delocalizing one lone pair causes aromaticity
c) One lone pair will be counted as two pi electrons
6. Identify the incorrect statement regarding aromaticity according to Huckel’s equation
a) It is the extra stability possessed by a molecule d) Two sigma bonds make up a double bond
b) p-orbitals must be planar and overlap View Answer
c) Cyclic delocalization takes place
d) It does not follow Huckel’s rule Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: A double bond is one which has a sigma bond
and a pi bond. Each pi bond has two pi electrons.
Answer: d
Explanation: It follows Huckel’s rule, according to which a
molecule must possess specific number of pi electrons ORGANIC REACTIONS
within a closed ring of p-orbitals.
1. Identify the one which does not come under the organic
7. Aromatic rings do not have resonance structures. State addition reaction
true or false a) Hydration
a) False
b) Dehydration
b) True c) Halogenation
View Answer
d) Hydrohalogenation
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: Aromatic rings have resonance structure due
Answer: b
to cycling double bonds and all aromatic rings must have Explanation: Dehydration comes under elimination
resonance but the converse need not be satisfied. reaction and hence it does not come under addition
8. Select the correct statement regarding the aromatic reaction.
nitrogen molecule
2. Choose the correct one which will react faster in the 6. Identify the one which on reaction with carboxylic acid
SN2 nucleophilic substitution reaction at high temperature gives Ester
a) CH2-CH=CH2=Br a) Ketone
b) CH2 = CH- CH2 – Br b) Alcohol
c) CH2 = CH- CH2 = Br c) Aldehyde
d) CH= CH2 – CH2 – Br d) Sugars
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: b
Explanation: The carbocation character in the transition Explanation: Alcohols on reaction with carboxylic acid at
state causes stabilization of the resonance and hence CH2 high temperature, in the presence of sulphuric acid gives
= CH- CH2 – Br (2- bromobutane) is the one which will Ester.
react faster compared to the others.
7. Select the correct statement regarding carboxylic acids
3. What will be the reactivity of chlorobenzene in an a) They form acyl chlorides on reaction with PCl5
electrophilic substitution reaction with benzene? b) Aldehydes in the presence of H+/ Cr2O7 forms
a) Reacts very slowly than benzene carboxylic acids
b) Reacts in the same way as benzene c) They combine with alcohols to form esters
c) Reacts faster than benzene d) Upon polymerization, they form polymers
d) Does not react with benzene View Answer
View Answer
Answer: d
Answer: a Explanation: Carboxylic acids do not undergo
Explanation: The rate of the reaction depends on the polymerization reaction.
electron density in the ring and here in this case resonance
is not favorable and the electronegativity dipole 8. Primary alcohols undergo what reaction to form
dominates. This slows down the reactivity of alkenes?
chlorobenzene. a) Elimination
b) Oxidation
4. Alcohol on refluxing with Cr2O7 gives: c) Reduction
a) Ester d) Hydrolysis
b) Aldehyde View Answer
c) Sugar
d) Carboxylic acid Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: Upon elimination or dehydration, the primary
alcohols form alkenes.
Answer: d
Explanation: Alcohol (R-OH), when it is refluxed with 9. Carbonyl compounds especially ketones undergo
Cr2O7, it forms carboxylic acid (R-COOH). reduction to form
a) Primary alcohols
5. Alkene under high temperature and high-pressure forms b) Secondary alcohols
a) Alcohol c) Alkanes
b) Polyalkyne d) Alkenes
c) Polyalkane View Answer
d) Polyalkene
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: Ketones in the presence of NaBH4 undergoes
Answer:c reduction to form secondary alcohols.
Explanation: Alkenes undergoes polymerization reaction
under high temperature and pressure to form poly alkanes 10. Primary amides get converted into primary amines by:
-(C-C)-n. a) Addition
b) Oxidation 4. Which among the following is not a physical method:
c) Reduction a) X-ray fluorescence spectroscopy
d) Acylation b) Atomic emission spectroscopy
View Answer c) Inert gas fusion
d) Trace element analysis
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: Primary amides upon heating in the presence
of hydrogen and nickel catalyst, gets reduced to form Answer: c
primary amines. Explanation: Inert gas fusion is an example of chemical
methods of quantitative analysis, as it involves chemical
reaction such as oxidation.
QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS 5. Select the inappropriate statement regarding
1. Identify the one which does not come under the quantitative analysis
a) It helps in determining the outcome of the product
chemical methods of quantitative analysis
a) Gravimetric b) It helps in determining the impurities in the sample
c) It fails to indicate the presence of lead in some
b) Titrimetric
c) Volumetric compound
d) Magnetic suceptibility d) It could identify the amounts of dosage present in the
View Answer drug
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Magnetic suceptibility comes under physical Answer: c
methods of qunatitative analysis and hence the answer. Explanation: It can identify the presence of lead and could
also account for its concentration in case of paints and
2. Quantitative analysis is one which is used for separating toys.
out the specific constituents from a mixture. This
statement is: 6. Identify the test which is not a part of qualitative
analysis:
a) True
a) Litmus test
b) False
View Answer b) Kastle-Meyer test
c) Iodine test
Answer: b d) Flame test
Explanation: Quantitative analysis is used to measure the View Answer
quantity, (i.e the amount) present and the above
mentioned statement defines qualitative analysis. Answer: a
Explanation: Kastle-meyer test is done for identification of
3. Select the incorrect statement regarding analytical blood, Iodine test is done for identification of starch and
balance Flame test is done to identify Barium.
a) It is the fundamental kit in quantitative analysis
7. Covalent molecules can be identified using quantitative
b) It measures samples very accurately
c) It could measure the difference in mass upto 0.1 mg methods. State true or false
a) False
d) It is not a sensitive instrument
b) True
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: It is a very sensitive instrument as it could Answer: a
accurately measure the weight of a particular compound Explanation: The qualitative analysis is used to identify
of upto 0.1 mg. covalent molecules by distinguishing them using physical
properties such as melting point, etc.
8. Identify the reagent which is not commonly used in i.e; they have two additional hydrogen atoms in
qualitative analysis comparison with the others.
a) 6M NaOH
b) 6M HCl 2. Identify the simplest alkane
c) 6M HNO3 a) Methane
d) 6M NH4 b) Methene
View Answer c) Ethane
d) Ethene
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: 6M NH3 is the reagent commonly used in
qualitative analysis because it is used in almost every Answer: a
group procedures. Explanation: Methane, called the parent molecule, is the
simplest among the alkanes and it has the simplest
9. Select the correct statement about the reagent 6M formula with one carbon atom.
HNO3
a) It forms hydroxo complexes 3. Select the minimum number of carbon atoms, a
b) It destroys hydroxo and ammonia complexes molecule must possess so as to be regarded as a higher
c) It forms NH3 complexes alkane
d) It decreases the H+ ion concentration a) 15
View Answer b) 16
c) 17
Answer: b d) 18
Explanation: It is a good oxidizing agent, dissolves in View Answer
insoluble hydroxides and it destroys hydroxo and ammonia
complexes. Answer: c
Explanation: A molecule with more than 17 carbon atoms
10. Identify the incorrect statement regarding the reagent are regarded as higher alkanes such as waxes and solids.
6M NH3
a) It increases hydroxide and NH3 concentration 4. Identify the incorrect statement
b) It decreases H+ concentration a) Alkanes with repeated –CH2- units constitute a
c) It is capable of precipitating insoluble hydroxides homologus series
d) It is capable of forming hydro complexes b) They are very reactive
View Answer c) They have very less biological activity
d) Petroleum and natural gas are the main sources of
Answer: d alkanes
Explanation: It forms only NH3 complexes and does not View Answer
form hydro complexes.
Answer: b
Explanation: Alkanes in general are not very reactive, but
they are associated with functional groups which are
ALKANES reactive.
1. Select the incorrect statement regarding alkanes 5. Which among the following is not an alkane isomer with
a) It is otherwise known as Paraffin 6 carbon atoms
b) It is an acyclic saturated hydrocarbon a) Hexane
c) In alkanes, C-C bonds are single b) 2,3-dimethylbutane
d) Alkanes have the general formula CnH2n c) 2,2-dimethylbutane
View Answer d) Neopentane
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: Alkanes have the general formula CnH2n+2,
Answer: d Answer: c
Explanation: Neopentane is an isomer with 5 carbon atoms Explanation: At low pressure both propane and butane
and hence it is not an isomer with 6 carbon atoms. gets liquefied, hence they form the main components of
LPG.
6. The other name for branched chain alkanes is
a) Paraffins 10. An alkane with 6 carbon atoms will have how many
b) Isoparaffins hydrogen atoms?
c) Neoparaffins a) 11
d) Naphthenes b) 12
View Answer c) 13
d) 14
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: Linear and branched chain alkanes have
difference in their physical properties and hence they are Answer: d
given different prefix like n- and iso- respectively. Explanation: From the formula CnH2n+2, if n=6 then
(2*6)+2=14.
7. Select the incorrect statement regarding the boiling
points of alkanes
a) Boiling point increases with stronger Vander Waal’s
forces ALKENES
b) Surface area is the only factor which determines the
1. In Alkenes the Carbon atoms are connected to each
boiling point of alkane
other by a
c) Boiling point of straight chain alkanes is greater than a) Single bond
that of branched chain alkanes b) Double bond
d) The boiling point of cycloalkanes is always higher than c) Triple bond
that of linear alkanes
d) Not connected
View Answer View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: b
Explanation: Number of electrons and surface area are the
Explanation: Alkenes have at least one double bond in
two factors which determine the boiling point. addition to single bond as they are unsaturated
8. Choose the correct statement : hydrocarbons.
a) Alkanes have poor conductivity
2. Which among these is not a structural isomer of the
b) They form hydrogen bonds compound C4H8
c) They have good solubility in non polar solvents than a) But-1-ene
polar solvents b) But-2-ene
d) Alkanes have less density than that of water c) But-3-ene
View Answer
d) 2-methylpropene
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: They undergo polarization and hence they do Answer: c
not form hydrogen bonds.
Explanation: The compound but-3-ene have a structural
9. Liquified petroleum gas is mainly composed of : formula different from the above three and hence it is not
a) Methane and ethane a structural isomer of C4H8.
b) Ethane and propane 3. Select the incorrect statement regarding alkenes
c) Propane and butane a) In alkenes, the carbons are connected by pi bonds
d) Butane and hexane b) Alkenes have almost same physical properties as that of
View Answer the alkanes
c) Alkenes are less reactive than alkanes 7. Which among the following is not colourless:
d) Alkenes undergo polymerization reaction a) Methene
View Answer b) Ethene
c) Propene
Answer: c d) Butene
Explanation: Alkenes are not less reactive than alkanes, View Answer
indeed they are very reactive compared with them due to
the presence of C=C. Answer: b
Explanation: Methene compound does not exist according
4. Identify the addition reaction which is not undergone by to the formula CnH2n and also due to the lack of C=C.
the alkenes
a) Mercuration 8. Which among the following alkenes is used in the
b) Oxymercuration manufacturing of plastics
c) Hydroboration a) Butadiene
d) Halogenation b) 1,2-butadiene
View Answer c) 1,3-butadiene
d) 2-butadiene
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: Alkenes do not undergo mercuration, indeed
they undergo oxymercuration , a process in which an Answer: c
alkene is converted into an alcohol. Explanation: Commonly this 1,3 butadiene is a widely used
chemical in terms of a monomer as it has a very good
5. Identify the incorrect statement regarding the synthesis electrical resistivity.
of alkenes
a) Cracking of a hydrocarbon yields alkenes 9. 4-chlorobut-1-ene is the name of which among the
b) The reactions are exothermic following alkenes
c) Zeolite catalyst helps in the synthesis of alkenes a) CH2Cl-CH2=CH-CH2
d) The synthesis of alkenes is otherwise known as b) CH2Cl-CH2-CH-CH2
reforming c) CH2Cl=CH2-CH=CH2
View Answer d) CH2Cl-CH2-CH=CH2
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The reactions takes place at high Answer: d
temperatures and hence they are endothermic. Explanation: The structure CH2Cl-CH2-CH=CH2 has the
name 4Chlorobut-1-ene according to the IUPAC naming
6. Identify the one which shows E-Z mechanism system.
a) 3-methylpent-2-ene
b) 2-methylpent-2-ene 10. Ethylene on reaction with bromine forms which among
c) Methyl-3-pent-2-ene the following product
d) 2,3-methylpentene a) BrH2C-CH2Br
View Answer b) BrH2C=CH2Br
c) Br2HC=CHBr2
Answer: a d) Br2HC-CHBr2
Explanation: In ‘z’ mechanism, the compounds with higher View Answer
priority will be located opposite to each other of the
double bond, in ‘E’ mechanism the compounds with high Answer: a
priority will be located in z corners and hence 3- Explanation: The above reaction between Ethene and
methylpent-2-ene is the one which shows E-Z mechanism bromine is known as electrophilic halogenation reaction
in which the priority group is CH3 and CH2CH3. and the products usually formed are ethylene dihalides.
ALKYNES 5. Majority of the alkynes are not prepared from/ by:
a) Condensation
1. Alkynes are more reactive than alkenes’ State true or b) Acetylene
false c) Dehydrohalogenation
a) False d) Hydrogenation
b) True View Answer
View Answer
Answer: d
Answer: a Explanation: Often, alkynes are obtained from the
Explanation: Alkynes are not as reactive when compared acetylene through the condensation process and
with the alkenes and the alkanes as they even more sometimes by dehydrohalogenation.
unsaturated when compared with them.
6. Alkynes cannot be prepared from
2. Select the incorrect statement a) Ketones
a) The addition reactions occur more frequently in the b) Alcohols
alkenes than the alkynes c) Aldehydes
b) The pi system of the alkynes gets weakened when they d) Other alkynes
lose the pi atoms View Answer
c) Alkynes readily undergo oligomerization
d) Alkynes do not undergo polymerization Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: Only the aldehydes, ketones, and few other
alkynes can give rise to a new alkyne compound.
Answer: d
Explanation: Alkynes readily undergo polymerization and 7. The transformation into carboxylic acids of the alkynes
form polymers such as polyacetylenes. takes place with the help of which among the following
reagents?
3. Select the incorrect statement regarding terminal a) Potassium chlorate
alkynes b) Potassium permanganate
a) Methylacetylene is an example of terminal alkynes c) Potassium dichromate
b) Terminal alkynes are more acidic when compared with d) Potassium chloride
alkenes View Answer
c) Terminal alkynes are not as acidic as alkanes
d) These have a replaceable acidic hydrogen atom Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: The cycloaddition of the alkynes leads to the
oxidative cleavage among them and hence it results in the
Answer: c formation of carboxylic acids.
Explanation: Terminal alkynes are very much acidic than
both alkenes and alkanes as they have a high pKa value. 8. Identify the incorrect statement:
a) Alkynes exists in gaseous state
4. The major alkyne, acetylene compound is produced by b) They are soluble in water
which among the following application on natural gas c) They are soluble in organic solvents
a) Hydrogenation d) Alkynes have a very good boiling point
b) Partial oxidation View Answer
c) Cracking
d) Hydrohalogenation Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: Alkyne molecules being non-polar, they do
not dissolve in polar solvents like water.
Answer: b
Explanation: A huge quantity of acetylene is produced by 9. Which among the following alkynes is used as a rocket
partial oxidation of the natural gas. fuel?
a) Ethyne
b) Propyne 3. Identify the incorrect statement regarding cycloalkanes
c) But-1-yne a) These have sp3 hybridized carbons
d) Pent-1-yne b) These have tetrahedral bond angles
View Answer c) Stability of the cycloalkanes varies directly with their
respective size
Answer: b d) These undergo nucleophilic substitution reactions
Explanation: Propyne has many advantages and it is not as View Answer
hazardous as compared to the other fuels, so they are
used in rocket fuels. Answer: b
Explanation: Cycloalkane compounds do not have a
10. Which among the following product is formed when perfect tetrahedral bond angle, instead they show a minor
ethyne undergoes hydrogenation? deviation from it which leads to destabilizing effect.
a) Formaldehyde
b) Formic acid 4. Identify the compound with the highest ring strain
c) Acetaldehyde a) Cyclomethane
d) Acetic acid b) Cyclopropane
View Answer c) Cyclobutane
d) Cyclopentane
Answer: c View Answer
Explanation: When ethyne undergoes hydrogenation in
the presence of sulphuric acid, it forms ethanal. Answer: b
Explanation: Cyclopropane is the compound with the
highest ring strain. This is because the carbon atoms are
arranged in the shape of a triangle thus forming C-C-C.

5. Which among the following compounds explodes on

CYCLOALKANES AND CYCLOALKENES
contact with oxygen
1. Cycloalkanes are associated with the general formula a) Cyclopropane
a) CnH2n+2 b) Cyclobutane
b) CnH2(n+2) c) Cyclopentane
c) CnH2n+1-r d) Cyclohexane
d) CnH2(n+1-r) View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: d Explanation: Cyclopropane reacts very aggressively at
Explanation: It is almost the same as that in the case of ordinary temperatures and hence it explodes when comes
alkanes. Here the difference is that 2 is replaced by 1-r in contact with oxygen.
where r represents the number of rings in them.
6. Identify the incorrect statement regarding cyclobutane
2. Cycloalkanes have the same melting and boiling points a) The carbon atoms in the cyclobutane are non-coplanar
as their corresponding alkanes. State true or false b) These exist in nature as colourless gas
a) True c) Cyclobutane is a commercially important compound
b) False d) These compounds often show butterfly conformation
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: c
Explanation: The melting and boiling points of the Explanation: Cyclobutane is a compound which as no
cycloalkanes are much more than the corresponding commercial and medicinal importance but the complex
alkanes. derivative forms of them are used for a variety of
purposes.
7. Identify the alicyclic hydrocarbon which is highly 1. Identify the incorrect statement regarding alkadiene
flammable a) These are acyclic acids
a) Cycloheptane b) These are unsaturated hydrocarbons
b) Cyclopentane c) These compounds have only one C=C bonds
c) Cyclopropane d) These compounds have the general formula CnH2n-2
d) Cyclooctane View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Answer: b Explanation: Alkadiene compounds have a minimum of
Explanation: cyclopentane is a hydrocarbon with 5 carbon two double bonded carbon atoms but they can have more
atoms and they are highly flammable. than two.

8. Identify the incorrect statement regarding cyclohexane: 2. Alkadienes are classified into how many types?
a) It is non-polar a) 1
b) It serves as an organic solvent b) 2
c) It a hydrophilic hydrocarbon c) 3
d) It is commercially used for variety of applications d) 4
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: c
Explanation: This compound is a hydrophobic hydrocarbon Explanation: Based on the position and location of the
as it is non- polar by nature. double bonds, they are classified into three types.

9. Identify the incorrect statement regarding cycloalkenes 3. Identify the incorrect statement regarding conjugated
a) The bonds in them are fewer compared to those in double bonds in alkadiene:
alkenes a) 1,3 alkadienes have conjugated double bond
b) They occur in gaseous form in nature b) Compounds with a double bond exhibit this type of
c) These undergo polymerization bond
d) The conjugated double bonds in them increase their c) 1,3 pentadiene is an example for this bond
stability d) The conjugated dienes have properties similar to that of
View Answer alkenes
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Cycloalkenes mostly appear in liquid state but Answer: b
sometimes they are even found in solid state. Explanation: Compounds with alternative double and
single bonds exhibit this kind of bond.
10. Cycloalkene exhibits aromatic character. State true or
false 4. Identify the one which is the perfect example for
a) True Isolated double bond:
b) False a) 1,4 pentadiene
View Answer b) 1,2 pentadiene
c) 1,3 pentadiene
Answer: b d) 1,5 butadiene
Explanation: Cycloalkene is a compound which has carbon View Answer
atoms arranged in a closed ring but they do not exhibit
aromatic character. Answer: a
Explanation: Only the 1,4 alkadiene compounds exhibit
isolated double bonds.
ALKADIENES 5. Identify the incorrect statement regarding alkadienes
a) Dienes show cis-trans isomerism
b) Conjugated dienes have better stability compared to a) Coordinate bond
other dienes b) Isolated double bond
c) Dienophile supports alkadienes c) Cumulative double bond
d) Alkadienes also undergo hydrobromination d) Conjugated double bond
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: b
Explanation: Dienophiles attack the performance of Explanation: As per the definition of isolation, a double
alkadienes rather than supporting them. bond is separated by more than a single bond.

6. Conjugated diene reacts with which among the 10. Isolated dienes are similar in property to
following to form a cyclohexene a) Monoolefins
a) Phenol b) Diolefins
b) Dienophile c) Triolefins
c) Hexane d) Tetraolefins
d) Tribromo phenol View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b Explanation: Isolated dienes behave more like monoolefins
Explanation: Dienophile on reaction with conjugated and have properties similar to them.
dienes forms cyclohexene and this reaction is known as
Diels-alder reaction.

7. Which among the following dienes undergo addition AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS

with the help of radical-chain mechanism?
1. Identify the correct statement which is related to
a) Cumulated dienes
aromatic hydrocarbon
b) Isolated dienes a) It has only sigma bonds
c) Simple dienes b) It has only pi bonds
d) Conjugated dienes
c) It has a sigma and two pi bonds
View Answer
d) It has a sigma and delocalized pi bond
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: Conjugated dienes undergoes addition Answer: d
reactions and the product usually formed are 1,4 dienes.
Explanation: An aromatic hydrocarbon always has a sigma
8. Identify the statement which is related to Diels-Alder as well as a delocalized pi bond found between the carbon
reaction atoms.
a) It is very stereospecific 2. Select the incorrect option:
b) Molecular distortion takes place a) The aromatic hydrocarbon has a pleasant aroma (smell)
c) Cyclic dienes react very slow than the linear chain b) Some of the aromatic compounds are ring-shaped
dienes
c) Aromatic hydrocarbon can be either mono or polycyclic
d) Addition of maleic anhydride to cyclopentadiene causes d) Benzene is the simplest hydrocarbon
diene and dienophile to produce different products
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: c
Explanation: All the aromatic hydrocarbon are ring shaped
Explanation: Cyclic dienes are more reactive than linear as all of them are sp2 hybridized with a geometry of
chain dienes. trigonal planar.
9. A molecule in which more than one single bond 3. Which among the following is not a property of
separates two double bonds are called as: aromatic hydrocarbon:
a) These compounds have very good aromaticity b) False
b) These compounds have excellent stability View Answer
c) These compounds do not undergo nucleophilic
substitutions but they undergo electrophilic substitutions Answer: b
d) There exists a strong ratio between carbon and Explanation: Arenes are insoluble in water and hence they
hydrogen are non polar compounds.
View Answer
8. Arenes are:
Answer: c a) volatile
Explanation: Aromatic hydrocarbons undergo both b) Water soluble
electrophilic and nucleophilic aromatic substitutions. c) Non-carcinogenic
d) Mostly gases
4. Arenes does not undergo: View Answer
a) Dehydrogenation
b) Coupling reaction Answer: a
c) Halogenation Explanation: Arenes have a very low boiling point and
d) Cyclo additions hence they are volatile in nature.
View Answer 9. The main sources of these arenes are:
Answer: a a) Petroleum
Explanations: Arenes undergo hydrogenation reaction and b) Biogas and petroleum
form saturated ring products. c) Petroleum and coal tar
d) Natural gas
5. Which among these is not a representative arene View Answer
compound?
a) Durene Answer: c
b) Picric chloride Explanation: As these petroleum and natural gas comprise
c) Aspirin of naturally occurring compounds such as carbon and
d) Mesitylene hydrogen in abundance, these serve as the main source of
View Answer arenes.

Answer: b 10. Benzene has a stronger Vander-Waal’s force than

Explanation: Picric acid is a representative arene Methylbenzene. State true or false
compound but not picric chloride. a) False
b) True
6. Which among these is the simplest example for View Answer
polycyclic arenes?
a) Benzacephenanthrylene Answer: a
b) Naphthalene Explanation: The benzene molecule is smaller than that of
c) Pyrene the methylbenzene and hence it does not have the
d) Dibenz-anthracene Vander-Waal’s forces as equal to those of methylbenzene.
View Answer

Answer: b ORGANIC CONCEPTS

Explanation: Naphthalene has fused ring of aromaticity
and has the simplest structure when compared with other REACTION MECHANISM OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons.
1. Why are aryl halides less reactive towards nucleophilic
7. Arenes are polar. State true or false substitution reactions as compared to alkyl halides?
a) True a) The formation of a less stable carbanion
b) Longer carbon halogen bond
c) The inductive effect 3. In the following reaction sequence, what will be X?
d) Sp2-hybridized carbon attached to the halogen
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Overlapping of sp2 orbital of carbon with p- .
orbital of halogen is one of the reasons. Due to a) Benzoic acid
conjugation double bond character in alkyl halide. b) Salicylic acid
c) Phenol
d) Aniline
View Answer

2. What will be the (X) in the below mentioned reaction Answer: D

sequence? Explanation: Aniline will be X as we can see below
reaction. Free bromination will occur, and bromine will get
add to ortho and para position followed diazotisation and
a rapid reaction will take place between diazonium ion and
C2H5OH and 1, 3, 5-tribromo benzene will form.

a)

b) 4. What will be the final product in the below reaction?

c)

d)
View Answer
a)
Answer: b
Explanation: As we can see in below reaction, that firstly
diazotisation reaction will occur. This is followed by
reaction of NaNO2 1 with diazonium ion forming nitro b)
benzene, which will undergo reduction and form aniline.

c)

d) .
View Answer
Answer: a formed that are shown below.
Explanation: As we can see hydrolysis is the first step
which will form a amine group containing compound. This
amino-compound undergoes diazotisation and a rapid
reaction will take place between diazonium ion and
KNO2 and the ‘a’ product will form.

6. Which of the following is not true for SN1 reactions?

a) They occur through a single step concerted reaction
5. Which of the following structures represent the correct
b) They are favoured by polar solvents
major product for the below reaction?
c) Tertiary alkyl halides generally react through this
mechanism
d) Concentration of nucleophile does not affect the rate of
such reactions
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: SN1 reaction is a two-step reaction, step one
is the leaving group leaves, and the second step is the
substrate forms a carbocation intermediate. Formation of
a)
carbocation intermediate is the rate determining step.
Since for the formation of stable intermediate carbocation,
highly polar solvent is required. The bulky substituents
prevent the nucleophiles from approaching the carbon,
which is attached directly to the halogen. SN1is also more
b) favorable as the neighboring alkyl groups are electron
donating, which helps to stabilize the carbocation. SN1
reaction because the nucleophile is not a part of the rate-
determining step.

7. What is not true about below reaction?

c)

.
a) Major product is given by SN1 reaction
b) Through E1 mechanism 3 alkenes are formed
d) . c) 3-Methylpentane-3-ol is also formed as one of the
View Answer product
d) Fractional distillation of elimination product will give
Answer: c
two fractions
Explanation: According to following mechanism we can say
View Answer
that some are major products. As we can see protonation
of hydroxyl group followed by dehydration will leads to Answer: d
hydride shift to the adjacent positively charged carbon for Explanation: As we see below mechanism major product is
formation of more stable carbocation. This will unleash formed by SN1 mechanism and E1 mechanism forms 3
two possibility of attack by Br- at the new carbocation alkenes. 3-Methylpentane-3-ol is also formed in the
from upward and backward and two products will be reaction. Fractional distillation of elimination product will
give three fractions. Hence statement d is false. 10. How many number of pie e- is present in benzene?
a) 6
b) 7
c) 8
d) 9
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Pie electron are those which show de-
localization of the electrons, in same plan or p orbitals and
8. What will be the total number of isomers formed when that there aren’t alternating double and single bonds. But
2-methyl butane is subjected to monochlorination? the electron in one p-p overlapping is present
a) 5 perpendicular to the plane of ring.
b) 4
c) 3
d) 6
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Monochlorination of 2 methyl butane gives
REARRANGEMENT REACTIONS
two pairs of enantiomers. 1st pair of enantiomer is 1-
chloro-2-methyl butane and 2nd pair of enantiomer is 2- 1. Which types of isomers are formed in rearrangement
chloro-3-methyl butane. reactions?
1-chloro-3-methyl butane and 2-chloro-2-methyl butane a) structural isomers
products are also formed. b) Geometrical isomers
c) Optical isomer
d) Conformational isomers
View Answer
9. The number of substitution products formed when Answers: a
metabromo anisole is treated with KNH2/NH3? Explanation: Products formed have the same molecular
a) 1 formula, but their atoms have different arrangements or
b) 2 bonds. For example, Butane and isobutane have the same
c) 3 number of carbon (C) atoms and hydrogen (H) atoms, so
d) 4 their molecular formulas are the same.
View Answer
2. What is the main difference between Hofmann and
Answer: c Curtius rearrangement?
Explanation: Nucleophile (-NH2)will attack on Br and there a) Products are different
will be three possibilities of bond formation and those are b) Intermediate formed is different
ortho, para and meta position as shown in the below c) Reactants are different
structures number 2, 3 and 1 respectively. d) Isomers
View Answer

Answers: c
Explanation: The Hofmann rearrangement occurs with an
amide. The Curtius rearrangement occurs with an acyl
azide.
3. With accompanying 1, 2-rearrangement in wolff c) 3o
rearrangement, an α-diazocarbonyl compound is d) 4o
converted into a ketene by loss of which of the following View Answer
compound?
a) Dioxygen Answer: c
b) Dinitrogen Explanation: 3o-carbocation is relatively stable, and has
c) Disulphur been shown to return to pinacol by reaction in the
d) Ammonia presence of isotopically labeled water. A 1, 2-methyl shift
View Answer generates an even more stable carbocation in which the
charge is delocalized by heteroatom resonance.
Answer: b
Explanation: The leaving group (N2) and the migrating 7. In which medium Favorskii rearrangement occurs?
group (R1) are antiperiplanar, which favors a concerted a) Acidic
mechanism, in which nitrogen extrusion occurs b) Basic
concurrently with 1, 2-alkyl shift. c) Neutral
d) Alkaline
4. Which Intermediate is formed in Wolff’s reaction? View Answer
a) Carbene
b) Ketene Answer: b
c) Carbocation Explanation: It is a base catalysed reaction:
d) Carbanion
View Answer

Answers: b
Explanation: Ketene is formed as intermediate in Wolff’s
Mechanism of Favorskii rearrangement: Here OH- group of
reaction. Formation of Diazonium ion will be followed by
NaOH is attaching at the keto-group and the ring will open
reaction in presence of heat which leads to rearrangement
for the stability of the molecule.
of bonds and ketene will be formed.

8. The benzylic acid rearrangement reaction of a cyclic

5. Which was the first molecular rearrangement identified diketone leads to _______
as such by early chemists? a) Ring expansion
a) Wolff’s rearrangement b) Ring contraction
b) Pinacole rearrangement c) Ring fusion
c) Favorskii rearrangement d) Isomers
d) Hofmann rearrangement View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answers: b Explanation: The benzylic acid rearrangement reaction of a
Explanation: The pinacol rearrangement was the first cyclic diketone leads to ring contraction as shown in below
molecular rearrangement identified as such by early diagram.
chemists.

6. Which intermediate carbocation is more stable in

pinacole -pinacolone rearrangement?
a) 1o
b) 2o
9. Which medium is used in benzylic acid rearrangement Answer: c
reaction? Explanation: The substitution reaction can be classified by
a) Neutral an electrophile or a nucleophile, whether a reactive
b) Strong basic intermediate involved in the reaction is a carbocation, a
c) Mild acidic carbanion or a free radical.
d) Strong acidic
View Answer 2. Why the chloroform layer becomes purple, when a
colourless solution of potassium iodide is passed through a
Answer: b colourless solution of chloroform?
Explanation: The mechanism of this benzylic acid a) Iodine
rearrangement starts with the attack of hydroxide on one b) Chlorine
of the carbonyl groups. c) Potassium chloride
d) Potassium iodide
10. Which type of catalytic reaction, does Dienone phenol View Answer
rearrangement reaction belong?
a) Acid catalysed Answer: a
b) Base catalysed Explanation: The iodine so liberated, dissolves in the
c) Acidic chloroform, giving it a purple colour.
d) Neutral 2KI + Cl2 –> 2KCl + I2
View Answer (Iodine)

Answer: a 3. A layer of reddish brown precipitate which is formed on

Explanation: The first step in the mechanism of this the iron knife, when an iron knife is dipped in an aqueous
reaction is the protonation of the most basic atom in the solution of copper sulphate is of which compound or
molecule, the oxygen of the carbonyl group (as shown in element?
below reaction). a) Iron sulphate
b) Copper
c) Rust
d) Copper sulphate
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: copper produced in the below reaction will be
deposited on iron knife gives reddish brown colour.
DISPLACEMENT SUBSTITUTION REACTION & ELECTRON
Fe + CuSO4 –> FeSO4 + Cu
MOVEMENT
(copper)
1. Which of the following statement is false for
4. What is the correct order of reactivity series of the
substitution reaction?
halogen?
a) One functional group in a compound replaces another
a) F > Cl > Br > I
functional group
b) I > Cl > Br > F
b) We can classify substitution reaction by nucleophile and
c) F > Br > Cl > I
electrophile
d) I > Br > Cl > F
c) We can classify substitution reaction only by nucleophile
View Answer
and electrophile
d) Substitution reactions are divided into three general Answer: a
classes, depending on the type of atom or group that acts Explanation: As we know size of F < Cl < Br < I increases
as the substituent down the group in periodic table. Due to the increase in
View Answer the radius and the extra shielding in the atom, which
means that an electron is more easily attracted into the
outer shell of a larger atom leads to than the smaller atom. c) Adolf Von Baeyer
So, reactivity is more of smaller size atoms. d) Victor Grignard
View Answer
5. Which of the following is a not method of electron
movement? Answer: a
a) Bond breaking Explanation: arrow pushing was proposed by Sir Robert
b) Bond making Robinson to show movement of electron within a
c) Bond movement molecule or between two different species. Curved arrow
d) Revolution of bond or curly arrow is used to represent the transfer of
View Answer electrons.

Answer: d 8. Electrons movement take place from __________

Explanation: In bond breaking, bond making and bond a) positively to negatively components
movement, the electrons are moved between atoms or b) negatively to positively charged components
compounds. This is because all of them have the property c) neutral to charged species
of electron transfer or we can say the movement of a pair d) charged species to neutral
of electrons from an electron rich site (a lone pair of View Answer
electrons or a bond) to an electron poor site. But
revolution of bond will not lead to movement of electron Answer: b
between compounds. Explanation: Electrons are negatively charged means
electron rich spices, and so are attracted to the positive
6. Which of the following statement is false for electron side and repelled by the negative side. So when the
movement? transfer takes place the electrons flow through it, they
a) The formal charge becomes one unit more positive at flow from negative to positive species.
the starting atom and one unit more negative at the
terminal atom 9. Which species are formed due to Homolytic bond
b) The last arrow in a chain must be either a bond making breakage?
arrow terminating at a sextet atom, or a bond breaking a) Anion
arrow. b) Cation
c) When a bond is broken, this is represented by a curved c) Free radical
arrow pointing towards from the bond from which d) Atoms
electron will be transfered and ending the arrow pointing View Answer
away towards the next unoccupied molecular orbital Answer: c
d) Curly arrows are superimposed over the structural Explanation: In homolytic cleavage sharing of unpaired
formulae of reactants in a chemical equation to show the electrons on each of the atoms that were formerly joined
reaction mechanism by a bond, takes place. This leads to the formation of free
View Answer radicals.
Answer: d
10. Which of the following type of reaction shows
Explanation: Due to accepting an electron, the species heterolytic bond cleavage?
shows negative charge and the donating will experience a) SN1 reaction
positive charge. The last arrow pushing will show which b) Addition reaction
atom will have what character, so it should be either c) Elimination reaction
breaking or making arrows. If the sigma bond is breakable,
d) Free radical halogenation
donation of electrons become easy. View Answer
7. Who proposed arrow pushing method of showing Answer: d
progression of electons? Explanation: In SN1, Addition and Elimination reaction,
a) Sir Robert Robinson distribution of electrons after bond cleavage is different.
b) Robert Burns Woodward The electrons are transferred to more electronegative
atoms. But Splitting or homolysis of a chlorine molecule, to & IV reaction undergo via SN1 mechanism. As we know the
form two chlorine atoms, initiated by ultraviolet radiation rate of reaction in SN2 reaction is directly proportional to
or sunlight. A chlorine atom has an unpaired electron and the concentration of nucleophile.
acts as a free radical.
3. SN1 reaction undergoes through a carbocation
intermediate as follows:

NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION REACTION

1. Which of the following compound shows the correct [R = t-Bu, iso-Pr, Et, Me] (X = Cl, Br, I)
The correct statements are:
decreasing order of solvolysis with aqueous ethanol?
I. The decreasing order of rate of SN1reaction is t-BuX >
iso-PrX > EtX > MeX
II. The decreasing order of ionization energy is MeX > EtX >
iso-PrX > t-BuX
III. The decreasing order of energy of activation is t-BuX >
The correct choice is: iso-PrX > EtX > MeX
a) III > II > I > IV a) I & II are correct
b) III > II > IV > I b) I & III are correct
c) II > III > IV > I c) II and III are correct
d) III > I > IV > II d) I, II & III are correct
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: a
Explanation: The solvation of above compound can be Explanation:
compared by this trend, i.e. Solvation trend: 3O halide > (1) Formation of carbocation is RDS, more stable the
2O halide > 1O halide > vinylic halide. So, (III) molecule is an cation more easily it will form. Hence rate order is t-BuX >
example of 3O halide, (II) molecule is an example of iso-PrX > EtX > MeX
2O halide, (IV) molecule is an example of 1O halide and (I) (2) Formation of carbocation CH3 is most difficult hence
molecule is an example of vinylic halide. ionization energy is highest. Similarly, EtX has lesser
ionization energy than MeX and so on.
2. Which of the following reaction will go faster if the (3) Order of energy of activation is MeX > EtX > iso-PrX > t-
concentration of the nucleophile is raised? BuX.

4. Which statement is incorrect about the following

reaction?

a) The rate of these reaction depends on both [R—I] and

[131I-]
a) I and III b) Loss of optical activity was twice as fast as the gain of
b) II and IV radioactivity
c) I and II c) Each molecule undergoing substitution suffers Inversion
d) I, II and IV of configuration
View Answer d) The Final solution has radioactive iodine only
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: I & II reaction undergo via SN2 mechanism. III
Answer: d
Explanation:

a)

Here the rate of reaction is directly proportional to the

concentration of RI and (131I-), so statement is correct.
If any molecule undergoes substitution, then it forms
inversion product due to SN2 reaction. Hence statement is
b)
correct.
For statement, below reaction one (+) molecule converts
into (–) molecular and it also converts one optical reaction
of (+) molecule.

c)

Final solution contains both Iodine (I131) and normal (I). So,
we can say this is the only incorrect statement about the
above reaction.

5. Which one is an excellent substrate for SN2 reaction? d)

View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: As we know rate order in SN2 is CH3X > 1o >
a)
2o > 3o halide and rate order in SN1 is CH3X < 1o< 2o <
3o halide. So according to the following representation.

b)
c) CH3 – CH2 – Cl

d)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Alpha-halo carbonyl undergoes fastest SN2 7. Which configuration will be adopted by X and Y
reaction due to the coupling of π* of CO bond and π* of C– respectively?
X bond.

6. Which of the following curve correctly represents SN1 vs

SN2?

a) R, R
b) R, S
c) S, S
d) S, R a) Rate of formation of (II) and (IV)would be identical
View Answer b) Rate of formation of (I) would be slower than that of (III)
c) Formation of (I) would show primary isotope effect
Answer: b d) Formation of (III) involves E1 reaction
Explanation: When ether reacts with the reactant View Answer
nucleophilic substitution conjugate base reaction (i.e.
SNCB) will take place and there will be retention of Answer: d
configuration and it will be R product. When C5H5NH Explanation: Rate of formation of II and IV similar because
reacts with reactant SN2 reaction will take place and H & D are approximately of same size.
configuration inversion will take place and it will be S C–H & C–D bond breaking is the part of RDS hence rate in
product. (I) is slower than (III)
It undergoes E2 not via E1 because carbocation is not
stable.

8. What will be the correct order of SN2 / E2 ratio for the

%yield of the product of the following halide? 10. Among the following reactions, which one is incorrect?

a)

a) III > IV > II > I

b) III > II > IV > I
b)
c) I > III > IV > II
d) II > I > III > IV
View Answer

Answer: a
c)
Explanation: Least hindered halide give fastest SN2
reaction as the hindrance increases. As the hindrance
increases, the occurrence of SN2 reaction decreases.
d)
View Answer

Answer: b

9. Which of the following is an incorrect statement?

Explanation:

α-halocarbonyl are the best SN2 substrate.

Here nucleophilic substitution reaction will happen and
the above product will be formed. Hence this reaction is
correct.
 make use of this to react with an electron deficient species
b) The nucleophilicity of an element (an electron donor)
generally increases on going down a group in the periodic
table
Here (PrO) and (CH3) will be at same carbon atom and
c) A nucleophile is electron-deficient species
(OH) will be at adjacent carbon atom. Hence this reaction
d) All good nucleophiles are good bases when we deal
is wrong.
across the period
View Answer

Answer: c
n-PrO– will attack the carbon atom attached to oxygen Explanation: A nucleophile is a chemical species that
above the plane and the above product will be formed. donates an electron pair to an electrophile to form a
Hence the reaction is correct. chemical bond in relation to a reaction, it is an electron
rich species.

3. What is the correct order of nucleophilicity in the

–
Attack of Bromine ion (Br ) will be at that carbon atom following options?
where less substitution is present, the a) (CH3)3CO– > CH3–
above product will form. Hence this reaction is correct. b) CH3S– > CH3SH
c) CH3CH2CH2O– < (CH3)3CO–
d) (CH3CH2)3N > (CH3CH2)3P
View Answer
NUCLEOPHILIC & ELECTROPHILIC SUBSTITUTION
REACTION Answer: b
Explanation: Alkoxides are weaker Nu– than carbanion
1. What is the correct statement for the given reactions?
because negative charge on oxygen is more stable than
carbon. CH3CH2CH2O– is more nucleophilic, due to less
steric hindrance. The negative charge is more nucleophilic
than a stable compound.
a) B reacts faster than A
b) Both give the same product 4. Which of the following order is correct for the solvolysis
c) A gives trans and B gives c is product in 50% aqueous ethanol at 44.6oC?
d) A gives cis and B gives trans product
View Answer
a)
Answer: b
Explanation:
b)

c)

In reaction A, groups attached to benzene are on opposite

plane so SNGP mechanism will be followed and B will d)
undergo SN2. Due to SNGP (A) reacts faster than B and View Answer
both give same product.
Answer: b
2. Which of the following statement is incorrect about Explanation: Solvolysis is a nucleophilic substitution (SN1)
nucleophiles? or elimination, where the nucleophile is a solvent
a) Nucleophiles have an unshared electron pair and can
molecule. Solvolysis order CH3X < 1o halide < 2ohalide < b) Each of the above reactions is likely to be SN1
allylic halide < 3o halide. c) First two reactions follow SN2 and next two reactions
follow SN1 pathway
5. Identify correct step representing SN1 mechanism for d) There is no role of “steric factor”
the cleavage of ether with HI. View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: As the steric hindrance increase, attack on
carbon attached to Br decreases. It is possible only when
reaction undergoes via SN2 reaction.

7. Which of the following reaction is not possible?

a) 1 and 3 a)
b) 2 and 3
c) 1 and 4
d) 2 and 4
View Answer

Answer: b b)
Explanation: As we can see in below reaction first step is a
slow step in which carbocation is formed. And the second
step is fast where nucleophile will attach carbocation.

c)

d)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: In reaction, the nucleophilic attack will be at
aliphatic chlorine atom instead of aromatic chlorine
because aromatic carbon SN2 is not possible.
6. The relative rates of nucleophilic substitution for the
given substrates are as follows:
Compound Approx. Relative rate
CH3CH2Br 1.0
CH3CH2CH2Br 0.28
(CH3)2CHCH2Br 0.030
(CH3)3 CCH2Br 0.00000042
8. What will be the starting material (I) in the given
Which of the following statement is correct?
reaction?
a) Each of the above reactions is likely to be SN2
 synchronously, i.e., in one step, so it will undergo SN2
pathway.

10. Benzyl chloride is reacted with different nucleophiles

(HO–, CH3COO–, PhO–, CH3O–). Arrange them in the
decreasing order of reactivity with Benzyl chloride.
a) CH3O– > HO– > PhO– > CH3COO–
b) HO– > CH3O– > PhO– > CH3COO–
a) c) HO– > PhO– > CH3O– > CH3COO–
d) CH3COO– > CH3O– > HO– > PhO–
View Answer

Answer: b
b)
Explanation: HO– > CH3O– > PhO– > CH3COO–
Here,CH3O– is most stable as the negative charge is
distributed among two oxygen, followed by oxygen attach
to phenyl group will share electron in resonance. And
c) carbon is more electronegative than hydrogen attached to
oxygen that’s why HO– is less stable than CH3O– and more
nucleophilic.

11. Among the following compounds, what is the

d) decreasing order of reactivity towards electrophilic
View Answer substitution?

Answer: d
Explanation: Leaving group center should be anti to each
other and nucleophilic.

a) III > I > II > IV

b) IV > I > II > III
c) II > III > II > IV
9. Which of the following statement is true about the d) I > III > II > IV
reaction given below? View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: This is a electrophilic substitution and more
the electrodensity on the ring faster the reaction.
a) It involves a carbocation intermediate III > I > II > IV (Reactivity order towards E substitution)
b) The rearrangement is due to SN1 reaction mechanism
12. Among the following, which one is not a meta directing
c) It proceeds via a concerted SN2 pathway
group in an electrophilic attack?
d) It proceeds via a concerted SN1 pathway
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: In this reaction nucleophile (–OMe) will a)
attack at carbon attach to oxygen and in this mechanism,
one bond is broken and one bond is formed
 a) increases electron density at meta-position
b) increases electrons density at ortho and para-positions
c) decreases electron density at meta-position
d) decreases electron density at ortho and para-positions
b) View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Because nitro group decreases electron
density at ortho and para-positions, which will leads to
c) deactivation of ring.

ELIMINATION REACTION
d)
View Answer 1. Assuming both the reactions as E1, where will the
expected ratio between KH/KD lies between?
Answer: d
Explanation: d id not a meta directing group in
electrophilic attack because halogen are ortho- para
a) nearly I
directing and ring deactivationg group.
b) nearly 3
13. What will be the decreasing order of electrophilic c) nearly 5
nitration of the following compounds? d) anything in between 2 and 8
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: In E1 elimination RDS is the formation of
carbocation from halide hence C – H and C – D are not the
part of RDS there KH/KD is approx. 1.
a) S > R > P > Q
b) R > S > P > Q
c) R > P > S > Q
d) P > S > R > Q
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: R > P > S > Q 2. Predict the product for the following elimination
In R electron donating group is present. In P, Cl will attract reaction.
rings electron and donation will increase. In S there is
electron donating group hence it is more reactive. If
C2H5 is not there than this order reverses.
In Q electron pair will get into resonance.

a)

b)

14. Nitro group is meta-directing in electrophilic aromatic

substitution reactions?
c)
d)
View Answer
d)
Answer: b
View Answer
Explanation: Iodine is a better leaving group than chlorine,
so attach will be at iodine site. Answer: b
Explanation: Here three times Elimination(E2) occurs and
three pie bond will be formed and three water molecule
will be removed as shown below.

3. Which of the following is incorrect statement for the

giver reaction?

5. Which of the following statements is correct for alkyl

halide?
a) Alkyl halide will always show SN1 mechanism
a) Rate of formation of II and IV would be identical b) As branching at carbon increases, E1 mechanism is
b) Rate of formation of I would be slower than that of III favoured as compared to SN1 mechanism
c) Formation of I would show primary isotope effect c) In unimolecular reaction, increasing the temperature
d) Formation of III involves E1 reaction donot favours E1 mechanism
View Answer d) In most unimolecular reactions of alkyl halide E1
reaction is favoured over SN1 reaction
Answer: d
View Answer
Explanation: Rate of formation of II and IV similar because
H & D are approximately of same size. Answer: b
C–H & C–D bond breaking is the part of RDS hence rate in I Explanation: In most unimolecular reactions of alkyl halide
is slower than III SN1 reaction is favoured over E1 reaction. E1 mechanism
It undergo E2 not via E1 because carbocation is not stable. is favoured as compared to SN1 mechanism by branching
at carbon increases, as more steric hinderence at the
4. When the all-cis isomer of C6H6Cl6 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6-
attacking site will leads to E1 mechanism.
Hexachlorocyclohexane) is heated with alc.KOH, what will
be the most probable product? 6. Which of the following order is incorrect for the rate of
E2 reaction?
a) 5-Bromocycloheptene > 4-Bromocycloheptene
b) 2-Bromo- I -phenylbutane > 3-Bromo- I-phenylbutane
a) c) 3-Bromocyclohexene > Bromocyclohexane
d) 3-Bromo-2-methylpentane > 2-Bromo-4-methylpentane
View Answer

b) Answer: a
Explanation: For 5-Bromocycloheptene > 4-
Bromocycloheptene, more stable product leads to faster
c) rate of reaction. Product formed by E2 of 4-
Bromocycloheptene is more stable than 5-
Bromocycloheptene. So, rate of reaction 4- Answer: d
Bromocycloheptene is fater than 5-Bromocycloheptene. Explanation: E2 is a concerted reaction in which bonds
So option 5-Bromocycloheptene > 4-Bromocycloheptene is break and new bonds form at the same time in a single
incorrect. step. Order of reactivity of alkyl halides towards E2
dehydrohalogenation is found to be 3o > 2o > 1o. In E2
reaction both hydrogen and leaving group should be
antiperiplanar and that’s why In E2 elimination different
stereoisomer (diastereomer) converts into different stereo
product.
For 2-Bromo- I -phenylbutane > 3-Bromo- I-phenylbutane,
8. Which of the following statement is correct regarding
it is true rate of reaction for 2-Bromo- I -phenylbutane is
the following reaction?
more than 3-Bromo- I-phenylbutane as product formed in
former is more stable due to resonance.

a) Major product is endocyclic alkene formed according to

Saytzeff
b) Major product is exocyclic alkene formed according to
Saytzeff
For 3-Bromocyclohexene > Bromocyclohexane, it is true
c) Major product is exocyclic alkene formed according to
rate of reaction for 3-Bromocyclohexeneis more than
Hoffmann
Bromocyclohexane as product formed in former is more
d) Major product is endocyclic alkene formed according to
stable.
Hoffmann
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Exocyclic alkene are more stable than endo
beacuse of but due to “steric hindrance” the less
substituted alkene is formed.
For 3-Bromo-2-methylpentane > 2-Bromo-4-
methylpentane, it is true rate of reaction for 3-Bromo-2-
methylpentane more stable than 2-Bromo-4-
methylpentane as product formed in former is more

9. Which of the following statement (s) is/are true about

the following eliminations?

stable.

7. Which of the following statement is correct? (1) Hoffmann product is major product in I (2) Saytzeff
a) E2 is a concerted reaction in which bonds break and product is major product in I (3) Hoffmann product is
new bonds form at the same time in a single step major product in II (4) Saytzeffproduct is major product in
b) Order of reactivity of alkyl halides towards E2 II
dehydrohalogenation is found to be 3o > 2o > 1o a) 1 and 2
c) In E2 elimination different stereoisomer (diastereomer) b) 1 and 4
converts into different stereo product c) 2 and 3
d) All of the mentioned d) 3 and 4
View Answer View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Here correct is statement 1 and 4 are true.
Due to steric hinderence tert-Butyl alcohol anion will
attack less substituted C-H bond.
Ethanol anion will attack more substituted C-H bond to II.
form more stable alkene.

When leaving group are F & NH2 type then they give
hoffmann product.

III.

10. Which incorrect about alkyl bromide having molecular

formula C5H11Br?
a) One isomeric alkyl bromide undergoes E1 elimination at
the fastest rate IV.
b) Only one is incapable of reacting by the E2 mechanism
c) Only one isomer gives a single alkene on E2 elimination
d) 2-Bromopentane gives the most complex mixture of
alkenes on E2 elimination
View Answer

11. In which reaction product formation takes place by

hoffmann rule? 12. Which of the following compounds cannot give E1CB
reaction?
a) CF3 – CHCl2
b) C6h5 – CH2 – CH2F
c) CH3 – CH2 – CH2Br

d)
View Answer

Answer: d
a) I and II Explanation:
b) II and III
c) I, II and III
d) I, II, III and IV
View Answer

Answer: d Compound d will give E2 reaction, Br is a better leaving

Explanation: All of the above molecules will form product group so formation of carboanion and removal of leaving
by hoffmann rule that is less substituted C-H bond will be group occurs simultaneously. But E1CB reaction is shown
attacked because more stable product will be formed via by poor leaving group like in compounds a, b and c.
this in all cases.
I.
13. Incorrect statement (s) is (are)

a) X being electronegative, makes the H (on C-2) more

acidic
a)
b) Due to electron withdrawal nature of X, it stabilises the
carbanion
c) (X) destabilises the carbanion due to the presence of
lone pairs
d) The reaction proceeds by an E1CB pathway
View Answer b)

Answer: c
Explanation: Due to inductive effect of halogen it stabilize
the negative charge on adjacent to carbon atom, as X will
c)
withdraw the electron towards itself.

14. Which of the following is not the examples of E1CB

reaction?
d)
View Answer
a)
Answer: d
Explanation: Compounds a, b and c will follow Addition-
Elimination mechanism.
b)

c)

d) Compound will follow elimination -addition mechanism, as

shown in below reaction. NH– anion first attack on the ring
View Answer
which lead to formation of benzyne ring and further
Answer: d addition of -NH2 will take place.
Explanation: Compound d will give E2 reaction, CL is a
better leaving group so formation of carboanion and
removal of leaving group occurs simultaneously. But E1CB
reaction shown by poor leaving group like in compounds a,

NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE – 1

1. Which of the following organic compound with

b and c. molecular formula C3H C12 exhibits only one signal in the
15. Which of the following reaction will not show addition IH NMR spectrum?
elimination mechanism? a) 2, 2-dichloropropane
b) 1, 2-dichloropropane
c) 1, 3-dichloropropane
d) 1, 1-dichloropropane C4H9NO2;
View Answer chemical shift = 5.30 (broad, 1H)
chemical shift = 4.10 (q, 2H)
Answer: a chemical shift = 2.80 (d, 3H)
Explanation: Only (a) compound has all chemically chemical shift = 1.20 (t, 3H)
equivalent hydrogen. So, give only one peak.

As shown in the above compound, doublet, because of

2. The 1H NMR spectrum of CH3OCHCICH2Cl will exhibit neighbouring 1H attached to N and one will be broad as
________ because of hydrogen attached to N, quatret becauseof
a) A three proton doublet. One proton singlet and a two neighbouring 3H and finally triplet, because
proton doublet of neighbouring 2H.
b) A three proton singlet. One proton singlet and a two
proton doublet 4. Which of the following has three types of hydrogens in
c) A three proton singlet. One proton triplet and a two the following compounds?
proton doublet a) Br-CH = CH2
d) A three proton triplet. One proton triplet and a two b) CH3 – CH2 – CH3
proton triplet c) C6H5CH2
View Answer d) CH3– CH2 – CH(CH3) – N02
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The 1H NMR spectrum of CH3OCHCICH2Cl Answer: a
will exhibit three proton singlet, one proton triplet and Explanation:
two proton doublet.
No. of peaks = n + 1
(n = no. of neighbouring chemically equivalent Hydrogen
nuclii)

We will replace them by D and check the structure if they

are different then they are different.

3. Which of the following 1H-NMR spectrum of compound

with molecular formula C4H9NO2 shows delta 5.30 (broad,
IH), 4.10(q, 2H), 2.80 (d, 3H), 1.20 (t, 3H) ppm? both are different
a) CH3NHCOOCH2CH3 so, total 3 type of hydrogen
b) CH3CH2NHCOOCH3 So, three different type of hydrogen is present in
c) CH3OCH2CONHCH3 compound a.
d) CH3CH2OCH2CONH2
View Answer 5. Which of the compound show only one signal is present
in the PMR spectra ?
Answer: a a) C3H4, C3H6
Explanation: b) C4H6, C5H12
c) C8H18, C2H6O a) CH3–CH2–O–CH2–CH3
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: All of the below compounds have only type of
proton, so only one signal. 6Ha -> 1 group of line;
4Hb -> 1 group of line

Therefore, Intensity => 6 : 4 => 3 : 2.

b)
9H -> 1 group of line and 1H -> 1 group of line / single
peak.
6. How many Hertz does 1 ppm correspond to for an PMR Therefore, Intensity => 9 : 1.
spectrometer operating at a radio frequency of 60 MHz
and 100 MHz? 8. The distance between the centers of the peaks of
a) 6 Hz, 10 Hz doublet is called as?
b) 60 Hz, 100 Hz a) Coupling constant
c) 100 Hz, 60 Hz b) Spin constant
d) 10Hz, 100Hz c) Spin-spin coupling
View Answer d) Chemical shift
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Answer: a
Explanation: When the proton under observation is split
into several peaks by neighboring protons, the distance
between these peaks is a constant called the coupling
constant (J). Any two sets of protons that exhibit the same
coupling constant are most likely splitting eachother
signals and are said to be coupled.

7. Compound C4H10O gave PMR spectrum consisting of

two groups of lines (multiplets) with relative intensities in
the ratio 3 : 2. Other compound of the same formula
exhibited two lines with relative area of 9 : 1. What are
these compounds.
a) Diethyl ether and n-butanol
b) t-Butyl alcohol and 1-Methoxypropane
9. H2, CH4, C2H6 and C6H6 exhibit which PMR spectra?
c) diethyl ether and t-Butyl alcohol
a) Singlet
d) Diethyl ether and 2-Methoxypropane
b) Doublet
View Answer
c) Triplet
Answer: c d) Quintet
Explanation: Answer: a
NMR data: Two groups of lines in 3 : 2 and two groups of View Answer
lines in 9 : 1 for same molecular formula
Explanation: d) magnetogyric ratio
All structures have only one type of hydrogen. So, all give View Answer
single peak.
Answer: a
Explanation: In NMR spectroscopy. the product of Nuclear
‘g’ factor (gN), the nuclear magneton (βN) and the magnetic
field strength (Bo) gives the energy of transition from
alpha to beta state. As shown below:
10. A proton Hb is coupled to four equivalent protons Ha.
The multiplicity and the relative intensity of lines in the
signal Hb is
a) Doublet, I : 4
b) Triplet, I : 4 : 6
c) Quintet, 1 : 4 : 6 : 4 : 1 2. An organic compound having the molecular formulae
d) Quartet, 1 : 4 : 6 : 4 C10H14 exhibited two singlets in the 1H NMR spectrum and
View Answer three signals in the 13C NMR. What is the compound?

Answer: c
Explanation: Each signal in a proton NMR spectrum may or
may not be split into one or more peaks, this is called as a)
multiplicity. The most common concept associated with
signal multiplicity is the n+1 rule. According to this rule,
the signal for the proton under observation will be split
b)
into n+1 peaks by protons attached to adjacent carbons,
where n is the number of such protons.
No. of peaks = n + 1
(n = no. of neighbouring chemically equivalent Hydrogen
c)
nuclii)
So, Hb —-> 4Ha
d)
Multiplicity —->n + 1 = 5 (Quintet)
View Answer
And, according to Pascal triangle(shown below): Intensity–
Answer: a
>1:4:6:4:1
Explanation: In compound a;
1
11
121
1331
14641

NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE – 2

1. In NMR spectroscopy, what is the product of Nuclear ‘g’

factor (gN), the nuclear magneton and the magnetic field
strength (Bo)? Here only 2 types of Hydrogen are present (two Ha &
a) energy of transition from alpha to beta state twelve Hb). So, 2 singlets only. There is no need to
b) chemical shift check 13C NMR. Still, if you check three types carbon are
c) spin-spin coupling constant present (two C1, four C2 and four C2 carbon). Hence, there
peak for 13C NMR.
3. The 1H NMR spectrum of a dilute solution of a mixture Answer: b
of acetone and dichloromethane in CDCl3 exhibits two Explanation:
singlets of 1:1 intensity. What will be the molar ratio of
acetone to dichloromethane in the solution?
a) 3:1
b) 1:3
Where, I: nucleus spin=1/2
c) 1:1
μn: nuclear magneton=5.05×10-27
d) 1:2
μ: magnetic moment by protons=2.79
View Answer
h: Plank constant= 6.63x 10-34joule-seconds.
Answer: b
6. What are the number of signals in 1H NMR in the given
Explanation: If intensity is 1:1, the ratio must be 1:3
molecules?

a) 3, 4, 4, 3 respectively
b) 2, 6, 4, 2 respectively
4. What will be the strength of coupling between geminal c) 2, 4, 6, 2 respectively
protons in the following molecules? d) 2, 4, 2, 6 respectively
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Different types of proton give the different
a) Decrease as the size of ring increase type of signals, so the different hydrogen will give different
b) Increase as the size of ring increase numbers of signals.
As we can see first compound has two type of hydrogen
c) Remains same
d) No relation between the size of the ring & coupling Ha and Hb. Compound second has six type of hydrogen Ha,
View Answer Hb, Hc, Hd, He and H. Compound third has four type of
hydrogen Ha, Hb, Hc, Hd and l forth compound has two
Answer: b type of hydrogen Ha and Hb.
Explanation: Geminal proton 2J coupling i.e. coupling of H
& H on same carbon.

as ring size increases, bond angle outside decreases i.e. α1

7. How many peaks are expected in low-resolution NMR
> α2 > α3 > α4 (according % s character). If B.A. decreases,
spectrum of vinyl chloride and ethyl cyclopropane?
2J coupling increases.
a) 3,5
5. What is the value of gyramagnetic ratio of proton? b) 5,3
a) 41.10 radian/Tesla c) 6,3
b) 42.57 MHz/Tesla d) 3,6
c) 26.75 radian/Tesla View Answer
d) 41.10 MHz/Tesla
Answer: a
View Answer
Explanation: Vinyl chloride compound has three types of
proton as shown below and ethyl cyclopropane has five
types of protons so five peaks will be observed. Hz) ppm. What will be the compound among the choices?
a) 4-ethylphenol
b) 2-ethylphenol
c) 4-methylanisole
d) 4-methylbenzyl alcohol
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: C8H10O

8. What will be the NMR frequency in MHz of bare 1H in a

magnetic field of intensity 1.4092 tesla (given gN = 5.585
and μN = 5.05 x 10-27 JT-1)?
a) 60 MHz
b) 120 MHz
c) 100 MHz
d) 15 MHz
3Ha –> 3.8, singlet (deshielded because of –I of oxygen)
View Answer
3Hb –>2.5, singlet (No such –I)
Answer: a 2Hc –> 7.2, doublet (deshielded because of anisotropy
Explanation: By using the below formula we can calculate effect of benzene as well as because of –I of oxygen)
NMR frequency, where h is Plank’s constant. 2Hd –>6.8, doublet (deshielded because of anisotropy of
benzene).

MASS SPECTROSCOPY

1. Which of the following statement is false for mass

9. At room temperature, what is the number of singlet spectroscopy?
resonances observed in the 1H NMR spectrum of a) Mass spectroscopy is used to identify unknown
Me3CC(O)NMe2 (N, N-Dimethylpivalamide)? compounds within a sample, and to elucidate the
a) 3 structure and chemical properties of different molecules
b) 4 b) Particle are characterized by their mass to charge ratios
c) 5 (m/z) and relative abundances
d) 2 c) This technique basically studies the effect of ionizing
View Answer energy on molecules
d) This technique can be used on all state of matter
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: As shown below; three signals are observed.
3Ha will experience shielding due to O–, so They are Answer: d
different from 3Hb. Explanation: A mass spectrum measures the masses within
a sample. Particles are characterized by their mass to
charge ratios (m/z) and relative abundances. This
technique basically studies the effect of ionizing energy on
molecules and is applied to pure samples as well as
complex mixtures. This technique is only possible to
perform in the gaseous state.
10. An organic compound (MF; C8H10O) exhibited the
following 1H NMR special data: 2. Which of the following main component of mass
62.5 (3H, s), 3.8 (314, s), 6.8 (2H, d, J 8 Hz), 7.2 (2H, d, J 8 spectroscopy deal with resolving the ions into their
characteristics mass components according to their mass- Given: gN = 5.585 and BN = 5.05 x 10-27 JT-I.
to-charge ratio? a) 7.05 T
a) Ion Source b) 6.38 T
b) Analyzer c) 7.58 T
c) Detector System d) 5.93 T
d) Analyzer tube View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b Explanation: According this formula of frequency:
Explanation: The complete process involves the conversion
of the sample into gaseous ions, with or without
fragmentation, which is then characterized by their mass
to charge ratios (m/z) by an analyser. Eventually, the
second analyzer will analyse fragment the selected ions
and detect the ions emerging from the last analyzer and
measure their and relative abundances with the detector
that converts the ions into electrical signals.
6. What are the main criteria on which mass spectrometer
3. Who discovered the mass spectrometer?
used for?
a) Francis Aston
a) Composition in sample
b) J. J Thomson
b) Relative mass of atoms
c) Ernest O. Lawrence
c) Concentration of elements in the sample
d) Walter Kaufmann
d) Properties of sample
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: b
Explanation: The mass spectrometer was invented by JJ
Explanation: A mass spectrometer generates multiple ions
THOMSON. He performed a series of experiments in 1897
from the sample under investigation, it then separates
designed to study the nature of electric discharge in a
them according to their specific mass-to-charge ratio (m/z)
high-vacuum cathode-ray tube. Further modified by F. W.
or we can say on relative mass of atoms, and then records
Aston shortly after World War I. He constructs the first
the relative abundance of each ion type.
velocity focusing mass spectrograph which has mass
resolving power of 130. 7. A compound of molecular formula C8H7ClO shows a
prominent band in its IR spectrum at 1690 cm-1. 1H NMR
4. In which state of matter mass spectroscopy is being
spectrum revealed only two major types of protons in the
performed?
ratio of 5: 2. Which one of the following structures best fits
a) solid
the above data?
b) liquid
c) gaseous
d) plasma a)
View Answer
b)
Answer: c
Explanation: In the mass spectrometric analysis of
compounds is firstly done by production of gas phase ions c)
of the compound, basically by electron ionization. This
molecular ion undergoes fragmentation.
d)
5. A PMR spectrometer operates at 300 MHz. Find the
View Answer
value of magnetic field.
Answer: a Answer: a
Explanation: Explanation:
C8H7ClO IR: 1760 cm–1
IR data: 1690 cm–1 Some options are not possible because of IR data.
NMR data: two types of protons in 5: 2 ratio. Only two 1760 cm–1 –> Represent either ester or anhydride
types of protons. ester –>with cross conjugation or anhydride
Ketone with conjugation shows peaks at 1690 cm–1. chemical reference: 7.2 (1H), d, J = 16.0 Hz
This ‘J’ shows it is a trans alkene.
8. Which species of the following is used to bombard with
the sample for which mass spectroscopy has been 10. The spectrum of a compound with molecular formula
performed? C5H602 is shown below. IR spectrum shows medium
a) Alpha particles intensity band at 3270 and 2180 cm-1. What will be the
b) Neutrons structure of compound? Chemical reference: 1.3 (3H, t);
c) Electrons 2.8 (1H, s), 4.3 (2H, q).
d) Protons
View Answer

Answer: c a)
Explanation: In the mass spectrometer, the sample which
is to be analysed is bombarded with electrons, which leads
to the formation of the ions. The ions are sorted out by b)
accelerating them through electric and magnetic field. A
record of the number of different kinds of ions is called
mass spectrum.
c)
9. An organic compound Q exhibited the following spectral
data obtained by mass spectroscopy.
IR: 1760 cm–1
1
HNMR: chemical reference (ppm): 7.2 (IH, d, 16.0 Hz), 5.1 d)
(IH, m), 2.1 (3H, s), 1.8 (3H, d, J = 7.0 Hz) View Answer
13
CNMR chemical reference (ppm): 170 (carbonyl carbon).
Answer: b
What is compound Q?
Explanation:
We have –>C5H6O2
IR data: 3270 cm–1, 2180 cm–1 shows it can be an alkyne
a) NMR data: 1.3 (3H, t); 2.8 (1H, s); 4.3 (2H, q)
Now out of (a) & (b)

b)

c)
(a)

So, no such the electronegative difference between both

cases C-C Bond.
d)
View Answer
 1. What is the wavelength range for UV spectrum of light?
a) 400 nm – 700 nm
b) 700 nm to 1 mm
c) 0.01 nm to 10 nm
(b) d) 10 nm to 400 nm
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Ultraviolet (UV) is an electromagnetic
radiation with a wavelength from 10 nm to 400 nm,
shorter than that of visible light but longer than X-rays (the
visible region fall between 380-750 nm and X- rays region
fall between 0.01 to 10nm).

So, electronegative difference between both cases C-C 2. Which of the following comparison is correct for solvent
Bond is high. Hence 2H peak will at 4.3. shift on the n –>π* transition of acetone?
a) H20 = CH30H = C2H50H = CHC13 = C6H14
11. Separation of ions in mass spectrometer take place on b) H20 > CH30H > C2H50H > CHC13 > C6H14
the basis of which of the following? c) H20 < CH30H < C2H50H < CHC13 < C6H14
a) Mass d) H20 > CH30H < C2H50H < CHC13 < C6H14
b) Charge View Answer
c) Molecular weight
d) Mass to charge ratio Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: H-bonding with ground state in n–> π* results
in increase in energy gap & decrease in wavelength.
Answer: d And as polar solvents show strong H-bonding. So, the
Explanation: Mass spectrometer separates ions on the correct option is H20 < CH30H < C2H50H < CHC13 < C6H14.
basis of mass to charge ratio i.e. m/z. In the spectrum of a
pure compound, the molecular ion, if present, appears at
the highest value of m/z (followed by ions containing
heavier isotopes) and gives the molecular mass of the
compound. Most of the ions are singly charged. Hence, the
mass to charge ratio is equal to the mass.

12. Which type of ionic species are allowed to pass

through the slit and reach the collecting plate?
a) Negative ions of all masses
b) positive ions of the specific mass
c) Negative ions of the specific mass
3. What is the correct order of λmax for n –> ς* transition?
d) Positive ions of all masses
a) R-OH > R-NH2 > R-SH
View Answer
b) R-OH < R-NH2 < R-SH
Answer: b c) R-OH > R-SH > R-NH2
Explanation: Positive ions of specific mass pass through d) R-OH < R-SH < R-NH2
the slit and reach the collecting plate. The ion currents are View Answer
measured using sensitive electrometer tube. The ions
Answer: b
reaching the collecting plate are measured.
Explanation: According to molecular orbital energy
UV – VISIBLE SPECTROSCOPY diagram for R-OH, R-NH2, R-SH (shown below), energy
level will decrease respectively so λmax will increase. d) RCOOH = RCOOR’ > RCONH2
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation:

As we can see from above diagram: +m1 > +m2; +m3

Here since mesomeric effect shows Bathochromic shift:
4. What is the correct order of λmax for n –> π* transition i.e. a change of spectral band position in the absorption,
for the R-CN, R-NO2, and R-N=N-R? reflectance, transmittance, or emission spectrum of a
a) R-CN < R-NO2 < R-N=N-R molecule to a longer wavelength (lower frequency)
b) R-CN = R-NO2 = R-N=N-R Here, λmax –> 3 ≈ 2 < 1.
c) R-CN > R-NO2 > R-N=N-R
7. Which of the following is the correct order of λmax for n–
d) R-CN > R-NO2 < R-N=N-R
> π* transition for the given compounds?
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: λmax for n –> π* a) 1>2>3>4>5
b) 1<2<3<4<5
c) 1>2<3>4<5
d) 1>2>3<4>5
View Answer
Electronegative difference order: 3 < 2 < 1
If different is less than energy gap between n –> π* is also Answer: a
less hence more wavelength. Explanation: λmax depends upon +m & I effect, which will
So, energy gap between n –> π* 3 < 2 < 1 lead to a shift to longer wavelength accompanied by
λmax–> 3 > 2 > 1 increased intensity of absorption represents an electronic
level (considering inductive and mesomeric effect) of the
5. What is the correct order of λmax for π –> π* transition ground and excited states and thus a decrease in transition
for the following three compounds? energy.
a) R-C=C-R > R2C = CR2 > R-CHO The correct order of λmax is 1 > 2 > 3 > 4 > 5.
b) R-C=C-R < R2C = CR2 < R-CHO
c) R-C=C-R = R2C = CR2 = R-CHO 8. The ultraviolet spectrum of benzonitrile shows a
d) R-C=C-R < R2C = CR2 >R-CHO primary absorption band at 224 nm. If a solution of
View Answer benzonitrile in water, with a concentration of 1x 10-4molar,
is examined at a wavelength of 224 nm, the absorbance is
Answer: b determined to be 1.30. The cell length is 1 cm.
Explanation: MO diagram (C = C), (C = C) & (C = O) and What is the molar absorptivity of this absorption band?
shows the energy gap between π – π*, increases among a) 2.3 x 104
these three molecules. So λmax will give the reverse trend. b) 3.3 x 104
R-C=C-R < R2C = CR2 < R-CHO c) 1.3 x 104
d) 4.3 x 104
6. What is the correct order of λmax for n–> π* transition
View Answer
for the following three compounds?
a) RCOOH > RCOOR’ > RCONH2 Answer: c
b) RCOOH = RCOOR’ = RCONH2 Explanation:
c) RCOOH = RCOOR’ < RCONH2 Benzonitrile in water with:
C = 1 x 10-4 M OH at ortho position show +m effect & hence
A = 1.30 λmaxincreases to 242 nm.
l = 1 cm
We know, A = ℇCl
ℇ = A/C I = 1.30/ 1X 10-4 X 1 = 1.34 X 104.
INFRARED SPECTROSCOPY – 1
9. The ultraviolet spectrum of benzonitrile shows a 1. What is the relation between restoring force, f to the
secondary absorption band at 271 nm. If a solution of
displacement q in Hooke’s law?
benzonitrile in water, with a concentration of 1×10-4 molar a) f = -kq
solution is examined at 271 nm, what will be the
b) f = kq
absorbance reading (ℇ = 1000) and what will be the c) f = kq2
intensity ratio, IO/I, respectively? d) f = -kq2
a) 0.1, 1.26 View Answer
b) 0.2, 2.26
c) 0.3, 3.26 Answer: a
d) 0.4, 4.26 Explanation: Restoring force f needed to extend or
View Answer compress a spring by some distance is proportional to that
distance.
Answer: a needed to extend or compress a spring by some distance is
Explanation: A = ℇCl and ℇ = 1000 (Given) proportional to that distance.
A = 1000 x 1 x10-4 x 1
A = 0.1 2. The intensity of an absorption band is always
Also, A = log (IO/l) proportional to which of the following factor?
0.1 = log (IO/I) a) Atomic population
=> IO/I = 1.26. b) Molecular population of the initial state
c) Molecular population of the final state
10. Which of the following structural formula that is d) Temperature
consistent with the following observations: An acid,
View Answer
C7H4O2Cl2 shows a UV maximum of 242 nm?
Answer: b
Explanation: The probability of a transition taking place in
initial state is the most important factor influencing the
a) intensity of an observed l line. This probability is
proportional to the population of the initial state involved
in the transition.

3. On which factors the vibrational stretching frequency of

b)
diatomic molecule depend?
a) Force constant
b) Atomic population
c) Temperature
c) d) Magnetic field
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The value of vibrating stretching frequency is
d)
shifted if the force constant of a bond changes with its
View Answer
electronic structure. Frequency shifts also take place on
Answer: c working with the same substance in different states
Explanation: λx at 242 nm represents it is acid chloride. - (solids, liquids and gas). A substance usually absorbs at
higher frequency in a gaseous state as compared to liquid
and solid states.

4. In which unit Force constant is not expressed?

a) Dynes cm-1
b) dyne Å-1
c) Nm-1
d) kp
View Answer Since, H–Cl has single bond so having least force constant
and respective q is longest among above three. q is larger
Answer: d
when the force constant is smaller.
Explanation: All of the above units are correct for force
constant except kp, i.e. kilogram force or kilopond, which 7. The vibrations, without a center of symmetry are active
is the unit of force. in which of the following region?
a) Infrared but inactive in Raman
5. For HCI, = 1.63 x 10-27 kg, the observed frequency =
b) Raman but inactive in IR
2890 or v = 8.67 x 1013 Hz. What is the force constant K?
c) Raman and IR
a) 4.83 m dyn Å-1
d) Inactive in both Raman and IR
b) 8.43 dynes cm-1
View Answer
c) 483 μm-1
d) 4.83 dyn Å-1 Answer: c
Explanation: If a molecule has COS, then its vibrational
Answer: a
mode will either IR active or Raman Active.
Explanation:
8. The frequency of vibration of a bond is a function of
which factor?
a) Force constant of the bond
b) Masses of the atoms involved in bonding
c) Force constant of the bond and Masses of the atoms
d) Bond order
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation:

6. Since the nuclei in a polyatomic molecule do not always

vibrate in a simple harmonic manner, there arises which of
the following situation?
a) Harmonicity
b) Anharmonicity in molecular vibrations
c) Fundamental frequencies 9. What is the order of decreasing vibrational frequency
d) Infrared for C — Cl, C — Br, C — C, C — O and C — H?
View Answer a) C-H, C-C, C-O, C- Cl, C-Br
b) C- Cl, C-Br, C-C, C -H, C-O
Answer: a c) C-O, C-H, C-Br, C- Cl, C-C
Explanation: q → displacement and K →Force constant d) C-Br, C- Cl, C-C, C-O, C-H
View Answer

Answer: a

Explanation: Since, vibrational frequency

inversely proportional to masses of the atom involved in Answer: b
bonding the increasing mass trend for above element is H Explanation: C5H10→1380 cm-1. 1380 cm-1 represents a C–C
< C < O < Cl < Br. So, correct order of vibration frequency is bond band. All have C – C bond. Option Pentyne does not
C – H > C – C > C – O > C – Cl > C – Br. fulfill the H-atom requirement. So, correct option is
Cyclopentane.
10. What is the correct increasing order of stretching
frequencies for C ≡ C, C = C and C — C? 3. Why ketenes absorb in IR at a very high frequency (2150
a) C — C > C = C > C ≡ C cm-1)?
b) C ≡ C > C = C > C — C a) The inner C is sp hybridized
c) C — C > C = C < C ≡ C b) The more s character in a bond, the stronger it is
d) C ≡ C < C — C > C = C c) Inner C is sp2 hybridized
View Answer d) Inner C is sp3 hybridized
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Since, v ∝ √k , k→ Force constant. Force Answer: c
constant trend is Explanation: Ketenes absorb in IR at a very high frequency
Triple bond > Double bond > Single bond. (2150 cm-1) because inner C is sp2hybridized. Bonds with
C≡ C > C = C > C — C. more s character absorb at a higher frequency.

4. What is the effect of ring strain in lactone (cyclic ester)

or a lactam (cyclic amide)?
INFRARED SPECTROSCOPY – 2 a) Increases carbonyl stretching frequency
1. Why in the IR spectrum of Benzoyl chloride, a weak b) Decreases carbonyl stretching frequency
band near 1750 cm-1 is formed? c) Increases C = C frequency
a) Inductive effect d) Decreases C = C frequency
View Answer
b) Fermi resonance between C = O band and first overtone
c) Conjugation effect Answer: a
d) Hyperconjugation effect Explanation: Carbonyl stretching order in both the
View Answer compounds is 6 > 5 > 4 > 3. Ring strain increases, carbonyl
Answer: b frequency increases.
Explanation: Benzoyl chloride 5. A compound C8 H6 decolorizes Br2 in CCl4 and gives a
white precipitate with Tollen’s reagent. It has sharp band
at 3300 cm-l and weak bands at 3085, 2110 cm-l. What is
this compound?
a) Phenyl acetylene
A weak band near 1750 cm-1. Since, band is of weak b) Phenyl propylene
intensity, it must be due to fermi Resonance. So correct c) Phenyl ethylene
option is Fermi resonance between C = O band and first d) Octene
overtone. View Answer

2. Which compound having molecular formula C5H10shows Answer: a

absorption at 1380 cm-1? Explanation: C8 H6 → Sharp band at 3300 cm-l
a) 2-Methyl-1-butene Weak band at 3085, 2110 cm-l
b) Cyclopentane Double bond equivalent = C + 1 – H⁄2 – X⁄2 + N⁄2,
c) Pentyne (where C→ Carbon, H→ Hydrogen, X→ Halogen, N→
d) Methylcyclobutane Nitrogen)
View Answer = 8 + 1 – 6⁄2 = 6.
One double bond equivalent represents either one bond
or one ring. No. of vibration degree of freedom = 3N – 6
Now, band at 3300 shows C–H bond, 2110 may be because = 3(15) – 6 = 39.
of C≡C triple bond
Now, we check each option one by one 8. Which of the following molecules will not show infrared
Option Octene → octene → does not match m.f. C8 H6. spectrum?
a) H2
b) HCI
c) CH4
d) H20
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Correct option is H2 as HH2 do not have
dynamic dipole moment, so no spectrum will be observed.

9. The phosphorescence spectrum of the excited species is

due to which transition?
a) Singlet to triplet transitions
b) Triplet to singlet transitions
c) Vibration modes
d) Electron spin transitions
C ≡ C → 2110
View Answer
D.B.E. → 5πbond
M.f. → C8 H6. Hence, the correct option is Phenyl Answer: b
acetylene. Explanation: The phosphorescence spectrum of the
excited species is due to triplet to singlet transitions. In an
6. What is the relation between wave number of IR
excited singlet state, the electron is promoted in the same
absorption and the reduced mass?
spin orientation as it was in the ground state (paired). In a
a) Wave number is directly proportional to reduced mass
triplet excited stated, the electron that is promoted has
b) Wave number is inversely proportional to reduced mass
the same spin orientation (parallel) to the other unpaired
c) Wave number is independent of the reduced mass
electron.
d) Wave number is directly proportional to square of
reduced mass 10. Why Monomeric saturated aliphatic carboxylic acids
View Answer show carbonyl stretching frequency near 1760 cm-1, while
saturated aliphatic ketones near 1720 cm-1?
Answer: b
a) Mesomeric (M) effect is dominant in acids over the
Explanation: v ∝ 1⁄√μ, frequency is directly proportional to
inductive (I) effect
wave number. So, wave number is inversely proportional
b) I effect is dominant in carboxylic acids over the
to reduced mass as shown in the above relation.
mesomeric effect
7. What is the number of vibrational degrees of freedom in c) I effect on ketones is dominant over the M effect
C6H5CH3? d) M effect in ketones is dominant
a) 39 View Answer
b) 15
Answer: b
c) 18
Explanation: Monomeric saturated aliphatic carboxylic
d) 40
acids show carbonyl stretching frequency near 1760 cm-1,
View Answer
while saturated aliphatic ketones near 1720 cm-1because I
Answer: a effect is dominant in carboxylic acids over the mesomeric
Explanation: C6H5CH3 is nonlinear. effect.
REDOX REACTIONS n × 5 = w⁄M × 2
n = 180⁄90 × 2⁄5 = 4⁄5.
1. KMnO4 reacts with oxalic acid according to the equation
given below. Here 20 mL of 0.1 M KMnO4 is equivalent to 4. What is the mass of K2Cr2O7 required to produce 254 gm
how many mL and molarity of H2C2O4? I2 from KI solution? Given: K2Cr2O7 + 2KI → 2Cr3+ + I2
2MnO4– + 5C2O4– + 16H+ → 2Mn+1 + 10CO2 + 8H2O a) 49 g
a) 20 mL of 0.5 M H2C2O4 b) 98 g
b) 50 mL of 0.5 M H2C2O4 c) 9.8 g
c) 50 mL of 0.1 M H2C2O4 d) 4.9 g
d) 20 mL of 0.1 M H2C2O4
View Answer Answer: b

Answer: c
Explanation: In any reaction number of equivalent reacted
are equal
∴ neq (KMnO4) = neq (C2 O42-) Explanation:
Also, neq = n × nf neqK2Cr2O7 = neqI2
In given problem: n × nf = n × nf
w
∴ neq(KMnO4) = neq (C2 O42-) ⁄M × 6 = w⁄M × 2
n × nf = (n × nf) C2 O4– w/294 × 6= 254/254 × 2
Also, (M × V × nf ) KMnO4 = 0.1 × 20 × 5 = 10 w = 98g.
And, (n × nf) C2 O4– = 50 × 0.1 × 2 = 10
5. What is the volume of 0.05 M KMnO4 which will react
2. Excess of KI reacts with CuSO4 solution and then with 50 ml of 0.1 M H2S in acidic medium (H2S → S02)?
Na2S2O3 solution is added to it. Which of the statement is a) 60 ml
incorrect for this reaction? b) 6 ml
a) Na2S2O3 is oxidized c) 12 ml
b) CuI2 is formed d) 120 ml
c) Cu2I2 is formed View Answer
d) Evolved I2 is reduced
Answer: d
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: (1) KI + CuSO4 → I2
(2) I2 + Na2S2O3 → NaI + Na2S2O6 Explanation:
(a) Na2S2O3 is oxidized to Na2S2O6 neqKMnO4 = neq H2S
(b) Cu2I2 is formed as CuI2 disproportionate. M × V × nf = M × V × n f
0.05 × V × 5 = 0.1 × 50 × 6
3. How many number of moles of KMnO4 will react with V = 120 mL.
180 gm H2C2O4 according to given reaction?
KMnO4 + H2C2O4 → 2C02 + Mn2+ 6. What is the mass of Fe304 if it reacts completely with 25
a) 4/5 ml of 0.3m K2Cr2O7?
b) 2/5 a) 1 .44 g
c) 1/5 b) 10.44 g
d) 4/3 c) 104.4 g
View Answer d) 14.4 g
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: neqKMnO4 = neqH2C2O4
n × nf = n × nf
Answer: b Answer: d

Explanation:
neqFe3O4 = neq K2Cr2O7
w
⁄M × nf = 0.3 * 25 * 6
w = (0.3×25×6×232)/1
w = 10.44 g.

7. What is the concentration of H2O2 solution of 20 ml of

H2O2 solution which will react completely with 10 ml of 2
M KMnO4 in acidic medium?
a) 1.25 M Explanation:
b) 5 M
9. How many moles of KMnO4 are required for complete
c) 2.5 M
oxidation of 1.25 mol Cu2S?
d) 25 M
Cu2S → Cu+2 + SO2
View Answer
a) 1 mole
Answer: c b) 3 moles
c) 2 moles
d) 5 moles
View Answer

Explanation: Answer: c

neq (H2O2) = neq (KMnO4)

M × 20 × 2 = 2 × 10 × 5
Ans = 2.5 M.
Explanation:
8. How many moles of KCI are required to produce 10 mol
neq (KMnO4) = neq (Cu2S)
Cl2 by the reaction with KCIO3?
n × 5 = 1.25 × 8
a) 1.66 mole
n = 2.
b) 13.33 mole
c) 0.66 mole 10. What is the volume strength of H2O2 of its 11.2 ml
d) 16.66 mole requires 30 ml of 0.5 M K2Cr2O7?
View Answer a) 35
b) 55
c) 25
d) 45
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Volume strength of H2O2 = 11.2 × M H2O2=
5.6 × N H2O2

neq (H2O2) = neq (KMnO4)

M × 11.2 × 2 = 0.5 × 30 × 6 4. What is the oxidation state of molybdenum in *η7-
M = 4.017. Therfore, Volume strength = 11.2 × 4 = 45. tropylium) Mo(CO)3]+?
a) +2
b) +1
c) 0
ORGANOMETALLIC COMPOUNDS – 1
d) -1
1. What are oxidation states of metal ion in following View Answer
complexes?
I. PdCl2 Answer: c
Explanation: Let O.S. of Mo is η.
II. Pd(PPh3)4
III. Pd(OAc)2 η + (0) + 1 = +1
IV. ArPdBr where Ar is aryl η = 0.
a) 2, 4, 2, 2 5. Which of the following is the neutral complex which
b) 2, 0, 2, 1 follows the 18- electron rule?
c) 2, 0, 2, 2 a) (η5-C5H5)Fe(CO)2
d) 0, 0, 0, 2 b) (η5-C5H5)2Mo(CO)3
View Answer c) (η5-C5H5)2Co
Answer: c d) (η5-C5H5)2Re(η6-C6H6)
Explanation: n → oxidation states of metal ion View Answer
PdCl2: n – 2 = 0 ⇒ n = 2 Answer: d
Pd(PPh3)4 : Since PPh3 is neutral, Pd is in 0 Oxidation state. Explanation:
Pd(OAc)2: n – 2 = 0 ⇒ n = 2 (a) (η5-C5H5)Fe(CO)2
ArPdBr: n + [(–1) (–1)] ⇒ n = 2. V.E.C. = 8 + 2(2) + 5 = 17
((b) η5-C5H5)2Mo(CO)3
2. Which of the following complex has a highest oxidation
state of metal? V.E.C. = 8 + 2 + 2 + 5 = 17
(c) (η5-C5H5)2Co
a) (η6-C6H6)2Cr
b) Mn(CO)5Cl V.E.C. = 9 + 5 + 5 = 19
(d) (η5-C5H5)2Re(η6-C6H6)
c) Na2[Fe(CO)4]
V.E.C. = 7 + 5 + 6 = 18
d) K[Mn(CO)5]
View Answer The correct answer is (η5-C5H5)2Re(η6-C6H6), obeys 18 e–
rule.
Answer: c
Explanation: Oxidation State of metal: 6. If complex [W(Cp)2(CO)2] follows 18e- rule. What is
(a) (η6-C6H6)2Cr ⇒ 0, (b) Mn(CO)5Cl ⇒ +1 Hapticity of Cp?
(c) Na2[Fe(CO)4] ⇒ +2 and (d) K[Mn(CO)5] ⇒ +1 a) 5 and 5
b) 3 and 5
3. Which of the following complex is in which organic c) 3 and 3
ligand is having only bond with metal? d) 1 and 5
a) W(CH3)6 View Answer
b) K[PtCl3(C2H4)]
c) (η5-C5H5)2Fe Answer: b
d) (η5-C6H6)2Ru Explanation: [W(Cp)2(Co)2].
View Answer Let hapticity of one Cp ligand = x and another y
VEC = 6 + 2(2) + x + y = 18
Answer: a x + y = 18 – 10 = 8
Explanation: CH3 is the only ς-donor ligand while C2H4, Out of (1,3,5) the combination that is valid is (3 + 5).
C5H5, C6H6 are π-acceptor ligands.
7. Which of the following complexes show easy oxidation? (ii) C–C bond order in (i) is larger than in (ii) & carbon-
a) (η5-C5H5)2Fe carbon bond length in (i) is smaller.
b) (η5-C5H5)2Ru
c) (η5-C5H5)2Co
d) (η5-C5H5)2Co+
ORGANOMETALLIC COMPOUNDS – 2
View Answer
1. Which of the following statement is not true about
Answer: c
ferrocene?
Explanation: (a) (η5-C5H5)2Fe: VEC = 8 + 5 + 5 = 18 a) decamethyl ferrocene is staggered in solid state
(b) (η5-C5H5)2Ru: VEC = 8 + 5 + 5 = 18
b) cyclopentadienyl rings in ferrocene are almost eclipsed
(c) (η5-C5H5)2Co: Since it is one e– extra of stable no., c) cyclopentadienyl ring in ferrocene are staggered
oxidation i.e. loss of e– can take place easily, VEC = 9 + 5 + d) ferrocene can be nitrated by reaction with dil. HNO3
5 = 19 View Answer
(d) (η5-C5H5)2Co+: VEC = 9 + 5 + 5 – 1 = 18.
Answer: c
8. How many M — M bonds are present in [Cp Mo(CO3)]2? Explanation: Cyclopentadienyl ring in ferrocene are
a) 1
staggered is a wrong statement. Cyclopentadienyl rings in
b) 2 ferrocene are eclipsed.
c) 0
d) 4 2. Ferrocene cannot undergo which of the following
View Answer reaction?
a) Friedal craft acylation
Answer: c b) Diels-Alder reaction
Explanation: No. of M-M bonds = (18×2- c) Oxidation by Ag + ions
[(6+5+2×3)×2])/2=0. d) Electrophilic substitution
9. Which of the following is the incorrect statement about View Answer
Zeise’s salt? Answer: b
a) Zeise’s salt is diamagnetic
Explanation: Ferrocene cannot undergo Diels-Alder
b) Oxidation state of Pt in Zeis’s salt is +2
reaction because it does not satisfy requirements of Diels-
c) All the Pt-Cl bond length in Zeise’s salt are equal Alder reaction (dienophile).
d) C-C bond length of ethylene moiety in Zeise’s salt longer
than that of free ethylene molecule 3. Structurally nickelocene is similar to ferrocene but how
View Answer Nickelocene attains stability?
a) due to formation of a monocation
Answer: c b) due to formation of a dication
Explanation: C2F4 is a better π acceptor than C2H4. So, c) due to formation of a monoanion
metal-carbon bond order is more → Bond length is less in d) due to formation of a dianion
[PtCl3(C2F4)]– than in [PtCl3(C2H4)]–.
View Answer
10. For metal olefin complexes (i) [PtCl3(C2F4)]– and (ii)
Answer: b
[PtCl3(C2H4)]–, which of the following is the correct Explanation: Nickelocene follows 20 e– rule. S, it attains
statement?
stability by formation of dication.
a) carbon-carbon bond length is same both in (i) and (ii)
b) carbon-carbon bond length in (i) is smaller 4. Which of the following is/are true about ferrocene?
c) carbon-carbon bond length in (ii) is smaller I. Ferrocene is diamagnetic
d) a metallacycle is formed in each complex II. Dipole moment is zero
View Answer III. Kealy and Pauson synthesizes ferrocene from C5H5and
freshly reduced Fe
Answer: b at 300℃
Explanation: Since Metal-C bond order in (i) is smaller than
IV. Kealy and Pauson synthesises ferrocene from C5H5MgBr Both have deficiency of 1 e– from their stable no. Thus,
and FeCl3. [Mn(CO)5] & CH3 are isolobal.
The correct answer is:
a) III and IV 7. Which of following pair is not isolobal?
b) I, II and III only a) Mn(CO)5, CH3
c) I, II and IV only b) [Fe(CO)4], O
d) II, III and IV only c) Mn(CO)5, Cl
View Answer d) Mn(CO)5, O
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Ferrocene is diamagnetic, Dipole moment is Answer: d
zero and Kealy and Pauson synthesizes ferrocene from Explanation: [Mn(CO)5], CH3 are isolobal (Deficiency of 1 e–
C5H5 and freshly reduced at 300℃. But Kealy and Pauson )
does not synthesise ferrocene from C5H5MgBr and FeCl3. [Fe(CO)4]: VEC = 8 + 4 × 2 = 16 O → 6
Deficiency of 2e– from stable no., thus they are isolobal.
5. Which type of boranes are B5H9 and B4H10respectively? [Mn(CO)5, Cl] are isolobal (Deficiency of 1 e–).
a) Nido and Arachano boranes [Mn(CO)5]: VEC = 17 (Deficiency of 1)
b) Nido and closo boranes O: VEC = 6 (Deficiency of 2)
c) Closo and Arachano boranes Thus, [Mn(CO)5], O are not isolobal.
d) Both are Nido
View Answer 8. According to wade’s Rule, *C2B10H12] adopts which type
of structure?
Answer: a a) closo structure
Explanation: As shown below B5H9 is Nido and B4H10is b) nido structure
Archano. SIngle-cluster boranes have the following general c) archano structure
formulae, where “n” is the number of boron atoms: Nindo- d) hypo structure
BnHn+4 and Archano- BnHn+6. View Answer
B5H9 → (BH)5H4
(2(5)+4)/2=5+x Answer: a
x = 2, Nido Explanation: C2B10H12 → (BH)10H2
And, B4H10 → (BH)4H6 (2(10)+2)/2 = 10+x
(2(4)+6)/2=6+x x = 1, Closo structure.
x = 3, Archano. 9. Which property is the same for isolobal molecules?
6. Mn(CO)5 is isolobal with which of the following a) e– capture
compound? b) Boiling point
a) CH4 c) Melting point
b) CH3 d) Solubility
c) CH2 View Answer
d) CH Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: Isolobal molecules have same deficiency of e–
Answer: d from their stable no. Thus, they have same e–.
Explanation: Two fragments are isolobal if the number, 10. Which of the following is not considered as an
symmetry properties, approximate energy, and shape of organometallic compound?
the frontier orbitals and the number of electrons in them
a) Ferrocene
are similar. b) Cis-platin
[Mn(CO)5+: VEC = 7 + 5 × 2 = 17 → Stable No. 18 c) Ziese’s salt
CH3: VEC = 4 + 3 = 7 → Stable No. 8 d) Grignard reagent
View Answer
Answer: b b) 1500 Å and 1000 Å
Explanation: Cis-platin does not have metal-carbon bond. c) 8000 Å and 2000 Å
Therefore, cis platin not considered as organometallic d) 19000 Å and 12,000 Å
chemistry. View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The region of interest for photochemistry is
PHOTOCHEMISTRY between 8000 Å and 2000 Å of visible and ultraviolet (UV),
1. The fact that the fluorescence wavelength is often much are only a small part of the full electromagnetic spectrum.
Longer wavelengths, e.g., far infrared, tend to cause the
longer than the irradiation wavelength (Stokes shift) is a
consequence of which phenomenon? vibrational excitation of molecules, which results in
a) low extinction coefficients (Lambert-Beer law) heating. Shorter wavelength X-rays cause ionization.
b) vertical transitions (Kasha’s rule) 4. Which of the following instruments is used to measure
c) high ISC rates (El Sayed rule) the energy of the monochromatic radiation most
d) the Franck–Condon principle accurately?
View Answer a) Photoelectric cell
Answer: d b) Thermopile
Explanation: The reason why Stokes shifts occur is the c) The potential detector
Franck–Condon principle, which states that a change in the d) The chemical actinometer
View Answer
electronic state of some molecule caused by the
absorption of a photon occurs so rapidly that the motion Answer: b
of the nuclear coordinates during the transition can be Explanation: A thermopile is an electronic device that
neglected. After the electronic transition is complete, the converts thermal energy into electrical energy. It is
molecule’s nuclear coordinates then relax into a lower- composed of several thermocouples connected usually in
energy configuration in response to the change in the series or, less commonly, in parallel.
electronic wave function.
5. The molar extinction coefficient of B (MW = 180) is 4 x
2. Which of the following is an incorrect statement? 103 L mol-1 cm-1. One-liter solution of C which contains
a) First step in photochemistry is excited state 0.1358 g pharmaceutical preparation of B, shows an
(photoexcitation) absorbance of 0.411 in a 1 cm quartz cell. What is the
b) Photochemical reactions are caused by absorption of percentage (w/w) of B in the pharmaceutical preparation?
ultraviolet only a) 10.20
c) When a molecule or atom in the ground state (S0) b) 13.60
absorbs light, one electron is excited to a higher orbital c) 20.40
level d) 29.12
d) it is possible for the excited state S1 to undergo spin
inversion Answer: b:
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Photochemical reactions are caused by
absorption of ultraviolet, (wavelength from 100 to 400
nm), visible light (400 – 750 nm) or infrared radiation (750
– 2500 nm).

3. Which regions of the light radiations of the visible 6. What are the appropriate reasons for the deviation
ultraviolet lying between – wavelength are chiefly from the Beer’s law among the following?
concerned in bringing about photochemical reactions? (A) Monochromaticity of light
a) 1000 Å and 2000 Å (B) Very high concentration of analyte
(C) Association of analyte Dissociation of analyte on dilution and Polychromatic light
(D) Dissociation of analyte (reflective index) will result in deviation from Beer’s law.
a) A, B and D
b) B, C and D 9. The quantum efficiency of a photochemical reaction is
c) A, C and D defined as _______
d) A, B and C a) ratio of molecules decomposed in a given time to the
View Answer number of quanta absorbed in the same time
b) number of 11101ecules decomposed in a given time
Answer: b c) number or quanta absorbed percent time
Explanation: Reasons for derivation from Beer’s law are d) ratio of’ molecules decomposed in a given time to the
very high concentration of analyte, Association or number of quanta emitted in the same time
Dissociation of analyte and Refractive index → View Answer
Polychromatic light. Monochromaticity of light don’t have
any effect on Beer’s law. Answer: a
Explanation: According to the definition ratio of molecules
7. A 0.1 M solution of compound A shows 50% decomposed in a given time to the number of quanta
transmittance when a cell of 1 cm width is used at λ1 nm. absorbed at the same time is the correct option.
Another 0.1 M solution of compound B gives the optical
density value of 0.1761 using 1cm cell at λ1 nm. What will 10. Which of the following are the reactions in which
be the transmittance of a solution that is simultaneously molecules absorbing light do not themselves react but
0.1 M in A and 0.1 M in B using the same cell and at the induce other molecules to react?
same wave length? [log 1.301; log 1.4771; log 50 = 1.699]. a) Free radical reactions
a) 33.3% b) Chain reactions
b) 50% c) Reversible reactions
c) 66.7% d) Photosensitized reactions
d) 70% View Answer
View Answer
Answer: d
Answer: a Explanation: Photosensitized reactions is the reactions in
Explanation: Case I: Transmittance (T1) = 50% = 50⁄100= 1⁄2 which molecules absorbing light do not themselves react
Case II: Optical density or Absorbance = 0.17610 but induce other molecules to react.
A2 = 0.1761 11. A substance absorbs 2.0 x 1016 quanta or radiations per
T2 = 10-A2 = 10-0.1761 = 0.67. second and 0.002 mole of it reacts in 1200 seconds. What
∴ Net Transmittance ‘T’ = T1 × T2 = 1⁄2 × 0.67 = 0.33 = 33%. is the quantum yield or the reaction (N = 6.02 x 1023)?
8. Which of the following will result in deviation from a) 50
Beer’s law? b) 40
(A) Change in a refractive index of medium c) 80
(B) Dissociation of analyte on dilution d) 100
(C) Polychromatic light View Answer
(D) Path length of cuvette Answer: a
a) A, B and C Explanation:
b) B, C and D No. of quanta of radiations absorbed in 1200 seconds = 2 ×
c) A, C and D
1016 × 1200
d) A, B and D
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Change in a refractive index of medium,
COMBUSTION OF ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
1. What is the concentration of carbon dioxide in the 4. What is the type of reaction between alkanes and
atmosphere? hydroxyl radical?
a) 3.5 x 106 ppm a) endothermic
b) 1.0 x 102 ppm b) exothermic
c) 1.6 x 105 ppm c) isothermal
d) 1.0 x 103 ppm d) isochoric
View Answer View Answer

Answer: a Answer: b
Explanation: The concentration of carbon dioxide is 3.5 x Explanation: Because an O-H bond is stronger than a C-H,
106 ppm, that makes it sixth abundant molecule in this step is exothermic.
atmosphere. CH3 CH3 + OH → CH3 CH2 + H.

2. Which of the following reaction has a faster rate of 5. Which of the following statement is incorrect about
reaction for nascent oxygen atom? oxidation number?
a) Show electron density and about the tendency of an
atom or molecule to engage oxidation-reduction reactions
b) The oxidation number is always given in Roman
numerals while the formal charge is always given in
numbers
a) R1 >> R2 c) To calculate an oxidation number, it is essential to know
b) R1 > R2 which element in a chemical bond is the most
c) R1 << R2 electronegative
d) R1 < R2 d) It cannot be a negative number
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: d
Explanation: R1 = k1[O2] [O] and R2 = k2[H2O] [O] In the Explanation: Oxidation numbers are positive or negative
stratosphere, oxygen atom most often reacts with numbers, but don’t confuse them with positive or negative
molecular oxygen to regenerate ozone. The troposphere, charges on ions or valences.
unlike the stratosphere, contains considerable
concentrations of water vapor and water reacts faster with 6. With respect to enthalpy of combustion which of the
O than does O2. following is correct?
a) ∆Hrxn = Σ∆Hf (product) – Σ∆Hf (reactant)
3. Which of the following is not true about combustion of b) ∆Hrxn = Σ∆Hf (reactant) – Σ∆Hf (product)
hydrocarbons? c) ∆Hrxn = Σ∆Hf (product) + Σ∆Hf (reactant)
a) All hydrocarbons react in air to form carbon monoxide d) ∆Hrxn = 2 Σ∆Hf (product) – Σ∆Hf (reactant)
and then carbon dioxide View Answer
b) First step is always the reaction between the
hydrocarbon and hydroxyl radical Answer: a
c) Alkanes, the hydroxyl radical abstracts a hydrogen atom Explanation: According to the definition of the enthalpy of
and forms a carbanion combustion we compute the enthalpy of the reaction.
d) With alkenes and alkynes, the electron-deficient Because the enthalpy is a thermodynamic state function, it
hydroxyl radical adds to the multiple bond doesn’t depend on the pathway.
View Answer So, ∆Hrxn = Σ∆Hf (product) – Σ∆Hf (reactant).

Answer: c 7. Equal volumes of C2H2 & H2 are combusted under

Explanation: With alkanes, the hydroxyl radical abstracts a identical condition. What will be the ratio of heat evolved
hydrogen atom and forms a carbon-centered radical. for C2H2 and H2?
H2 (g) + 1/2 O2(g) → H2O(g), ∆H=-241.8 KJ
C2H2 (g) + 5/2 O2(g) → CO2(g) + H2O(g), ∆H=-1300 KJ 10. Which of the following is the slow, low-temperature,
a) 5.37/1 flameless form of combustion, sustained by the heat
b) 1/5.37 evolved when oxygen directly attacks the surface of a
c) 1/1 condensed-phase fuel?
d) 2.8/6.1 a) Rapid combustion
View Answer b) Turbulent combustion
c) Spontaneous combustion
Answer: b d) Smouldering
Explanation: View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Smouldering occurs on the surface of the
solid rather than in the gas phase. Smouldering is a surface
8. The heat of combustion of carbon is 394 KJ/mol. What phenomenon but can propagate to the interior of a porous
will be the heat evolved in combustion of 6.023 x fuel if it is permeable to flow.
1022atoms of carbon? The characteristic temperature and heat released during
a) 64.7 KJ smouldering are low compared to those in the flaming
b) 39.4 KJ combustion.
c) 42.4 KJ
d) 91.6 KJ
View Answer
REAGENTS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Answer: b
1. Which is the suitable catalyst for bringing out the
Explanation:
transformation given below?

a) BF3. Et20
9. The value ∆H transition of C (graphite) → C (diamond) is b) NaOEt
1.9 kJ/mol at 25℃ entropy of graphite is higher than c) tungsten lamp
entropy of diamond. This implies that: d) dibenzoyl peroxide
a) C(diamond) is more thermodynamically stable then C View Answer
(graphite) at 25℃
b) C(graphite) is more thermodynamically stable than C Answer: a
(diamond) at 25℃ Explanation: BF3 increases the electrophilicity of carbonyl
c) diamond will provide more heat on complete carbon due to which sulphur attacks on carbonyl carbon.
combustion at 25℃
2. Which of the will give effective reduction of 3-hexyne to
d) ∆Gtransition of C (diamond) → C (graphite) is -ve
trans-3-hexene?
View Answer
a) H2/Lindlar’s catalyst
Answer: d b) Na/liq. NH3
Explanation: C(graphite) → C(diamond) trans ∆H = 1.9 kJ c) Fe/NaCl
/mole d) DIBAL
Sgraphite > Sdiamond View Answer
As, Sgraphite is higher so C (graphite) is more stable.
Answer: b
Diamond will provide more heat on complete combustion
Explanation: Na/liq. NH3 will give an effective reduction for
because it is more stable and have 3–D structure.
C diamond → Cgraphite
∆Gtransition = -ve then process is spontaneous.
the following case:

b)

3. Which of the reagent will give effective transformation c)

of given compounds?

d)
View Answer
a) CH2N2
Answer: c
b) CH3Li
Explanation: LiAlH4 will reduce double bond into single
c) (CH3)2CuLi
bond and aldehyde group into alcohol.
d) Ph3P = CH2
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Ph3P = CH2 will give the most effective
transformation of ketone into alkene (Wittig reaction). The 6. Which is the correct combination of reagent which can
Wittig reaction is a popular method for the synthesis of carry out following conversion?
alkene from ketones and aldehydes. The Wittig reagent
can generally tolerate carbonyl compounds containing
several kinds of functional groups such as OH, OR,
aromatic nitro and even ester groups.
a) (i) CH3 – MgBr then H+ (ii) H2S04 / ∆ (iii) NH2 – NH2 / KOH
4. Which is the mildest reducing agent which reduces only
b) (i) (CH3)2 CuLi then H+ (ii) NaBH4 EtOH (iii) H2S04 / ∆
carbonyl group in presence of nitro, carboxyl, double bond
c) (i) CH3 – Li, then H+ (ii) PCC / ∆
and ester groups?
d) (i) NaBH4 ∙ CeCl3 then H+ (ii) MnO2 (iii) CH3 – Li
a) LiAIH4
View Answer
b) Na-NH3
c) NaBH4 Answer: c
d) H2-Ni Explanation: Here CH3 will attack at C=O and dehydration
View Answer will take pass and again water will attack at meta position
as a nucleophile at the ring. PCC will covert -OH into =O.
Answer: c
Explanation: NaBH4 is mild reducing agent for this
conversion. It is very effective for the reduction of
aldehydes and ketones to alcohols. By itself, it will
generally not reduce esters, carboxylic acids, or amides
7. How acetophenone can be converted to phenol by
(although it will reduce acyl chlorides to alcohols).
reaction?
5. What will be the product for the given reactant and a) m-CPBA followed by base catalysed hydrolysis
reagents? b) conc. HN03
c) iodine and NaOH
d) Singlet oxygen followed by base catalysed hydrolysis
product
View Answer

Answer: a
a) Explanation:
 haloform reaction.

m-CPBA can convert ketone into amide and after ester

hydrolysis it is reduced into phenol.

8. How can we prepare RR’ R” OH by the action of excess

of a suitable Grignard reagent on which of the following 10. How many isomers of C4H8O when reacts with
reactants? CH3MgBr followed by acidification to alcohol (only
a) nitrile or an aldehyde consider carbonyl isomers and Including stereoisomers)?
b) ester or an alcohol a) 2
c) aldehyde or a ketone b) 3
d) ketone or an ester c) 4
View Answer d) 5
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Preparation of 3o alcohol from ketone and Answer: a
ester by the action of excess of a suitable Grignard reagent Explanation:
is carried out as shown below:

9. What is used to carry out the following conversion?

REACTION INTERMEDIATES

1. Which carbocation is the most stable?

a) hydroboration oxidation followed by Jones oxidation

b) Wacker oxidation followed by haloform reaction
a)
c) oxymercuration-determination followed by Jones
oxidation
d) ozonolysis followed by haloform reaction
b)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The transformation of a terminal or 1,2- c)
disubstituted alkene to a ketone through the action of
catalytic palladium(II), water, and a co-oxidant. Because of
the ease with which terminal alkenes may be prepared d)
and the versatility of the methyl ketone group installed by View Answer
the reaction, the Wacker oxidation has been employed
extensively in organic synthesis. This is followed by Answer: b
Explanation: This is stabilized by extended conjugation.
The more adjacent methyl groups there are, the larger electronegative Oxygen is present it will decrease electron
hyperconjugation stabilization is because of the increased
number of adjacent C–H bonds.
density of C+.
2. Which one among the following carbocations has the
longest half-life? 4. Which of the following is most stable intermediate?

a)
a)

b)
b)

c)
c)

d)
View Answer
d)
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: Higher the stability of cation more will be its
Answer: c
half-life. As, in the carbocation, p orbital overlap with the
Explanation: Stabilized by +M effect of OH and
compound, will be more stabilizing factor than
hyperconjugation effect (5αH).
aromaticity.
5. Which intermediate is involved in the reaction given
3. The order of decreasing stability of the following cations
below?
is:
(I) CH3C+HCH3 (II) CH3C+HOCH3 (III) CH3C+HCOCH3
a) III > II > I
b) I > II > III
c) II > I > III
d) I > III > II
View Answer a) free radical
b) carbocation
Answer: a
c) carbanion
Explanation: (II) Here, Mesomeric effect stabilizes
d) carbene
carbocation. So, it is highly stabilized.
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: As we can see, in first step in presence to
light carbene is formed.
(I) It is stabilized by hyperconjugation.

(III) It is destabilized as because of carbonyl group; more

6. Among the following which is most stabilized cation?

a)

b) a) I > III > II > IV

b) II > III > IV > I
c) III > IV > II > I
d) I > III > IV > II
c) View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Mesomeric effect will stabilize carbocation is
d)
highly stable.
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The positive charge of carbon will be
stabalised by mesomeric effect of -NH2 group.

7. Arrange the following intermediate into decreasing

order of stability.

9. What is the correct decreasing order of stability of

following cation?

a) I > II > III > IV

b) II > IV > III > I
c) II > I > IV > III
d) II > I > III > IV
a) II > III > I > IV
View Answer
b) IV > II > III > I
Answer: d c) IV > III > I > II
Explanation: Mesomeric effect will stabilize carbocation is d) III > I > II > IV
highly stable. View Answer
+M effect of –NH2 > –OH
Answer: b
Explanation:
(I) It is destabilized by –M and high –I effect.

8. Arrange the following intermediate into decreasing

order of stability. (II) It is destabilized by –I nature only at meta position –M
effect.
 d) a nucleophile becomes attracted to a full or partial
positive charge
View Answer

Answer: c
(III) It is destabilized by –M and less –I effect. Explanation: Because nucleophiles donate electrons, they
are by definition Lewis bases.

2. Which halogen nucleophile is weakest in polar, aprotic

solvents?
a) I–
b) F–
(IV) There is no destabilisation by group. c) Cl–
d) Br–
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: In polar, aprotic solvents, I– the weakest and
this is reversed in polar, protic solvents.
10. What is the correct decreasing order of stability of
following cation? 3. Which of the following nucleophile can be used for
partial enolization 1,3-Dicarbonyl compound?
a) Lithium di-isopropyl amide (LDA)
b) Et-O–
c) Weak base like NaOH
d) Sodium acetate
View Answer
a) I > II > III > IV
Answer: d
b) I > IV > II > III
Explanation: Sodium acetate will do partial enolization of
c) I > III > II > IV
1,3-Dicarbonyl compound. Weak base like NaOH and Et-O–
d) IV > III > II > I
will form an alcohol and LDA will do complete enolization.
View Answer

Answer: c
stability order IExplanation: High +I, > III > II > IV.

4. What will be the number of products (excluding

stereoisomers) in the given reaction?
C6H5CHO + CH3-CHO + NaOH → Product
a) One
b) Three
c) Two
d) Four
NUCLEOPHILES
View Answer
1. Which of the following is not true about nucleophile?
Answer: c
a) donates an electron pair to an electrophile to form a
Explanation: First product will be formed by cross aldol
chemical bond
where nucleophile (–OH) will attack at different type or
b) all molecules or ions with a free pair of electrons or at
reactant molecule.
least one pi bond can act as nucleophiles
c) nucleophile are Lewis acids by definition
 b) BH3
c) Br2
d) HBr
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Less electronegative atoms make better
Second type of product will be formed aldol condensation nucleophiles as they are more willing to share electrons.
where reaction will occur between same type of molecule.
7. Which of the following statements is true about
ammonia and water?
a) ammonia is more basic and more nucleophilic than
water
b) ammonia is less basic and less nucleophilic than water
c) ammonia is more basic but less nucleophilic than water
d) ammonia is less basic but more nucleophilic than water
View Answer
5. Where will nucleophile (-OH) will attack to form which
of the following the product X? Answer: a
Explanation: Because oxygen is more electronegative than
nitrogen, it holds onto its lone pairs more tightly than
nitrogen, and hence is less likely to donate its lone pairs to
form a covalent bond with a carbon atom during a
nucleophilic attack.
a)
8. Which of the following statements is true about the
following two anionic molecules?
b)

c)

a) I is more basic and more nucleophilic than II

b) I is less basic and less nucleophilic than II
d) c) I is more basic but less nucleophilic than II
View Answer d) I is less basic but more nucleophilic than II
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Nucleophile (-OH) will attack at carbon Answer: c
adjacent to carbonyl bond and form the below product. Explanation: Larger atoms make better nucleophiles due
to polarizability so II containing S will be more nucleophilic
than I but less basic.

9. Which halide ion is the best nucleophile in dimethyl

sulfoxide solution?
a) I–
b) F–
c) Cl–
6. Which reagent is a good nucleophile? d) Br–
a) NH3 View Answer
Answer: b 3. Which of the following is not an electrophile?
Explanation: In polar, aprotic solvents, F– strongest is the a) (CH3)4N+
nucleophile, and I– the weakest. b) Cl2
c) HBr
10. Which of the following cannot react as a nucleophile? d) Br2
a) CH3NH2 View Answer
b) (CH3)2NH
c) (CH3)3N Answer: a
d) (CH3)4N+ Explanation: The ammonium ion cannot react at the N
View Answer with a nucleophile because the N already has an octet of
electrons.
Answer: d
Explanation: Nucleophile donates electron to the 4. Which of the following is not an electrophile?
electrophiles and there is no lone pair present on nitrogen a) H2O
(CH3)4N+, so donation of electron is not possible. b) Cl2
c) HBr
d) Br2
ELECTROPHILES View Answer

Answer: c
1. Which of the following statement is incorrect about
Explanation: Hydrogen bromide is a strong acid, it is able
electrophiles?
to donate a proton to a molecule or anion with a
a) Electrophiles are positively charged or neutral species
having vacant orbitals nucleophilic site.
b) The electrophiles are attacked by the most electron- 5. In the given molecule where will electrophile will
populated part of one nucleophile attack?
c) Chemical species that do not satisfy the octet rule such
as carbenes and radicals are electrophiles
d) Electrophiles are Lewis base
View Answer

Answer: d a) I
Explanation: Because electrophiles accept electrons, they b) II
are Lewis acids not Lewis base, according to Acid-Base c) III
reaction theories. d) IV
View Answer
2. In addition of halogen (Bromine) to an alkene, how can
we isolate a bromonium in the reaction? Answer: a
a) increasing concentration of bromide ion Explanation: -CH3O is a +M group, so it has lone pair to
b) decreasing concentration of bromide ion donate to upcoming electrophile.
c) alkene with cation stabilising groups
6. In the given molecule where will electrophile will
d) alkene with less electrophilic centre
attack?
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: A bromo-carbenium ion intermediate may be
predominant instead of vicinyl dibromide if the alkene has
a cation-stabilizing substituent like phenyl group. There is a) I
an example of the isolation of the bromonium ion. b) II
c) III
d) IV
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: -OCOR is a +M group, it is more electron rich
than rest of the groups, so it has lone pair to donate to a) 3-Bromophenol
upcoming electrophile. b) 4- Bromophenol
c) 3,5-Dibromophenol
7. Which of the following is most readily undergo
d) 2,4,6-Tribromophenol
electrophilic attack?
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The polar solvent (i.e. water) induces a
stronger dipole in Br-Br. A stronger electrophile (Br+) is
produced that undergoes electrophilic aromatic
substitution with the benzene ring more readily.
Consequently, you get tri-bromination with Br(aq.).
a) I
b) II 10. Which ring will readily undergo electrophilic attack?
c) III
d) IV
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: I is most reactive towards electrophilic attack,
as -OH is +M group therefore, here benzene will have
more e- density than rest of the others. a) I
b) II
8. What is the correct order for the rate of reaction for the c) III
electrophilic attack of the given compounds? d) Both I and III
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Due to the presence of -NH2 group electron
will be transferred to the C of -CONH2 group and that’s
why it will not withdraw electron from benzene ring. So,
electron density of ring II is most in all three rings and that
a) I > II > III is why electrophile will attack at ring II.
b) II > I > III
c) I < II < III
d) III > I > II
ELECTROPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION
View Answer
1. What will be the product formed when phenol reacts
Answer: b
with Br2 in CCl4 medium?
Explanation: Electronegativity trend is N < O < F, so III is
a) 3-Bromophenol
the least electron rich ring therefore least favourable for
b) 4- Bromophenol
electrophilic attack. Similarly, II is the most electron rich
c) 3,5-Dibromophenol
ring therefore most favourable for electrophilic attack.
d) 2,4,6-Tribromophenol
9. Which of the following is the product for the given View Answer
reaction?
Answer: b make the ring less electron dense, hence more reactive in
Explanation: Because the non-polar solvent (i.e. CCl4) an aromatic electrophilic substitution as compared to
induces a weaker dipole in Br-Br as compared to the polar electron withdrawing group (benzoic acid, nitrobenzene,
solvent (i.e. water), a weaker electrophile (Br+) is aniline).
produced that undergoes electrophilic aromatic
substitution with the benzene ring. Consequently, we get 5. What will be the product in the given reaction?
mono-bromination with Br (in CCl4) with compared with
tri-bromination Br (in aq.).

2. What is the electrophile in the electrophilic substitution

reaction of benzene using oleum and conc. H2SO4?
a) m-chlorophenol
a) SO3
b) o-chlorophenol and p-chlorophenol
b) NO3
c) o-hydroxytoluene and p-hydroxytoluene
c) NO2+
d) m-hydroxytoluene
d) NO+
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Answer: a
Explanation: -OH is a ortho and para directing group so
Explanation: This reaction is sulphonation of benzene ring
attack of electrophile (carbocation- CH3) will attack there,
in which SO3 is the real attacking electrophile and oleum
as shown below:
will increase the concentration of SO3.

3. What will be the attacking electrophile in this reaction?

6. What is the electrophile in the acylation of benzene?

a) Carbanion a) AlCl3
b) Halonium b) CO+
c) Radical c) Cl+
d) Transition state d) R-CO+
View Answer View Answer
Answer: b Answer: d
Explanation: In halogenation of benzene ring halonium ion Explanation: The electrophile in the electrophilic
(Cl+) will attack at benzene ring. substitution reaction of acetyl chloride (CH3COCl) and
AlCl3 reacting with benzene is R-CO+.
4. Which of the following aromatic compounds undergo
Friedel–Crafts alkylation with methyl chloride and 7. How would you synthesis the following reaction?
aluminum chloride?
a) Benzoic acid
b) Nitrobenzene
c) Toluene
d) Aniline a) conc. HNO3 + conc. H2SO4
View Answer b) conc. HNO3
c) anhydrous AlCl3 + Ph-NO2
Answer: c d) conc. H2SO4 + Oleum
Explanation: Toluene will undergo Friedel–Crafts alkylation View Answer
with methyl chloride and aluminum chloride as because as
weak electron withdrawing functional group — will not
Answer: a a negative charge on the ortho and para positions. These
Explanation: This reaction is nitration of benzene and conc. positions are thus the most reactive towards an electron-
HNO3 and conc. H2SO4 is used to carry out this synthesis poor electrophile. The highest electron density is located
although HNO2 + HNO3 can also be used. on both ortho and para positions, although this increased
reactivity might be offset by steric hindrance between
8. Which of the following reactants can be used to carry substituent and electrophile.
out following reaction?

BOND CLEAVAGE

1. When a bond is dissociated, what is the change in

a) conc. HNO3 + conc. H2SO4 energy in surrounding?
b) HCl + CO + AlCl3 a) Energy is absorbed
c) anhydrous AlCl3 + Ph-NO2 b) Energy is released
d) conc. H2SO4 + Oleum c) No change in energy
View Answer d) Firstly, energy will be absorbed and then released
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: This is Gattermann Koch Reaction in which Answer: a
HCl + CO + AlCl3 are used as reactant. H-CO+ is the real Explanation: When a chemical bond is broken energy will
attacking electrophile. be absorbed from surrounding and this is called as bond
dissociation energy.
9. What will be the product in the given reaction?
2. Energy released or absorbed in a chemical bond
formation or dissociation is measured in which of the
following units?
a) Kelvin
a) m-chlorotoluene
b) Joule
b) o-chlorotoluene and p-chlorotoluene
c) Pascal
c) 1-chloro-3-methylbenzene
d) mol
d) no reaction
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: d
Explanation: Energy is measured in Joules (J). However, we
Explanation: Here no reaction will take place because
often express the quantity as kilojoules (kJ) – that is, the
CCl4 + Cl2 show addition reaction and benzene don’t give
value in Joules divided by 1000.
addition reaction.
3. What will be the change in energy for the following
10. Which of the following is the most activating in
reaction?
electrophilic aromatic substitution?
H2(g)+F2(g)→ 2HF
a) -NO2
Given: To break one mole of H2, energy absorbed is 436 kJ.
b) -NHCOCH3
To break one mole of F2, energy absorbed is 158 kJ. To
c) -CN
form one moles of HF, energy released is 568 kJ.
d) -NH2
a) 542KJ
View Answer
b) -542KJ
Answer: d c) 26 KJ
Explanation: Groups with unshared pairs of electrons, such d) -26 KJ
as the amino group of aniline, are strongly activating and View Answer
ortho/para-directing by resonance. Such activating groups
donate those unshared electrons to the pi system, creating
Answer: b Answer: c
Explanation: So, applying the equation, Explanation: The enthalpy change of a reaction is the
∆H = ∑∆H (bonds broken in reactants) − ∑∆H (bonds made in products) overall change in enthalpy as a reaction proceeds, taking
ΔH reaction = (436+158)–(2X568) = −542kJ into account the energy consumed by bond cleavage and
The overall enthalpy of the reaction is negative, i.e., it’s an the energy liberated by bond formation. The increase in
exothermic reaction where energy is released in the form disorder of the system is represented by its entropy, not
of heat. its enthalpy.

4. Compound undergoing homolytic bond cleavage will 7. Which of the following terms describes a reaction in
lead to formation of which chemical species? where more energy is released by bond formation than is
a) Anion consumed by bond cleavage?
b) Cation a) Exothermic
c) Free radical b) Endothermic
d) Atoms c) Isothermal
View Answer d) Adiabatic
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: During homolytic fission of a neutral molecule Answer: a
with an even number of electrons, two free radicals will be Explanation: Exothermic is the flow of energy out of the
generated. system to its surroundings. By contrast endothermic’
describes a reaction in which there is a flow of energy into
5. In which form energy is stored in chemical bonds? the system from its surrounding.
a) Kinetic energy
b) Chemical energy 8. Which energy is required for homolytic cleavage?
c) Potential energy a) Singlet
d) Thermal energy b) Doublet
View Answer c) Triplet
d) Quadruplet
Answer: c View Answer
Explanation: The first law of thermodynamics essentially
states that the total energy in a chemical universe is Answer: c
constant but it can be converted from one form to Explanation: The triplet excitation energy of a sigma bond
another. The energy stored in chemical bonds is also a is the energy required for homolytic dissociation, but the
type of potential (stored) energy, not a type of kinetic actual excitation energy may be higher than the bond
energy. dissociation energy due to the repulsion between
electrons in the triplet state.
6. Which one of the following statements best describes
the enthalpy change of a reaction? 9. Which energy is required for heterolytic cleavage?
a) The energy released when chemical bonds are formed a) Singlet
during a chemical reaction b) Doublet
b) The energy consumed when chemical bonds are broken c) Triplet
during a chemical reaction d) Quadruplet
c) The difference between the energy released by bond View Answer
formation and the energy consumed by bond cleavage
during a chemical reaction Answer: a
d) The increase in disorder of the system as a reaction Explanation: The singlet excitation energy of a sigma bond
proceeds is the energy required for heterolytic dissociation, but the
View Answer actual singlet excitation energy may be lower than the
bond dissociation energy of heterolysis as a result of the
Coulombic attraction between the two ion fragments.
10. How the bond dissociation enthalpy changes as one What will be the ratio of the new rate of the earlier rate of
goes along the series of diatomics Li2, B2, C2, N2, O2 and F2? the reaction?
a) Increases a) (1⁄2)m+n
b) Decreases b) m+n
c) Increases then decreases c) n-m
d) Decreases then increases d) 2n-m
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: d
Explanation: On going Li2, B2, C2, N2, O2, F2 the complexity
of the molecular orbitals changes as the p-orbitals can
interact with each other end on to give ς-bonding and ς-
antibonding molecular orbitals OR they can interact side-
ways on to give π-bonding and π-antibonding molecular
orbitals that come in degenerate (equal energy) pairs.
Electrons continue to be added according to aufbau, Pauli
& Hund.
Explanation:

3. Rate = If the volume of reaction vessel is suddenly

REACTION KINETICS reduced to 1/4th of initial value. How new rate will be
affected?
1. For reaction system given below, volume is suddenly
a) 1⁄10
reduced to half of its value by increasing the pressure on
b) 1⁄8
it. If the reaction is of first order with respect to O2 and
c) 8
second order with respect to NO, what will be the change
d) 16
in the rate of reaction?
View Answer
2NO(g) + O2(g) + 2NO2(g)
a) diminish to one-fourth of its initial value Answer: d
b) diminish to one-eight of its initial value Explanation:
c) increase to eight times of its initial value
d) increase to four times of its initial value
View Answer

Answer: c

4. On which factor the rate constant of a reaction does not

depend upon?
a) temperature
b) activation energy
c) catalyst
d) concentration of reactants and products
Explanation: View Answer
2. The rate law for a reaction between the substances A Answer: d
and B is given by rate = K[A]n [B]m. On doubling the Explanation: The rate constant of reaction does not
concentration of A and halving the concentration of B.
depend on concentration of reactant & product (only on 8. Which is not true for a second order reduction?
nature of reactant & product). a) It can have rate constant 1 x 10-2 L mol-1 s-1
b) Its half-life is inversely proportional to its initial
5. The rate of reaction, A + B Products, is given by the concentration
equation, r = k[A][B]. If B is taken in excess, what would be c) Time to complete 75% reaction is twice of half-life
the order of reaction? d) T50 = 1/(ka⋅A0)
a) 2 View Answer
b) 1
c) zero Answer: c
d) unpredictable Explanation:
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A + B → Products
H = k[A][B] [if B is taken in large excess then according to
pseudo first order reaction. B is taken as constant]. So,
order = 1.

6. In a reaction, 2A2 + B2 → 2A2B, when the reactant A will

disappear?
a) half the rate that B will decrease
b) the same rate that B will decrease but t75 = 3 * t50
c) double the rate that A2B will form So, option Time to complete 75% reaction is twice of half-
d) twice the rate that B will decrease life is wrong statement for n = 2.
View Answer
9. The rate of decomposition of a substance increases
Answer: d concentration of substance at same temperature. Find out
order of reaction.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 0
View Answer

Explanation: Answer: b
So, the reactant A will disappear when A is twice the rate Explanation: Rate = k [A]α
that B will decrease. R1 = k[A]n
R2 = k [1.5 A]n = 2.25 R1
7. The rate of reaction that does not involve gases, is not k(1.5A)n = 2.25*k*[A]n
dependent on: (1.5)n * [A]n = 2.25*[A]n
a) pressure n log (1.5) = log (2.25)
b) temperature n = 2.
c) concentration
d) catalyst 10. If a reaction is nth order the half-life period ________
View Answer of the initial concentration of the reactants.
a) is independent
Answer: a b) varies inversely as (n-1)th power
Explanation: The rate of reaction that does not involve c) varies inversely as nth power
gases does not depend on pressure. d) varies directly as (n-1)th power
View Answer
Answer: b The nascent hydrogen formed by the reaction between
zinc and HCl acid reduces ethyl chloride to ethane.

Explanation: For nth order; So, varies 4. Which alkyl halide out of the following may follow both
inversely as (n – 1)th power. SN1 and SN2 mechanism?
a) CH3-X
b) (CH3)2CH-X
HALOGEN CONTAINING ORGANIC COMPOUNDS c) (CH3)3C-X
d) (CH3)3C-CH2-X
ALKYL HALIDES View Answer

1. Which C-X bond has the highest bond energy per mole? Answer: b
a) C-Br Explanation: (CH3)2CH-X follows both SN1 and SN2
b) C-Cl mechanism because the second CH3 of (CH3)2CH-X further
c) C-F blocks a nucleophile (such as: OH) in backside SN2 attack,
d) C-I but it increases the stability of the carbocation resulting
View Answer from SN1 ionization. As a result, SN1 and SN2 mechanisms
are sometimes competitive for (CH3)2CH-X.
Answer: c
Explanation: Bond energies depend on many factors: 5. When two moles of ethyl chloride react with two moles
electron affinities, sizes of atoms involved in the bond, of sodium in the presence of ether what will be formed?
differences in their electronegativity, and the overall a) 2 moles of ethane
structure of the molecule. There is a general trend in that b) 1 moles of ethane
the shorter the bond length, the higher the bond energy. c) 2 moles of butane
d) 1 moles of butane
2. Which alkyl halide has the highest reactivity for a
View Answer
particular alkyl group?
a) R-F Answer: d
b) R-Cl Explanation: Wurtz reaction is method of preparation of
c) R-I higher alkanes from lower alkyl halides. This is coupling
d) R-Br reaction. In this reaction alkyl halides are reacted with
View Answer sodium metal in presence of dry ether and higher alkanes
with even number of carbon atoms only are formed, by
Answer: c
this method.
Explanation: Reactivity order for the alkyl halides towards
Sn2 reaction is R-I>R-Br>R-Cl>R-F. This can be explained by 6. Which of the following halide can give best SN2
which halogen atom is a better leaving group compared to reaction?
the other. a) Primary alkyl halide
b) Tertiary alkyl halide
3. When ethyl chloride reacts with nascent hydrogen, what
c) Secondary alkyl halide
is the formed product?
d) All can give SN2 reaction at same rate
a) Methane
View Answer
b) Propane
c) Butane Answer: a
d) Ethane Explanation: A 1° alkyl halide has only one alkyl group, so it
View Answer is relatively unstable. It is unlikely to form a 1° carbocation
in an SN1 reaction. Instead, it will take the lower-energy
Answer: d
SN2 path as 1° alkyl is sterically unhindered. More the
Explanation: When an alkyl halide is treated with zinc and
steric hinderance the substrate becomes less susceptible
hydrochloric acid, it is reduced to the respective alkane.
to SN2 attack.
7. Why alkyl halides are considered to be very reactive b) PCl5
compounds towards nucleophile? c) SOCl2/ Pyridine
a) they have an electrophilic carbon & a bad leaving group d) PCl3
b) they have a nucleophilic carbon & a good leaving group View Answer
c) they have an electrophilic carbon
d) they have an electrophilic carbon & a good leaving Answer: c
group Explanation: The best method of preparation of alkyl
View Answer halides is a reaction of alcohol with SOCl2/ Pyridine
because by-products formed in the reaction are SO2and
Answer: d HCl which are in gaseous form and escape into the
Explanation: Alkyl halides are considered to be very atmosphere leaving behind pure alkyl chlorides.
reactive compounds towards nucleophile because they CH3CH2−OH + SOCl2 → CH3CH2−Cl + SO2↑ + HCl↑
have an electrophilic carbon & a good leaving group as we
go down the periodic table, halides that are larger in size
will also be able to distribute their charge over a larger ARYL HALIDES
volume, making them less reactive (less basic). This is why
fluoride is a much poorer leaving group than any of the 1. Dehydrohalogenation of 1,2 di-bromo cyclohexane gives
other halides. So, alkyl halides are good for nucleophilic which of the following compound?
substitution reactions.

8. In primary alkyl halides, carbon attached to the halogen a)

atom is further attached to how many carbon atoms?
a) 1
b) 2 b)
c) 3
d) 4
c)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: As we can see below, carbon attached to the d)
halogen atom is further attached to one carbon atom. View Answer
Example: CH3-X → Methyl halide Answer: a
CH3-CH2-X → Ethyl halide Explanation: As we can see in below reaction that double
CH3-CH2-CH2-X → n-Propyl halide. E2 elimination yields the conjugated diene, 1,3-
9. Which of the following is not the method of preparation cyclohexadiene. Note the overall transformation is alkene
of alkyl halide? to conjugated diene.
a) Darzen’s method
b) Halogenation of alkene
c) Addition of HX on alkenes
d) Hydration of alkene
View Answer

Answer: d
2. Which one of the following possess highest melting
Explanation: Hydration of alkene is electrophilic addition
point?
of H2O to alkenes which forms alcohol not alkyl halides.
a) Chlorobenzene
10. Which of the following reactant gives the best method b) o-dichlorobenzene
of preparation of alkyl halides when reacts with alcohol? c) m-dichlorobenzene
a) Zn/HCl d) p-dichlorobenzene
View Answer
Answer: d 5. What will be the product for the following reaction?
Explanation: p-dichlorobenzene molecule has symmetrical
structure. It can fit well in its crystal lattice. The
intermolecular forces of attraction are strong. Hence, it
possesses highest melting point.

3. What would be the product formed for the following

reaction?

a)

a)

b)

b)

c)
c)

d)
View Answer d)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: When 1-Bromo-3-chloro cyclobutane reacts Answer: a
with two equivalents of metallic sodium in ether it is the Explanation: −CCl3 is a m-directing group. So, attack will be
example of Wurtz reaction. at meta position.

6. Which of the following is true about chlorobenzene?

a) Chlorobenzene is less reactive than benzyl chloride
b) Chlorobenzene is more reactive than ethyl bromide
c) Chlorobenzene is nearly as reactive as methyl chloride
4. Which of these can be used as moth repellent? d) Chlorobenzene is more reactive than isopropyl chloride
a) Benzene hexachloride View Answer
b) Benzal chloride
c) Hexachloroethane Answer: a
d) Tetrachloroethane Explanation: Chlorobenzene is less reactive than benzyl
View Answer chloride. In chlorobenzene the lone pairs present on Cl
atom get involved in resonance with π electrons of
Answer: c benzene due to which C−Cl bond acquires double bond
Explanation: Hexachloroethane can be used as moth character Hence, reactivity decreases. C2H5−Cl is more
repellent. It has also been used as a plasticizer for cellulose reactive than C6H5−CH2−Cl.
esters in place of camphor, a polymer additive, a
component of fungicidal and insecticidal formulations, in 7. In the below process what is the product A?
the formulation of extreme pressure lubricants, and in the
manufacture of fire extinguishing fluids.

a) Fluorobenzene
b) Benzene a) Nickel
c) 1, 4-difluorobenzene b) AlCl3
d) 1, 3-difluorobenzene c) Bright sunlight
View Answer d) Zinc
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In this reaction aniline is to be treated with Answer: c
nitrous acid to form benzene diazonium chloride, which is Explanation: Benzene will react with three molecules of
further reacted with HBF₄ to form benzene diazonium chlorine in the presence of sunlight to give benzene
fluorobarate. This is when heated, undergoes hexachloride.
decomposition to give fluorobenzene. This reaction is
called as Balz-Shiemann reaction.

8. What is the name of the following reaction? POLYHALOGEN DERIVATIVES

1. What will be the product for the given reaction?

a) CCl3CHO
b) C6H6Cl6
c) C6H12Cl6
d) C6H9Cl2
View Answer
a) Chlorination
b) Sandmeyer’s reaction Answer: b
c) Perkin reaction Explanation: Benzyl hexachloride will be formed when
d) Substitution reaction Benzene reacts with chlorine in presence of U.V light.
View Answer C6H6 + 3Cl2 + U.V light → C6H6Cl6
Benzene BHC
Answer: b
Explanation: The substitution of an aromatic amino group 2. The molecular formula of DDT has how many chlorine
is possible via preparation of its diazonium salt and atoms?
subsequent displacement with a nucleophile (Cl–, I–, CN–, a) 5 chlorine atoms
RS–, HO–) is known as Sandmeyer’s reaction. b) 2 chlorine atoms
c) 3 chlorine atoms
9. Which of the following is the commercial method of d) 4 chlorine atoms
preparation of Chlorobenzene? View Answer
a) Raschig process
b) Wurtz Fitting reaction Answer: a
c) Friedel-Crafts reaction Explanation: As we can in below molecular structure of
d) Grignard reaction
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: An industrial process for making
chlorobenzene (and phenol) by a gas-phase reaction DDT has 5 chlorine atoms.
between benzene vapour, hydrogen chloride, and oxygen
(air) at 230°C. The catalyst is copper(II) chloride. 3. What is the IUPAC name of chloroform?
2C6H6 + 2HCl + O2 → 2H2O + 2C6H5Cl a) Dichloromethane
b) Trichloromethane
10. Benzene reacts with chlorine to form benzene c) Chloromethane
hexachloride in presence of which of the following d) Carbon tetrachloride
reactant? View Answer
Answer: b methylene dichloride the correct molecular formula is
Explanation: Chloroform, or trichloromethane, is an
organic compound with formula CHCl3. It is a colorless,
sweet-smelling, dense liquid that is produced on a large
scale as a precursor to PTFE. CH2Cl2.
4. Which among the following is true? 7. Central nervous system can be depressed by the use of
a) Freon does not initiate radical chain reactions in which of the following:
stratosphere a) Chloroform
b) Iodoform initiates radical chain reactions in b) Freon
stratosphere c) Iodoform
c) Freon initiates radical chain reactions in stratosphere d) DDT
d) Chloroform initiates radical chain reactions in View Answer
stratosphere
View Answer Answer: a
Explanation: Acute chloroform intoxication can cause
Answer: c depression of the central nervous system and may lead to
Explanation: Freon (Eg: CFCl3– Freon11) does initiate death from lethal arrhythmias or respiratory arrest. Thus,
radical chain reactions in stratosphere, which can upset the organic solvent is no longer in clinical use as an
the ozone layer. anaesthetic, but still plays a role in cases of suicide,
5. CFxCly [where x + y = 4], why these compounds are not homicide or inhalation for psychotropic effects.
used? 8. How Benzene hexachloride (BHC) is used?
a) These are fluoro carbons a) Insecticides
b) These are difficult to synthesise b) Fertilizers
c) They deplete ozone layer c) Anaesthetics
d) These are very expensive d) Antiseptics
View Answer View Answer
Answer: c Answer: a
Explanation: CFC molecules are made up of chlorine, Explanation: Benzene hexachloride. Benzene hexachloride
fluorine and carbon atoms and are extremely stable. This (BHC), any of several stereoisomers of 1,2,3,4,5,6-
extreme stability allows CFC’s to slowly make their way hexachlorocyclohexane formed by the light-induced
into the stratosphere (most molecules decompose before addition of chlorine to benzene. One of these isomers is an
they can cross into the stratosphere from the insecticide called lindane, or Gammexane.
troposphere).
9. Depletion of Ozone is believed to increase which of the
6. Which one of the following is the correct formula of following?
methylene dichloride? a) Population
a) ClCH = CHCl
b) Ultraviolet rays
b) ClC ≡ CCl c) Pollution
c) CH2Cl2 d) Greenery
d) CH2(Cl) CH2Cl View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: c Explanation: Ozone layer depletion increases the amount
Explanation: As we can see below molecular diagram of of UVB that reaches the Earth’s surface. Laboratory and
epidemiological studies demonstrate that UVB causes non-
melanoma skin cancer and plays a major role in malignant
melanoma development.
10. Which is the correct formula of Freon-12? b) Ethyl benzoate
a) CCl2F2 c) 4,4-dimethylcyclohexanone
b) CClF3 d) 4-heptanone
c) CHCl2F View Answer
d) CCl3F
View Answer Answer: d
Explanation: 4-heptanone does not give a tertiary alcohol
Answer: a upon reaction with methylmagnesium bromide, as the
Explanation: As we can see below molecular diagram of Grignard Reaction is the addition of an organomagnesium
Freon-12, the correct molecular formula is CCl2F2. halide (Grignard reagent) to a ketone or aldehyde, to form
a tertiary or secondary alcohol, respectively.

4. Which of the following statements about Grignard

reagent is false?
a) Grignard reagents (RMgBr) add to the carbonyl group of
aldehydes and ketones
b) An organosodium compound is not very reactive
GRIGNARD REAGENT compared to a Grignard reagent
c) Grignard reagents are prepared in ether or
1. Alkyl halides can be converted into Grignard reagents by tetrahydrofuran (THF)
a) Boiling them with Mg ribbon in alcoholic solution d) Grignard reagents are decomposed by water and
b) Warming them with magnesium powder in dry ether alcohol
c) Refluxing them with MgCl2 solution View Answer
d) Warming them with Mgcl2
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: It is supposed that the Mg-C bond is strongly
Answer: b polar covalent, not ionic. Grignard’s reagents are less
Explanation: Alkyl halides can be converted into Grignard reactive than organosodium, -potassium and -lithium
reagents by warming them with magnesium powder in dry compounds, that is the reason why it is more convenient
ether. to work with them.
RX + Mg + Dry ether → R−Mg−X
5. Which of the following compounds gives a secondary
2. Which is not present in Grignard reagent? alcohol upon reaction with methylmagnesium bromide?
a) Methyl group a) Butyl formate
b) Magnesium b) 3- pentanone
c) Halogen c) Pentanal
d) −COOH group d) Methyl butanoate
View Answer View Answer

Answer: d Answer: c
Explanation: Grignard reagents are made from Explanation: Pentanal gives a secondary alcohol upon
halogenoalkanes (haloalkanes or alkyl halides) and reaction with methylmagnesium bromide, as the Grignard
introduces some of their reactions. A Grignard reagent has Reaction is the addition of an organomagnesium halide
a formula RMgX where X is a halogen, and R is an alkyl or (Grignard reagent) to a ketone or aldehyde, to form a
aryl (based on a benzene ring) group. tertiary or secondary alcohol, respectively.

3. Which of the following compounds does not give a 6. A Grignard’s reagent may be made by reacting
tertiary alcohol upon reaction with methylmagnesium magnesium with which of the following compound?
bromide? a) Methyl amine
a) 3-methylpentanal b) Diethyl ether
c) Ethyl iodide b) acetaldehyde
d) Ethyl alcohol c) methyl acetate
View Answer d) acetic anhydride
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: A Grignard’s reagent can be formed by Answer: b
reacting magnesium with Ethyl iodide, as shown below; Explanation: Acetaldehyde would not give tert-butyl
C2H5I + Mg + Dryether → C2H5 − Mg − I (Ethylmagnesium alcohol when treated with excess methylmagnesium
iodide) bromide, as the Grignard Reaction is the addition of an
organomagnesium halide (Grignard reagent) to a ketone
7. Which of the following compounds gives a primary or aldehyde, to form a tertiary or secondary alcohol,
alcohol upon reaction with phenylmagnesium bromide? respectively.
a) 2-methyloxirane
b) ethylene oxide 10. Which of the following reaction sequence that will best
c) ethyl formate carry out the following preparation?
d) carbon dioxide
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Ethylene oxide reacts with Grignard reagents
to give, after protonation, primary alcohols with two a) 1) I + MeONa + CH3H2Br 2) neutralize
additional carbon atoms. b) 1) I + EtONa 2) CH3CH2Br 3) neutralize
c) 1) CH3CH2Br + Mg, Et2O 2) Add I 3) neutralize
8. Which of the following reagents, when treated with
d) 1) I + CH3CH2OH + Mg 2) neutralize
phenylmagnesiuim bromide followed by acid workup, will
View Answer
yield 2-phenylethanol?
a) Ethanol Answer: c
b) Diethyl ether Explanation: In the first step, the Grignard forms the
c) Ethanal carbon-carbon bond. This results in an alkoxide (the
d) Oxirane conjugate base of an alcohol). To form the alcohol, it’s
View Answer necessary to add acid at the end of the reaction and this
reaction usually occurs in Et2O or THF followed by
Answer: d
H3O+ work-ups.
Explanation: When is treated Diethylether with
phenylmagnesiuim bromide followed by acid workup, will
yield 2-phenylethanol.
Grignard reagents are made by adding the halogenoalkane ALLYL & VINYLIC HALIDES
to small bits of magnesium in a flask containing
1. Which of the following is not an allylic halide?
ethoxyethane (commonly called diethyl ether or just
“ether”). The flask is fitted with a reflux condenser, and
the mixture is warmed over a water bath for 20 – 30 a)
minutes.
CH3CH2Br + Mg + Diethyl ether → CH3CH2MgBr
Everything must be perfectly dry because Grignard b)
reagents react with water.

9. Which of the following compounds would not give tert-

butyl alcohol when treated with excess methylmagnesium
bromide? c)
a) acetyl chloride
 4. Which of the following is considered as allylic carbon
atom?
d)
View Answer

Answer: c
a) 1
Explanation: When a halogen (F, Cl, Br) is attached to a sp3
carbon of a propene, it is called an allylic halide. The b) 3
c) 2
propene in turn can be attached to other elements. An
allylic halide is an alkyl halide which has one or more d) 4
halide at allylic carbon. View Answer

Answer: c
2. Which of the following statement is incorrect about
Explanation: An allylic carbon is a carbon atom bonded to
allylic halide?
a) The positions adjacent to alkene C=C often show a carbon atom that in turn is doubly bonded to another
carbon atom.
decrement in reactivity
b) SN1 reactions of allylic halides are possible 5. Which of the following allylic halide has commercial
c) Allylic bonds are often weaker and therefore more easily usage?
broken a) H2C = CH−CH2Cl
d) stability of the allylic radical can be utilized in the b) H2C = CH−CH2Br
preparation of allylic halides c) H2C = CH−CH2I
View Answer d) H2C = CH−CH2F
Answer: c View Answer
Explanation: The positions adjacent to alkene C=C often Answer: a
show enhanced reactivity compared to simple alkanes due Explanation: As an alkylating agent, allylic chloride is useful
to the proximity of the adjacent π system. Such positions in the manufacture of pharmaceuticals and pesticides,
are referred as “allylic”. such as mustard oil.
3. How many resonating structure of allylic carbocation is 6. What is the desired product for the following reaction?
present?

a) 1
b) 2 a)
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer b)

Answer: b
Explanation: There are two resonation structures, as
shown below. In the two resonance forms of the allylic
cation, the positive charge is located on the terminal c)
carbon atoms and never on the middle carbon.

d)
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: We have 1 equivalent of Br2 swimming
around, of which only a small proportion at any given time
a) (CH3)3CCH≡CH
will exist as bromine radical [due to the initiation step]. we
b) (CH3)3CCH=CH2
had a very low concentration of Br2. If the concentration of
c) (CH3)3CCH=CHOH
Br2 is kept low, not only will the rate of dibromination be
d) (CH3)3CCH=CHNH2
lower, the relative rate of bromine radical relative to
View Answer
Br2 will increase. Therefore, the rate of C-H abstraction
relative to dibromination will increase, which will allow our Answer: a
allylic bromination product to be formed in a higher yield. Explanation: Vinyl halides undergo elimination reactions
similar to alkyl halides, although at slower rates, and they
7. Which of the following is a vinylic halide?
normally require very strong bases such as sodium amide
(NaNH2).
a)

b) 10. How can be a vinylic halide converted into Grignard

reagent?
a) Addition of base
b) Addition of acid
c) By adding magnesium
c)
d) Addition of diethyl ether
View Answer

d) Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: Vinylic halides may be converted to Grignard
reagents by reaction with magnesium, as shown below;
Answer: c
Explanation: In vinylic halides the carbon that bears the
halogen is doubly bonded to another carbon.
11. What will be the product when addition of hydrogen
8. Which of the following vinyl halide has industrial chloride to vinyl chloride occurs?
application? a) 1,1-dichloroethane
a) Vinyl fluoride b) 1,2-dichloroethane
b) Vinyl chloride c) 1-chloroethane
c) Vinyl bromide d) 1-chloro 2,2-dichloroethane
d) Vinyl iodide View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b Explanation: The addition of hydrogen chloride to vinyl
Explanation: Vinyl chloride is an organohalogen compound chloride to yield 1,1-dichloroethane. The product is a
that has important industrial applications. When treated geminal dihalide (both halogens are bonded to the same
with certain catalysts, vinyl chloride monomers undergo carbon).
polymerization and form the larger compound known as
polyvinyl chloride, or PVC. PVC is used in the manufacture 12. What will be the product for the given reaction?
of numerous products, including packaging films and CH2 = CHC ≡ CH + HCl → ?
water pipes. vinylacetylene
a) 2-chloro-1,3-dibutadiene
9. Which of the following is the product for the given b) 1,2-dichloro-1,3-dibutadiene
reaction?
c) 1-chloro-2,3-dibutadiene elimination of the halide occurs, leading to the formation
d) 3-chloro-1,2-dibutadiene of an alkene.
View Answer
3. Which of the following steps is not used in the
Answer: a fermentation of starch into ethyl alcohol?
Explanation: 2-chloro-1,3-dibutadiene the monomer used a) Hydrolysis of starch into maltose by diastase present in
in the formation of the elastomer neoprene, is prepared barley
from vinylacetylene by this reaction. b) Conversion of maltose into glucose by maltase present
in yeast
c) Conversion of glucose into ethanol by zymase present in
yeast
d) Conversion of sucrose into glucose and fructose by
sucrase present in yeast
View Answer
OXYGEN CONTAINING ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
Answer: d
PREPARATION OF ALCOHOLS Explanation: Conversion of sucrose into glucose and
fructose by sucrase present in yeast steps is not used in
1. Catalytic reduction (Hydrogenation) of carbon the fermentation of starch into ethyl alcohol.
monooxide with H2 under high pressure and temperature
gives methyl alcohol. What is this process is known as? 4. 15% pure ethyl alcohol (wash) on fractional distillation
a) Baeyer’s test gives 95% ethyl alcohol by weight which is commonly
b) Hofmann’s reaction known as which of the following terms?
c) Kolb process a) Wash
d) BASF process b) Absolute alcohol
View Answer c) Rectified spirit
d) Methylated spirit
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: Currently, a Cu/ZnO/Al2O3 catalyst system has
been employed industrially in MeOH synthesis for over Answer: c
half a century (a worldwide demand of 75 Mtons•year−1). Explanation: Rectified spirit obtained from the distillation
It was run mostly at elevated pressures. (5–10 MPa) and of the fermentation liquor wash contains about 95% of
high temperature (493–573 K) by feeding a CO (5%)- ethanol.
CO2 (5%)-H2 syngas stream.
5. Ethyl alcohol obtained by fermentation of starch or
2. Which of the following statements is incorrect regarding molasses is called wash, and what is it’s purity?
preparation of alcohols? a) 15%
a) Aldehydes and Ketones on catalytic reduction by [H] b) 99%
give primary alcohol and secondary alcohol respectively c) 99.9%
b) Ketones on reaction with Grignard’s reagent gives d) 95%
tertiary alcohol View Answer
c) Aldehydes on reaction with Grignard’s reagent gives
Answer: a
primary or secondary alcohol
Explanation: The alcohol obtained from molasses is called
d) Alkyl halides on reaction alcoholic potash gives alcohol
“wash” which contains the low percentage of ethyl alcohol
View Answer
(15-30%).
Answer: d
6. Which is the only alcohol that can be prepared by the
Explanation: Whenever an alkyl halide reacts with
indirect hydration of alkene?
alcoholic potash (or alcoholic sodium hydroxide), beta-
a) Ethyl alcohol
b) Propyl alcohol
c) Isobutyl alcohol Answer: d
d) Methyl alcohol Explanation: Haber’s process is not a method for
View Answer preparation of alcohol, ammonia is formed via this
method.
Answer: a
Explanation: Alkenes can be hydrated directly or indirectly 10. Isopropyl methyl ether when treated with cold
which results in the formation of alcohols. First step is the hydrogen iodide gives which of the following alcohol?
reaction of alkene with sulphuric acid to give alkyl sulphate a) isopropyl iodide and methyl iodide
esters and second step is Direct hydration i.e. protonation b) isopropyl alcohol and methyl iodide
of alkenesthen reaction with water to give alcohols. c) isopropyl alcohol and methyl alcohol
d) isopropyl iodide and methyl alcohol
7. Acid catalysed hydration of alkenes except ethene leads View Answer
to the formation of which of the following?
a) Mixture of secondary and tertiary alcohols Answer: b
b) Mixture of secondary and tertiary alcohols Explanation: When ethers are treated with strong acid in
c) Secondary or tertiary alcohol the presence of a nucleophile, they can be cleaved to give
d) Primary alcohol alcohols and alkyl halides. If the ether is on a primary
View Answer carbon this may occur through an SN2 pathway.

Answer: a
Explanation: Acid catalysed hydration of alkenes except
ethene leads to the formation of mixture of secondary and REACTION OF ALCOHOLS
tertiary alcohols. 1. Which one of the following compound is obtained by
8. Among the alkenes which one produces tertiary butyl the oxidation of primary alcohol with nascent oxygen?
alcohol on acid hydration? a) Alkanal
a) (CH3)2C=CH2 b) Alkanone
b) CH3-CH=CH-CH3 c) Ether
c) CH3CH2CH=CH2 d) Amine
d) CH3CH=CH2 View Answer
View Answer Answer: a
Answer: a Explanation: Oxidation of alcohols to aldehydes is partial
Explanation: When treated with aq. acid, most commonly oxidation; aldehydes are further oxidized to carboxylic
H2SO4, alkenes form alcohols. Regioselectivity predicted by acids. Conditions required for making aldehydes are heat
Markovnikov’s rule. Reaction proceeds via protonation to and distillation. In aldehyde formation, the temperature of
give the more stable carbocation intermediate. Not the reaction should be kept above the boiling point of the
stereoselective since reactions proceeds via planar aldehyde and below the boiling point of the alcohol.
carbocation.
2. Which one of the following compound is obtained by
9. Which of the following way is not a method of the oxidation of secondary alcohols by [O]?
preparation of alcohol? a) Ketone
a) Grignard reaction b) Aldehyde
b) Reduction of an aldehyde, ketone, or carboxylic acid c) Ether
with the appropriate reducing agent d) Amine
c) Substitution reaction of hydroxide or water on the View Answer
appropriate alkyl halide Answer: a
d) Haber’s process Explanation: Ketone compound is obtained by the
View Answer
oxidation of secondary alcohols by nascent oxygen atom
[O].
3. Secondary alcohols on catalytic dehydrogenation by Cu- d) Unimolecular elimination/E1 reaction
Ni couple gives ___________ View Answer
a) Ketone
b) Aldehyde Answer: d
c) Carboxylic acid Explanation: Alcohol upon reaction with protic acids tends
d) Amine to lose a molecule of water to form alkenes. These
View Answer reactions are known as dehydration of alcohols.
Dehydration of alcohols is an example of Unimolecular
Answer: a elimination reaction.
Explanation: When the vapours of a secondary alcohol are
passed over copper heated at 573K, the corresponding 7. Among the following, which is least acidic?
ketone is formed. a) Phenol
b) O-cresol
4. The reaction of carboxylic acids with alcohols catalysed c) p-nitrophenol
by conc. H2SO4 is called __________ d) p- chlorophenol
a) Dehydration View Answer
b) Saponification
c) Esterification Answer: b
d) Neutralization Explanation: O-cresol is least acidic because Presence of
View Answer electron withdrawing groups at ortho and para position
increases the acidic strength, whereas electron releasing
Answer: c or donating groups at ortho and para position decreases
Explanation: When a carboxylic acid is treated with an acidic strength. In cresol (ortho or para cresol), methyl
alcohol and an acid catalyst, an ester is formed (along with group is +I group, so it destabilises the anion formed after
water). This reaction is called the esterification. ionisation, hence cresol is less acidic than carbolic acid
(phenol).
5. Which one is the correct order of reactivity of different
types of alcohol towards hydrogen halide? 8. Which of the following alcohols would be most soluble
a) 1° alcohol > 2° alcohol > 3° alcohol in water?
b) 2° alcohol > 1° alcohol > 3° alcohol a) Propanol
c) 3° alcohol > 1° alcohol > 2° alcohol b) Hexanol
d) 3° alcohol > 2° alcohol > 1° alcohol c) Pentanol
View Answer d) Butanol
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Reaction of HX with alcohol depends on the Answer: a
degree of carbonation generated due to heterocyclic Explanation: Propanol is the most soluble in water among
cleavage of HX bond. If alcohol is primary alcohol then given alcohols, as solubility of alcohols in water decreases
reaction will proceed through Sn2 for tertiary alcohol it with increase in molecular mass.
will proceed with Sn1. For secondary alcohol it can go
through both path (Sn1 or Sn2). Sn1 being ionic in nature 9. What is the best reagent to convert isopropyl alcohol to
takes place very fast while Sn2 is molecular in nature isopropyl bromide?
reacts slowly. Hence, we can sum up above, Rate of
reaction is 3° alcohol > 2° alcohol > 1° alcohol.

6. The dehydration of alcohols is an example of ________ a) HBr

a) Bimolecular elimination/E2 reaction b) SOBr2
b) SN2 reaction c) Br2
c) SN1 reaction d) CH3MgBr
View Answer
Answer: b Answer: d
Explanation: Thionyl bromide will react with secondary Explanation: As there will be resonance between -COO–.
alcohols and give a reasonable percent yield of the So, it will be more stable and acidic than -OH.
bromide.
3. What is the correct order of acidic strength?
10. The major reason that phenol is a better Bronsted acid
than cyclohexanol is ____________
a) it is a better proton donor
b) the cyclohexyl group is an electron donating group by
induction, which destabilizes the anion formed in the
reaction
c) phenol is able to stabilize the anion formed in the
reaction by resonance a) I > II > III
d) the phenyl group is an electron withdrawing group by b) II > I > III
induction, which stabilizes the anion formed in the c) III > II > I
reaction d) I > III > II
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: b
Explanation: Whenever resonance exists, it usually is a Explanation: Inductive effect (+I) destabilises phenol ion
very important factor to be considered in decisions about and III has maximum +I effect and in II -CH3 is at meta
structure and reactivity correlations and in many cases, it position so no effect on phenol ion negative charge.
is the most important factor. In this case there is
delocalization of the electrons into the benzene ring. 4. Which of the following is more acidic alcohol?
a) Phenol
b) Cyclohexanol
c) Methanol
ALCOHOLS AS ACIDS
d) Ethanol
1. CH3OH is a which type of acid? View Answer
a) Bronsted acid
Answer: a
b) Lewis acid
Explanation: Resonance stabalizes the negative charge in
c) Arrhenius acid
phenol ion, negative charge is moving throughout. So,
d) Lewis and Arrhenius acid
phenol is more acidic.
View Answer
5. What is the correct order of acidic strength?
Answer: a
Explanation: Alcohols are very weak Bronsted acids with
pKa values generally in the range of 15 – 20. Because the
hydroxyl proton is the most electrophilic site, proton
transfer is the most important reaction to consider with
nucleophiles.

2. Which of the following is more acidic than alcohols? a) I > II > III
a) Arrhenius acid b) III > II > I
b) amine c) II > III > I
c) alkyne d) I > III > II
d) carboxylic acid View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Inductive effect (-I) stabilises phenol ion and II
has maximum -I effect. But at para and ortho position +M Answer: d
effect will also show effect so they are les acidic than Explanation: Electron withdrawing group stabalises phenol
meta. ion. More the -M effect, more the stability.

6. What is the correct order of acidic strength? 9. What is the correct order of acidic strength?

a) I > II > III

a) I > II > III b) III > II > I
b) III > II > I c) II > III > I
c) II > III > I d) I > III > II
d) I > III > II View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b Explanation: Electron withdrawing group stabalises phenol
Explanation: Inductive effect (-I) stabilises phenol ion and II ion and electron donating group destablises it. More the -
has maximum -I effect. Less the distance between electron M effect, more the stability, so I is most stable and acidic.
withdrawing group and negative charge more the stability
and acidity too. 10. What is the correct order of acidic strength?

7. What is the correct order of acidic strength?

a) CH3-OH
b) CH3CH2-OH
c) CH3 CH2 CH2-OH
d) CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2-OH
View Answer
a) I > II > III
Answer: a b) III > II > I
Explanation: Inductive effect (+I) destabilises -OH ion, so c) II > I > III
CH3-OH is most acidic alcohol among above, as it has least d) I > III > II
+I. View Answer

8. What is the correct order of acidic strength? Answer: c

Explanation: Electron withdrawing group stabalises phenol
ion. More the -M effect, more the stability.

VINYLIC ALCOHOL

a) I > II > III 1. Which is the vinylic alcohol position in the given
b) III > II > I diagram?
c) II > III > I
d) I > III > II
View Answer

a) a
b) b
c) c temperature, acetaldehyde (H3CC(O)H) is more stable than
d) d vinyl alcohol (H2C=CHOH) by 42.7 kJ/mol. This
View Answer tautomerization can be catalyzed via photochemical
process.
Answer: c
Explanation: A vinyl halide is clearly a species with a 5. Polyvinyl alcohol is soluble in which solvent?
formula H2C=C(OH)H, in which a halide is directly bound to a) protic
an olefinic bond. b) aprotic
c) polar aprotic
2. What is the IUPAC name for vinylic alcohol? d) polar protic
a) Ethanol View Answer
b) Methanol
c) Ethenol Answer: d
d) Methenol Explanation: Polyvinyl alcohol is a water-soluble synthetic
View Answer polymer obtained by polymerisation of vinyl alcohol.

Answer: c 6. Which of the following set of reagents can not be used

Explanation: Vinyl alcohol, also called ethenol (IUPAC for the following conversion?
name), is the simplest enol. Vinyl alcohol or ethenol is
CH₂=CH–OH. Ethanol has very ordinary, straightforward
behavior, typical of an alcohol. Vinyl alcohol, however,
because of its double bond (also referred to as its
a) NaOH
unsaturation), behaves considerably different.
b) R-OH
3. Which of the following is not an isomer of vinylic c) Net3
alcohol? d) NaH
a) Acetaldehyde View Answer
b) Ethylene oxide
Answer: d
c) Ethanol
Explanation: NaH is a strong base and will completely
d) Ethanal
enolise keto form.
View Answer
7. What will be the product for the given reaction?
Answer: c
Explanation: With the formula CH2CHOH, vinyl alcohol is
an isomer of acetaldehyde/ethanal and ethylene oxide. It
is not an isomer of ethanol which has formula CH3CH2OH.

4. Which of the statement is not true about vinylic

alcohols?
a) Several metal complexes are known that contain vinyl
alcohol as a ligand
a)
b) Vinyl alcohol was discovered in the molecular cloud
Sagittarius B, using the 12-meter radio telescope
c) It can be formed by elimination of water from ethylene
glycol at a temperature of 900 °C and low pressure
d) Vinylic alcohol shows no tautomerism b)
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Under normal conditions, vinyl alcohol
c)
converts (tautomerizes) to acetaldehyde. At room
 a)
d)
View Answer

Answer: a
b)
Explanation: At low temperature hydrogen from adjacent
carbonyl group will be removed instead of hydrogen from
attached to carbon adjacent to alkyl group (R).

c)

d)
8. What will be the product for the given reaction?
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: This is alkylation of carbonyl compound, via
formation of enol form (vinylic alcohol), as shown in the
given reaction.

a)

10. What is the final product for the given reaction?

b)

c)

a)
d)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: At high temperature hydrogen from attached b)
to carbon adjacent to alkyl group (R) will be removed
instead of hydrogen from adjacent carbonyl group will be
removed. c)

9. What is the final product for the given reaction?

d)
View Answer
Answer: d d) Hock method
Explanation: This is alkylation of carbonyl compound, via View Answer
formation of enol form (vinylic alcohol), as shown in the
given reaction. Answer: d
Explanation: The Hock process (cumene-phenol process,
cumene process) is an industrial process for developing
phenol and acetone from benzene and propylene. The
term stems from cumene (isopropyl benzene), the
intermediate material during the process.
PREPARATION OF PHENOLS
4. Reaction of aqueous sodium hydroxide on
1. On heating aqueous solution of benzene diazonium chlorobenzene gives which of the following products?
chloride, which of the following is formed? a) o-chlorophenol
a) benzene b) o-chlorophenol
b) chlorobenzene c) phenol
c) phenol d) no reaction
d) aniline View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Answer: c Explanation: Chlorobenzene does not undergo hydrolysis
Explanation: Upon warming with water, these diazonium under normal conditions. However, it undergoes
salts finally hydrolyze to phenols. hydrolysis when heated in an aqueous sodium hydroxide
solution at a temperature of 623 K and a pressure of 300
atm to form phenol.

5. What will be the product ‘a’ for the given reaction?

2. Sodium benzene sulphonate reacts with NaOH and then

on acidic hydrolysis, it gives which of the following
compound?
a) Phenol
b) Benzoic acid a)
c) Benzene
d) Disodium benzaldehyde
View Answer b)

Answer: a
Explanation: Sodium benzene sulphonate reacts with
c)
NaOH and then on acidic hydrolysis, phenol.

d)
View Answer

3. What is the commercial method of preparation of Answer: c

phenol? Explanation: When ethers are treated with strong acid in
a) Dows process the presence of a nucleophile, they can be cleaved to give
b) From diazonium salt
c) By decarboxylation of salicylic acid
alcohols and alkyl halides. c) X is Oleum and y is NH3
d) X is Oleum and y is water
View Answer

Answer: a
6. What is the reagent which will react with cumene to Explanation: Benzenesulphonic acid can be obtained from
give phenol? benzene by reacting it with oleum. Benzenesulphonic acid
a) Oxygen thus formed is treated with molten sodium hydroxide at
b) Hydrogen high temperature which leads to the formation of sodium
c) Nitrogen phenoxide. Finally, sodium phenoxide on acidification
d) Ozone gives phenols.
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Upon oxidation of cumene
(isopropylbenzene) in presence of air (oxygen), cumene
hydroperoxide is obtained. Upon further treatment of 9. Which of the following is not a method for preparation
cumene hydroperoxide with dilute acid phenols are of phenol?
obtained. a) Dows process
b) From diazonium salt
c) By decarboxylation of salicylic acid
d) By the decarboxylation of sodium benzoate
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The decarboxylation of sodium benzoate is
not the method of preparation of phenol, this method is
7. What will be the product ‘a’ in the given reation? used for the preparation of benezene.

10. Phenol is obtained by heating aqueous solution of

which of the following?
a) Aniline
b) Benzene diazonium chloride
a) Enolate form c) Benzoic acid
b) Benzene diazonium chloride d) Benzyl alcohol
c) Benzene View Answer
d) Chlorobenzene
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: Upon warming with water, these diazonium
Answer: b salts finally hydrolyze to phenols.
Explanation: When an aromatic primary amine is treated
with nitrous (NaNO2 + HCl) acid at 273 – 278 K, diazonium
salts are obtained. Upon warming with water, these
diazonium salts finally hydrolyze to phenols.

8. What is the reactant ‘x’ and ‘y’ that will react with
benzene to give phenol?
a) X is Oleum and y is molten sodium hydroxide followed
by H+
b) X is Oleum and y is HCl
REACTIONS OF PHENOLS 4. Phenol reacts with bromine in carbon disulphate at low
temperature to give which of the following product?
1. Phenolphthalein is obtained by heating phenol with a) m-bromophenol
conc. H2SO4 and which of the following reactant? b) o-and p-bromophenol
a) Benzyl alcohol c) p-bromophenol
b) Benzene d) 2,4,6-tribromophenol
c) Benzoic acid View Answer
d) Phthalic anhydride
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: Phenol reacts with bromine in carbon
Answer: d disulphate at low temperature to give o-and p-
Explanation: Phenolphthalein is obtained by heating bromophenol.
phenol with conc. H2SO4 and phthalic anhydride, as shown
in the given reaction.

5. Bromine reacts with phenol and decolorize orange color

and turns it to which of the colored precipitate?
2. Salicylaldehyde can be prepared from which of the a) white precipitate
following reactants? b) pink precipitate
a) Phenol and chloroform c) blue precipitate
b) Phenol, chloroform and sodium hydroxide d) black precipitate
c) Phenol, carbon tetrachloride and NaOH View Answer
d) Phenol, carbon tetrachloride
View Answer Answer: a
Explanation: Bromine reacts with phenol and decolorize
Answer: b orange color and turns it to white precipitate of
Explanation: Salicylaldehyde is prepared from phenol and brominated phenol.
chloroform by heating with sodium hydroxide or
potassium hydroxide in a Reimer–Tiemann reaction. 6. Which of the following regents may be used to
distinguish between phenol and benzoic acid?
3. When phenol is treated with excess of bromine water, it a) Aqueous NaOH
gives which of the following product? b) Tollen’s reagent
a) m-bromophenol c) Molisch reagent
b) o-and p-bromophenol d) Neutral FeCl3
c) 2,4-dibromophenol View Answer
d) 2,4,6-tribromophenol
View Answer Answer: d
Explanation: Neutral FeCl3 test regents may be used to
Answer: d distinguish between phenol and benzoic acid as Phenol
Explanation: In phenol, the hydroxyl group serves to will give violet coloration but benzoic acid will not give
greatly activate the benzene ring, significantly increasing coloration with neutral FeCl3.
its reactivity, hence susceptibility to substitution. The
reaction occurs at room temp and even goes to maximum 7. What is the major product obtained on interaction of
substitution of the 3 possible locations (2,4,6). result is phenol with sodium hydroxide and carbon dioxide?
2,4,6-tribromophenol which is a white ppt. a) Benzoic acid
b) Salicyladehyde
c) Salicylic acid around makes the ion more stable than it would be if all
d) Phthalic acid the charge remained on the oxygen.
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Reacting the nucleophilic phenolate salt with PREPARATION OF ETHERS
carbon dioxide under high pressure / temperature results 1. Chloroethane reacts with X to form diethyl ether. What
in regioselective ortho-substitution. This process is also
is X?
known as the Kolbe-Schmitt synthesis. o-hydroxybenzoic a) NaOH
acid is more commonly known as salicylic acid.
b) H2SO4
8. Picric acid is formed when phenol react with which of c) C2H5ONa
the following reactant? d) Na2S2O3
a) Formaldehyde View Answer
b) Hydrogen
Answer: c
c) Nitric acid Explanation: The reaction of sodium ethoxide with
d) Hydrochloric acid
chloroethane to form diethyl ether and sodium chloride:
View Answer [Na]+[C2H5O]– + C2H5Cl → C2H5OC2H5 + [Na]+[Cl]–
Answer: c
2. The reaction given below is known as by which o the
Explanation: Nowadays picric acid is prepared by treating
following reaction?
phenol first with concentrated sulfuric acid which converts
C2H5ONa+IC2H5→C2H5OC2H5+NaI
it to phenol-2,4-disulfuric acid and then with concentrated a) Kolbe’s synthesis
nitric acid to get 2,4,6-trinitrophenol. b) Wurtz’s synthesis
9. Bakelite is formed when phenol react with which of the c) Williamson’s synthesis
following reactant? d) Grignard’s synthesis
a) Formaldehyde View Answer
b) Hydrogen
Answer: c
c) Nitric acid
Explanation: Williamson Ether Reactions involve an
d) Sulphuric acid alkoxide that reacts with a primary haloalkane or a
View Answer sulfonate ester. Alkoxides consist of the conjugate base of
Answer: a an alcohol and are comprised of an R group bonded to an
Explanation: Bakelite is a thermosetting polymer which is oxygen atom. They are often written as RO–, where R is
made by reaction between phenol and HCHO. the organic substituent.

10. Phenol undergoes ionization to become more stable by 3. The Williamson ether synthesis produces ethers by
reacting with which of the following chemical species? reacting which of the following?
a) negative ions a) alcohol with a metal
b) positive ions b) alkoxide with a metal
c) radicals c) alkoxide with an alkyl halide
d) neutral atoms d) alkyl halide with an aldehyde
View Answer View Answer

Answer: a Answer: c
Explanation: Phenol undergoes ionization to become more Explanation: It’s a type of reaction we’ve already seen
stable by reacting with negative ions as the negative many times before – an SN2 reaction between a
charge is no longer entirely localised on the oxygen but is deprotonated alcohol *“alkoxide”+ and an alkyl halide that
spread out around the whole ion. Spreading the charge forms an ether.
4. In which case would a Williamson ether synthesis fail? c) HNO3, 413K
a) sodium ethoxide + iodomethane d) HNO3, 443K
b) sodium ethoxide + iodoethane View Answer
c) sodium ethoxide + 2-iodopropane
d) sodium ethoxide + 2-iodo-2-methylpropane Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: In the presence of protic acids (sulphuric
acid), alcohols undergo dehydration to produce alkenes
Answer: d and ethers under different conditions. For example: in the
Explanation: Because alkoxides are strong bases, presence of sulphuric acid, dehydration of ethanol at 443 K
competition with elimination [E2] pathways becomes a yields ethene whereas it yields ethoxyethane at 413 K. This
concern once the alkyl halide becomes more sterically is an ideal method of preparation through primary
hindered. For this reason, trying to perform a Williamson
on a secondary alkyl halide is a bit more problematic than
alcohols.
it is for a primary alkyl halide.
8. Which of the following is the method of preparation of
5. Which of the following reagents should be used to
ether?
prepare tert-butyl ethyl ether?
a) Dows process
a) tert-butyl bromide and sodium ethoxide
b) Williamson synthesis
b) tert-butyl alcohol and ethyl bromide
c) By decarboxylation of salicylic acid
c) tert-butyl alcohol and ethanol
d) Hock method
d) potassium tert-butoxide and ethyl bromide
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: d
Explanation: In this method, an alkyl halide is reacted with
Explanation: When ethyl bromide(CH3CH2Br) is added to
sodium alkoxide which leads to the formation of ether.
potassium tert-butoxide ((CH3)3-O– + K), the product is
The reaction generally follows SN2 mechanism for primary
ethyl tert-butyl ether(CH3)3-O-CH2CH3).
alcohol.
CH3CH2Br + (CH3)3-O– + K → (CH3)3-O-CH2CH3.
9. Williamson synthesis proceed visa which of the
6. Which of the following reagents should be used to following mechanism?
prepare tert-butyl propyl ether? a) SN1
a) 2-methylpropene and 1-propanol b) SN2
b) 2-methylpropene, acetic acid and 1-propanol c) E1
c) 2-methylpropene, H2SO4 and 1-propanol d) E2
d) 1-propyl bromide and tert-butyl alcohol View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: c Explanation: Ethers can be synthesized in standard SN2
Explanation: The dehydration reaction of alcohols to conditions by coupling an alkoxide with a
generate alkene proceeds by heating the alcohols in the haloalkane/sulfonate ester. The alcohol that supplies the
presence of a strong acid, such as sulfuric or phosphoric electron rich alkoxide can be used as the solvent, as well
acid, at high temperatures. If the reaction is not as dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) or hexamethylphosphoric
sufficiently heated, the alcohols do not dehydrate to form triamide (HMPA).
alkenes, but react with one another to form ethers.
10. Which of the following is the commercial method of
7. What will be the reactant and reaction condition formation of ether?
required for the given reaction? a) Dehydration of alcohol
CH3CH2OH +? → C2H5OC2H5 b) Williamson ether synthesis
a) H2SO4, 413K c) Ullmann condensation
b) H2SO4, 443K
d) Preparation of epoxides d) iodoethane and 2-methylpropane
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: c
Explanation: The Williamson reaction is of broad scope, is Explanation: Ether + HX → Alkyl halide + Alcohol, Halide
widely used in both laboratory and industrial synthesis, attacks at less hindered site to produce alkyl halide. So,
and remains the simplest and most popular method of Ethyl isopropyl ether + HI/Heat/Water → Isopropyl alcohol
preparing ethers. Both symmetrical and asymmetrical + Iodoethane.
ethers are easily prepared.
4. What are the products when tert-butyl ethyl ether is
cleaved with concentrated HI?
a) iodoethane and tert-butanol
REACTIONS OF ETHERS b) iodoethane and 2-iodo-2-methylpropane
1. An ether is more volatile than an alcohol having the c) ethanol and 2-iodo-2-methylpropane
d) ethanol and tert-butanol
same molecular formula. What is the reason for this
difference? View Answer
a) dipolar character of ethers Answer: c
b) alcohols having resonance structures Explanation: Ether + HX → Alkyl halide + Alcohol, Halide
c) inter-molecular hydrogen bonding in ethers attacks at less hindered site to produce alkyl halide. Clearly
d) inter-molecular hydrogen bonding in alcohols the SN2 is not in play here, as the tertiary carbons are
View Answer much too hindered for a backside attack. However,
Answer: d tertiary carbocations are relatively stable – and
Explanation: The ether are less volatile than alcohol of “ionization” (i.e. loss of a leaving group) leaves us with an
same molecular mass because in alcohols there is alcohol (R-OH) and a tertiary carbocation, which can then
be attacked by iodide ion to give R-I. Again, if excess HI is
intermolecular H-bonding which makes it less volatile and
High B.P. But in case of ether there is no intermolecular H- present then that alcohol will be converted into an
alcohol. We’ll have more about that to say in a few posts
Bonding which makes it more volatile and less B.P.
actually.
2. Ethers may be used as solvents because they react only
with which of the following reactants? 5. Which pair of products would result from the acid
a) Acids cleavage of phenyl propyl ether with excess concentrated
b) Bases HBr at an elevated temperature?
c) Oxidising agent a) Phenol and 1-propanol
d) Reducing agents b) Bromobenzene and 1-propanol
View Answer c) Bromobenzene and 1-bromopropane
d) Phenol and 1-bromopropane
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: Ethers resist the attack of nucleophiles and
Answer: d
bases. However, they are very good solvents in many
organic reactions due to their ability to solvate cations by Explanation: Ether + HBr —–> Alkyl bromide + Alcohol.
donating the electron pair from oxygen atom. Ethers are Halide attacks at less hindered site to produce alkyl halide.
generally less reactive and react only with acids. Ethyl phenyl ether + HBr/Heat/Water —-> Phenol +
Bromoethane.
3. What are the products when ethyl isopropyl ether is
cleaved with concentrated HI? 6. Select the ether among following that yields methanol
a) ethanol and 2-iodo-2-methylpropane as one of the products on reaction with cold hydroiodic
b) ethanol and 2-methylpropane acid.
a) 1-Methoxybutane
c) iodoethane and isopropyl alcohol
b) 1-Methoxy-2-methylpropane
c) 2-Methoxy-2-methylpropane alcohol. We’ll have more about that to say in a few posts
d) Methoxybenzene actually.
View Answer
9. Which of the following is the name reaction of the given
Answer: c reaction?
Explanation: When one group is methyl and the other alkyl
group is a tertiary group, the halide formed is a tertiary
group, the halide formed is a tertiary halide. It is because
a) Wollf’s rearrangement
the attack by I- takes place at that carbon of alkyl group, b) Favorskii rearrangement
which has a greater electron pushing inductive effect and a
c) Pinacol rearrangement
lower electron density.
d) Claisen rearrangement
7. The boiling point of ethyl alcohol is much higher than View Answer
that of dimethyl ether though
Answer: d
both have the same molecular weight. Why?
Explanation: The Claisen rearrangement is an organic
a) Ether is insoluble in water
reaction where an allyl vinyl ether is converted into an
b) Methyl groups are attached to oxygen in ether
unsaturated carbonyl compound with the input of heat at
c) Dipole moment of ethyl alcohol is less
200-250oC or a Lewis acid. This reaction belongs to a class
d) Ethyl alcohol shows hydrogen bonding
of reactions termed “sigmatropic rearrangements” and it
View Answer
is a concerted process where bonds are forming and
Answer: d breaking at the same time.
Explanation: Alcohols have much higher boiling points
10. Which of the following will be obtained by keeping
than the comparable alkanes or the related ethers
ether in contact with air for a long time?
because molecules of alcohols can interact through
a) C2H5−O−CH (CH3)−O−OH
hydrogen bonding while those of alkanes and ethers
b) C2H5−OCH2−OH
cannot. Thus, Ethanol has a higher boiling point (78℃) c) C2H5−O−C2H5OH
than dimethyl ether (−25℃) though they have the same
d) CH3−O CH (CH3)−O−OH
molecular weight.
View Answer
8. Which pair of products would result from the acid
Answer: a
cleavage of tert-butyl propyl ether with excess
Explanation: When stored in the presence of air or oxygen,
concentrated HBr at an elevated temperature?
ethers tend to form explosive peroxides, such as diethyl
a) tert-butyl bromide and propyl alcohol
ether peroxide. The reaction is accelerated by light, metal
b) tert-butyl bromide and propyl bromide
catalysts, and aldehydes.
c) tert-butyl alcohol and propyl bromide
R−O−R’ + O2/light → C2H5−O−CH(CH3)−O−OH.
d) 2-methyl-2-butene and propyl bromide
View Answer

Answer: b PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF ETHERS

Explanation: Ether + HX → Alkyl halide + Alcohol, Halide
attacks at less hindered site to produce alkyl halide. Clearly 1. Which of the following is distinguish test for ether?
the SN2 is not in play here, as the tertiary carbons are a) Lucas test
much too hindered for a backside attack. However, b) FeCl3 test
tertiary carbocations are relatively stable – and c) Molisch test
“ionization” (i.e. loss of a leaving group) leaves us with an d) Zeisel test
alcohol (R-OH) and a tertiary carbocation, which can then View Answer
be attacked by iodide ion to give R-I. Again, if excess HI is
Answer: d
present then that alcohol will be converted into an
Explanation: The Zeisel determination or Zeisel test is a
chemical test for the presence of esters or ethers in a
chemical substance. In a qualitative test a sample is first cannot. Thus, Ethanol has a higher boiling point (78℃)
reacted with a mixture of acetic acid and hydrogen iodide than dimethyl ether (−25℃) though they have the same
in a test tube. molecular weight.

5. Which of the following has lower boiling point than

dimethyl ether?
2. Which of the following statement is not true about a) Pentane
ethers? b) Propane
a) The lower ethers are highly volatile and flammable c) Tetrahydrofuran
b) Lower ethers also act as anaesthetics d) n-butanol
c) Ethers are not organic solvents View Answer
d) Simple ethers (such as diethyl ether) are tasteless
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: The difference in molecular weight made
Answer: c difference between boiling point here mainly. It would be
Explanation: Because like dissolve like, Diethyl ether is very best to set up a better comparison and then ask the
non-polar compared to water so it will dissolve the non- question. diethyl ether is a chain of 5 atoms in a row. The
polar substances and precipitate the ionic compounds. appropriate alkane to compare it to is pentane, also 5
Since like dissolves like, your barely-polar organic ether is atoms in a row. Ethane only has two carbons (CH3-CH3).
often happy to dissolve your non-polar organic molecules.
6. Which of the following statements about ethers is
3. Why ether is more volatile than an alcohol having the incorrect?
same molecular formula? a) Ethers are flammable
a) dipolar character of ethers b) Ethers form peroxides by free radical oxidation
b) alcohols having resonance structures c) Ethers are widely used as extraction solvents
c) inter-molecular hydrogen bonding in ethers d) An ether oxygen can only be found within an acyclic
d) inter-molecular hydrogen bonding in alcohols carbon chain
View Answer View Answer

Answer: d Answer: d
Explanation: The ether are less volatile than alcohol of Explanation: Although widely used as extraction solvents
same molecular mass because in alcohols there is ethers are highly flammable and readily form peroxides by
intermolecular H-bonding which makes it less volatile and free radical oxidation. An ether oxygen can be present in
High B.P. But in case of ether there is no intermolecular H- an open chain or as part of a cyclic system.
Bonding which makes it more volatile and less B.P.
7. Which of the following product is formed, when ether is
4. Why the boiling point of ethyl alcohol is much higher exposed to air?
than that of dimethyl ether though a) Oxide
both have the same molecular weight? b) Alkanes
a) Ether is insoluble in water c) Alkenes
b) Methyl groups are attached to oxygen in ether d) Peroxide of diethyl ether
c) Dipole moment of ethyl alcohol is less View Answer
d) Ethyl alcohol shows hydrogen bonding
View Answer Answer: d
Explanation: On exposure to air ether form peroxide of
Answer: d diethyl ether, as shown in below reaction.
Explanation: Alcohols have much higher boiling points
than the comparable alkanes or the related ethers
because molecules of alcohols can interact through
8. An organic compound A reacts with sodium metal and
hydrogen bonding while those of alkanes and ethers
forms B. On heating with conc. H2SO4, A gives diethyl
ether. What are A and B? Answer: b
a) C2H5OH and C2H5ONa Explanation: Any of a class of alcohols that have two
b) C3H7OH and CH3ONa hydroxyl groups in each molecule are diols or dihydric
c) CH3OH and CH3ONa alcohol.
d) C4H9OH and C4H9ONa
View Answer 2. Which of the following is not the example of dihydric
alcohol?
Answer: d a) Glycerin
Explanation: When C2H5OH reacts with sodium metal and b) Parahydroxyphenol
forms C2H5ONa and on heating with H2SO4 giver diethyl c) Resorcinol
ether. d) Catechol
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Glycerin is a trihydroxy alcohol i.e. Glycerol, is
a simple polyol compound. It is a colorless, odorless,
9. What is the smell of the diethyl ether?
viscous liquid that is sweet-tasting and non-toxic.
a) Vinegar
b) Sweet smell
c) Rotten egg
d) Fish like smell Structure of glycerin is
View Answer
3. Which of the following is the correct structure of
Answer: b catechol?
Explanation: Diethyl ether has a rather sweet, ethereal
smell. It might have a hint of an alcohol-like odor, very
penetrating.
a)
10. Which of the following Is the correct reason for cyclic
ether are miscible in water?
a) Planer structure b)
b) Larger size
c) Molecular weight
d) Hydrogen bonding
View Answer c)

Answer: d
Explanation: Cyclic ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and 1,4-
d)
dioxane are miscible in water because of the more
View Answer
exposed oxygen atom for hydrogen bonding as compared
to linear aliphatic ethers. Answer: b
Explanation: Catechol is dihydric alcohol, in which hydroxyl
group is attached adjacent to each other in benzene ring.
DIHYDRIC ALCOHOLS
4. Which of the following is the correct structure of
1. How many hydroxyl groups are present in diols? parahydroxyphenol?
a) One
b) Two
c) Three
a)
d) Four
View Answer
 Answer: b
Explanation: Dihydric alcohol have general formula
b) (CH2)n(OH)2, where n = 2,3,4 etc.

7. Which of the following reagent can be used to carry out

this synthesis?

c)

a) Seliwanoff reagent
b) Baeyer’s reagent
d)
c) Barfoed reagent
View Answer
d) Benedict reagent
Answer: c View Answer
Explanation: Parahydroxyphenol is dihydric alcohol, in
which hydroxyl group is attached at 1, 4 positions to each Answer: b
Explanation: Cold dilute alkaline solution of Bayer’s
other in benzene ring.
reagent can be used to carry out this synthesis.
5. Which of the following is the correct structure of
resorcinol?

a)
8. Which type of product is formed when Cold dilute
alkaline solution of Bayer’s reagent reacts with alkene?
a) Syn-diol
b) b) Anti-diol
c) syn- and anti-geometry will not be there in diol
d) Trans diol
View Answer
c)
Answer: a
Explanation: On hydroxylation product is formed when
Cold dilute alkaline solution of Bayer’s reagent reacts with
d) alkene is syn.
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Resorcinol is dihydric alcohol, in which
hydroxyl group is attached at 1, 3 positions to each other
in benzene ring.

6. What is the general formula for dihydric alcohol? 9. What will be the compound A which can be used to
a) (CH2)n(OH)2 where n = 2,3…etc carryout this synthesis of diols?
b) (CH2)n(OH)2 where n = 1,2,4… etc
c) CnH2n+1OH where n = 1, 2 …etc
d) (CH2)n(OH)3 where n = 3, 4, 5 …etc
View Answer
a) RCO2OH
b) RCHO
c) RCOR’ b) Aldehyde & Ketone groups
d) RCOOH c) Hydroxyl groups & Hydrogen groups
View Answer d) Carboxyl groups & Others
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: A peroxy acid can be used to carryout this Answer: a
synthesis as shown in below reaction. Explanation: Carbohydrates are often represented by the
chemical formula Cx(H2O)y, where the numerical values of
x and y range from 3 to 12, and functional groups are
Alcohol & Carboxyl groups.

3. Majority of the monosaccharides found in the human

10. How can we detect the presence of resorcinol in the body are of which type stereoisomer?
solution? a) L-type
a) Ceric ammonium nitrate test b) D-type
b) Lucas test c) neutral
c) Phthalic acid test d) racemic mixture
d) Remini’s test View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: c Explanation: Majority of the monosaccharides found in the
Explanation: Phthalic acid test:The anhydrides of aromatic human body are of D-type stereoisomer. The D-isomer of
1,2-dicarboxylic acids on heating with resorcinol gives a glucose predominates in nature and it is for this reason
dye fluorescein. This dye in NaOH solution gives a that the enzymes in our body have adapted to binding this
yellowish red solution with green fluorescence. form only.

4. Which is the simplest carbohydrate?

a) Dihydroxy acetone
CARBOHYDRATES b) Glycerldehyde
c) Glucose
1. Which Biomolecules simply refers as “Staff of life” in the
d) Gulose
given macromolecules?
View Answer
a) Protein
b) Lipids Answer: b
c) Carbohydrate Explanation: Glyceraldehyde (glyceral) is a triose
d) Vitamins monosaccharide with chemical formula C3H6O3. It is the
View Answer simplest of all common aldoses.

Answer: c 5. Which of the following is the examples of Epimers?

Explanation: Carbohydrates belong to a group of complex a) Glucose & Galactose
biomolecules commonly regarded as the “staff of life.” b) Glucose & Ribose
They are the most abundant organic compounds in living c) Mannose & Glucose
organisms and are among the four major classes of d) fructose and glucose
biomolecules. During photosynthesis, carbohydrates are View Answer
produced from the reaction of carbon dioxide with water.
Carbohydrates go by several common names, including Answer: a
sugars, starches, saccharides, and polysaccharides. Explanation: In stereochemistry, an epimer is one of a pair
of stereoisomers. The two isomers differ in configuration
2. In carbohydrates which are the main functional groups at only one stereogenic center. All other stereocenters in
are present? the molecules. The sugars glucose and galactose are
a) Alcohol & Carboxyl groups epimers. In glucose, the -OH group on the first carbon is in
the axial position, the direction opposite the -OH group on Dextrin Function. Dextrin is a source of energy; it contains
carbon C-4. In galactose, the -OH group is oriented in the 3.8-4.1 Calories per gram. Dextrin is not an essential
same direction, the equatorial position. nutrient, so you do not need to get it from food to be
healthy.
6. Which of the following is true about Turanose?
a) Reducing disaccharides of glucose and fructose 10. Which of the following will not be reactive towards
b) Non-reducing disaccharide seliwanoff reagent?
c) 7-methyl sugar a) Maltose
d) a deoxy sugar b) Inulin
View Answer c) Fructose
d) Sucrose
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: Turanose educing sugar (3-O-α-D-glucosyl-D-
fructose), an isomer of sucrose, naturally exists in honey. Answer: a
Explanation: Maltose is an aldose sugar and only ketoses
7. Which of the following is not a disaccharide? give a positive Seliwanoof’s test. Sucrose, Inulin and
a) Sucrose fructose contain a ketose, and maltose does not. Only
b) Maltose Therefore, sucrose, Inulin and fructose will give a positive
c) Lactose Seliwanoof’s test, but maltose will not.
d) Galactose
View Answer

Answer: d PREPARTIONS OF GLYCOLS

Explanation: Sucrose, maltose and lactose are disaccharide
and galactose is a monosaccaride. 1. Which of the following reagent can be used to carry out
this synthesis of glycol?
8. Which sugars are present in Sucrose?
a) Fructose and glucose
b) Glucose and glucose
c) Glucose and galatose
a) Benedict reagent
d) Fructose and galatose
b) Baeyer’s reagent
View Answer
c) Barfoed reagent
Answer: a d) Seliwanoff reagent
Explanation: Sucrose is commonly known as table sugar View Answer
and is obtained from sugar cane or sugar beets contain
Answer: b
fructose and glucose as monomers.
Explanation: Cold dilute alkaline solution of Bayer’s
9. Which of the following carbohydrate do not have any reagent can be used to carry out this synthesis of glycol.
essential nutritional value?
a) Sucrose
b) Cellulose
c) Dextrin
d) Glycogen
2. Which of the following is the industrial method of
View Answer
formation of glycol?
Answer: c a) Hydroxylation of alkene by Bayer’s reagent
Explanation: Dextrins are a group of low-molecular-weight b) From 1,2-dibromoethane
carbohydrates produced by the hydrolysis of starch or c) Oxidation of ethylene and using Ag as catalyst
glycogen. Dextrins are mixtures of polymers of D-glucose d) Ethylene treatment with HOCl
units linked by α-(1→4) or α-(1→6) glycosidic bonds. View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: In the industrial preparation of ethylene
glycol, ethylene (IUPAC name: ethene) is oxidized to
ethylene oxide (IUPAC name: oxirane) using oxygen and a
silver catalyst. Ethylene oxide is then reacted with water at a) RCOR’
high temperature or in the presence of an acid catalyst to b) RCO2OH
produce ethylene glycol. Diethylene glycol is a useful by- c) RCHO
product of this process. d) RCOOH
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: A peroxy acid can be used to carry out this
3. Which type of product is formed when Cold dilute synthesis of glycol as shown in below reaction.
alkaline solution of Bayer’s reagent reacts with alkene?
a) Syn-glyol
b) Syn- and anti-geometry will not be there in glycol
c) Anti-glyol
d) Trans glycol
6. What will be the catalyst A which can be used to carry
View Answer
out this synthesis of glycol?
Answer: a
Explanation: On hydroxylation product is formed when
Cold dilute alkaline solution of Bayer’s reagent reacts with

a) Catalyst Cu, 200 – 400℃

b) Catalyst Pt, 100 – 200℃
c) Catalyst Ni, 200 – 400℃
alkene is syn-glycol. d) Catalyst Ag, 200 – 400℃
View Answer
4. Which of the following statement is not true about
preparation of alcohol? Answer: d
a) French chemist Charles-Adolphe Wurtz (1817–1884) Explanation: Catalyst Ag at 200 – 400℃ can be used to
first prepared ethylene glycol in 1856 carry out this synthesis of glycol as shown in below
b) First synthesis of glycol was from “ethylene iodide” reaction.
(C2H4I2) with silver acetate and then hydrolyzed the
resultant “ethylene diacetate” with potassium hydroxide
c) It was synthesized from ethylene dichloride in Germany
and used as a substitute for glycerol in the explosives
industry 7. What will be the product A and B for the given reaction?
d) There is no biological process for the synthesis of glycol
View Answer

Answer: d a) ethane, glycol

Explanation: Glycol can be synthesised biologically, b) glycol, ethylene chlorohydrine
example: The caterpillar of the Greater wax moth, Galleria c) Ethylene chlorohydrine, glycol
mellonella, has gut bacteria with the ability to degrade d) ethan-1-ol, Glycol
polyethylene (PE) into ethylene glycol. View Answer

5. What will be the compound A which can be used to Answer: c

carry out this synthesis of glycol? Explanation: The product A and B for the given reaction
are Ethylene chlorohydrine and glycol respectively. carbonate. Ethylene glycol is produced from carbon
monoxide in countries with large coal reserves and less
stringent environmental regulations. Dimethyl oxalate can
be converted into ethylene glycol in high yields (94.7%) by
hydrogenation with a copper catalyst.

8. Which compound is used with 1,2- dibromoethane for

the formation of glycol?
a) Na2CO3 REACTIONS OF GLYCOLS
b) NaHCO3
1. Which catalyst is used for reaction of ethylene glycol
c) NaOH
with acetic acid?
d) CH3COONa
a) Amberlyst 36
View Answer
b) Hydrogen peroxide
Answer: a c) Potassium permanganate
Explanation: Na2CO3 compound is used with 1,2- d) Aluminium bromide
dibromoethane for the formation of glycol, as shown in View Answer
given reaction.
Answer: a
Explanation: Esterification of ethylene glycol with acetic
acid to ethylene glycol monoacetate and ethylene glycol
diacetate using the acidic ion-exchange resin Amberlyst 36
as catalyst were investigated.
9. Which of the following is the most convenient and
inexpensive method of formation of glycol? 2. What is the principle product of the acid catalysed
a) Hydroxylation of alkene by Bayer’s reagent reaction of acetone and ethylene glycol?
b) From 1,2-dibromoethane
c) Oxidation of ethylene and using Ag as catalyst a)
d) Ethylene treatment with HOCl
View Answer b)
Answer: a
Explanation: The most convenient and inexpensive c)
method of preparing a glycol in the laboratory is to react
an alkene with cold dilute potassium permanganate,
d)
KMnO4. Yields from this reaction are often poor and better
View Answer
yields are obtained using osmium tetroxide, OsO4.
However, this reagent has the disadvantages of being Answer: b
expensive and toxic. Explanation: According to the given reaction between
acetone and glycol, we can show that cyclic ketal is the
10. Which of the following is not a method of preparation
product.
of glycol?
a) Shell’s omega method
b) From carbon monoxide
c) From Dimethyl oxalate
d) From nitrogen
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: In the OMEGA process, the ethylene oxide is
first converted with carbon dioxide (CO2) to ethylene
3. What will be the product when ethylene glycol and d) Six membered cyclic ring
terephthalic acid reacts? View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Lead tetraacetate is used cleave a carbon-
a) carbon bond in a glycol and involves a favourable five
membered cyclic intermediate, as shown in given reaction.

b)

c) 6. What is the name of the reaction when lead

tetraacetate is used cleave a carbon-carbon bond in a
glycol?
a) Criegee oxidation
d) b) Swern oxidation
View Answer c) Baeyer-Villiger Oxidation
d) Jones oxidation
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: Chemical Reaction between ethylene glycol
and terephthalic acid yields BHET. Answer: a
Explanation: The oxidation of 1,2‐diols (or glycols) to
aldehydes or ketones with lead tetraacetate [Pb(OAc)4,
LTA+ via the cleavage of C‐C bond between the
hydroxyl‐carrying carbon atoms is generally known as
Criegee Glycol oxidation. This reaction has been reported
to occur only in anhydrous organic solvent.
4. What happens when glycol reacts with lead
7. Which of the following statement is not true about
tetraacetate?
criegee oxidation?
a) No reaction a) The oxidative cleavage of an alpha,beta-diol using lead
b) Ketones will be formed tetraacetate to give the corresponding carbonyl
c) Aldehyde will not be formed compounds
d) Monohydric alcohols will be formed b) It is analogous but milder than the Malaprade reaction
View Answer
c) This oxidation was discovered by Rudolf Criegee and
Answer: b coworkers and first reported in 1931
Explanation: Lead tetraacetate is used cleave a carbon- d) Rate of reaction do not depend upon stereochemistry of
carbon bond in a glycol. This reaction is useful in the glycol
formation of ketones and aldehydes and involves a View Answer
favourable five membered cyclic intermediate. Answer: d
5. What is the intermediate form in the mechanism of the Explanation: The rate of the reaction is highly dependent
lead acetate and glycol? on the conformation of the diols, so much so that diols
a) Three membered cyclic ring that are cis on certain rings can be reacted selectively as
b) Four membered cyclic ring opposed to those that are trans on them.
c) Five membered cyclic ring 8. Criegee oxidation of glycol should be performed in
which type of medium?
a) Hydrous d) sucrose
b) Anhydrous View Answer
c) Acidic
d) Basic Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: Heating fats(triglyceride) will leads to
formation of glycerol along with formation of
Answer: b corresponding acid.
Explanation: It was heavily stressed by Criegee that the
reaction must be run in anhydrous solvents, as any water 2. What is the name of the process of formation of glycerol
present would hydrolyze the lead tetraacetate; however, via formation of allyl chloride?
subsequent publications have shown that if the oxidation a) Epichlorohydrine
is faster than the rate of hydrolysis, the cleavage can be b) Acrolein
run in wet solvents or even aqueous solutions. c) Propylene oxide
d) Chloroform process
9. What happens when glycol reacts with periodic acid? View Answer
a) No reaction
b) Ketones will be formed Answer: a
c) Aldehyde will not be formed Explanation: The epichlorohydrin process is the most
d) Monohydric alcohols will be formed important; it involves the chlorination of propylene to give
View Answer allyl chloride, which is oxidized with hypochlorite to
dichlorohydrins, which reacts with a strong base to give
Answer: b epichlorohydrin. This epichlorohydrin is then hydrolyzed to
Explanation: Oxidation with Periodic Acid is used to cleave give glycerol.
vicinal diols (a total of two alcohols, one on two adjacent
carbons) into two carbonyl molecules. 3. Fatty acids and glycerol (C3H8O3) are produced after
hydrolysis of which of the following?
10. Ethylene glycol on treatment with phosphorus tri- a) amino acids
iodide yields b) fats
a) ethyl iodide c) starch
b) ethylene di-iodide d) cellulose
c) ethylene View Answer
d) ethane
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: On hydrolysis in presence of an alkali, the tri
Answer: b esters yield glycerol and the fall of the carboxylic acids.
Explanation: Phosphorus triiodide (PI3) is an unstable red
solid which reacts violently with water. It is a common 4. What is the middle product ‘A’ in the formation of the
misconception that PI3 is too unstable to be stored; it is, in glycerol by propylene?
fact, commercially available. It is widely used in organic
chemistry for converting alcohols to alkyl iodides.

a) Allyl chloride
PREPARATIONS OF GLYCEROL b) Vinyl chloride
c) Acyl chloride
1. Glycerol can be formed through digestion of which of d) Dichloroalkane
the following? View Answer
a) galactose
b) fats Answer: a
c) glucose Explanation: The epichlorohydrin process is the most
important; it involves the chlorination of propylene to give
allyl chloride, which is oxidized with hypochlorite to Answer: c
dichlorohydrins, which reacts with a strong base to give Explanation: Because of the large-scale production of
epichlorohydrin. This epichlorohydrin is then hydrolyzed to biodiesel from fats, where glycerol is a waste product, the
give glycerol. market for glycerol is depressed. Thus, synthetic processes
are not economical. Owing to oversupply, efforts are being
made to convert glycerol to synthetic precursors, such as
acrolein.
5. What is the product A formed by the partial oxidation
8. Which of the following is not the step for the isolation of
using metal oxides and air of propylene or the given
glycerine form spent lye?
preparation of the glycerol?
a) Brine Solution Preparation
b) Saponification and salting
c) Zone distillation
a) Propene
d) Glycerin Recovery from Spent Soap Lye
b) Acroline
View Answer
c) Propylene oxide
d) Propanol Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: Here zone distillation is not possible as
constituents are in liquid phase. Glycerol is a high boiling
Answer: b
liquid with boiling point 290℃. Here distillation will be
Explanation: Processes from propylene include the
done under high pressure at different temperature.
synthesis of glycerol from acrolein by partial oxidation of
propylene. Acrolein further form propen-3-ol and then 9. What will be the product X in the formation of glycerol?
hydrolyzed to give glycerol.

6. What is the product A formed by the partial oxidation

using tert- butyl hydroperoxides or hydrogen peroxide of
propylene or the given preparation of the glycerol?

a) R-ONa
b) RCOH
a) Propene
c) RCOONa
b) Acroline
d) R-ONa and RCOONa both can be formed
c) Propylene oxide
View Answer
d) Propanol
View Answer Answer: c
Explanation: On hydrolysis in presence of an alkali, the tri
Answer: c
esters yield glycerol and the fall of the carboxylic acids.
Explanation: Processes from propylene include the
synthesis of glycerol from propylene oxide is from
oxidation by H2O2 or tert- butyl hydroperoxides of
propylene. Propylene oxide further form propen-3-ol and
then hydrolyzed to give glycerol.

7. Why synthetic production of glycerol is not

commercially successful? 10. What will be the reagent and conditions required for
a) Because process is expensive the given reaction of preparation of glycerol form propene
b) Because no marketing demands from given conditions respectively?
c) Because process is hazardous
d) Because of the large-scale production of biodiesel from
fats
View Answer
a) NBS, NaOH/OH–, OsO4 d) Formaldehyde and formic acid
b) NaOH/OH–, NBS, alk. MnO4– View Answer
c) alk. MnO4–, NaOH/OH–, NBS
d) NBS, NaOH/OH–, OsO4 Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: Lead tetraacetate, like periodic acid, will
oxidize polyhydric alcohols with adjacent hydroxyl groups.
Answer: a Two moles of formaldehyde and one mole of formic acid
Explanation: Firstly, propene will be brominated by N- are formed from one mole of glycerol.
bromo succinimide (NBS), then substitution reaction will
take place by OH– via SN2 mechanism and finally then 4. What will be product of the following reaction?
addition of hydoxy group on propen-3-ol by OsO4or
alkaline KMnO4, will take place to give glycerol.

REACTIONS OF GLYCEROL a) Glycolic acids

b) Glyceric acid
1. What will be the product for the reaction of catalytic c) Formic acid
hydrogenation of glycerol? d) Formaldehyde
a) Glycerol carbonate View Answer
b) Epichlorohydrine
c) Propylene glycol Answer: c
d) Ethylene glycol Explanation: When glycerol is distilled with hydrogen
View Answer peroxide which is added intermittently, it is quantitatively
converted into formic acid while glyceric and glycolic acids
Answer: c are formed as intermediate products.
Explanation: Glycerol is easily reduced to propylene glycol
(1,2- dihydroxypropane) with hydrogen at pressures from 5. What will be the product for the following reaction?
10 to 100 atmospheres and temperatures above 150° C.
Many catalysts may be used, e.g. Ni, Fe, Pt, Au, Hg, copper
chromite or tungstic acid.

2. What will be the product for when glycerol is heated

with hydriodic acid? a) Glycolic acids
a) Glycerol carbonate b) Glyceric acid
b) Epichlorohydrine c) Formic acid
c) Ethylene glycol d) Formaldehyde
d) Isopropyl iodide View Answer
View Answer
Answer: d
Answer: d Explanation: Glycerol oxidized by hydrogen peroxide in a
Explanation: Glycerol heated to 135 to 140℃ with an strongly alkaline solution results in the formation of
excess of hydriodic acid is reduced to isopropyl iodide. This formaldehyde and the production of hydrogen, but neither
reaction is the basis of the Zeisel-Fanto analytical method is formed when the oxidation takes place in a less alkaline
for determining glycerol. medium.

3. What will be product of the reaction if lead tetraacetate 6. What will happen when glycerol is added into bromine
and glycerol will react? water and sodium carbonate?
a) Glycerol carbonate a) Glycerol carbonate
b) Ethylene glycol b) Dihydroxyacetone
c) Formic acid c) Ethylene glycol
d) Isopropyl iodide pyridine, triethylamine or quinoline.
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Dihydroxyacetone results from the oxidation
of glycerol with bromine and sodium carbonate and by the
oxidation of lead glyceroxide with bromine vapors. 9. What will happen when glycerol is added into
dimethyloxalate?
7. What will happen when glycerol is added into dimethyl
a) Glycerol carbonate
carbonate?
b) Dihydroxyacetone
c) Glycerol formate
d) Glycerol oxalate
View Answer

Answer: d
a) Glycerol carbonate Explanation: Glycerol reacts with methyl oxalate to
b) Dihydroxyacetone produce glycerol oxalate, which decomposes at 220-225℃
c) Glycerol formate to form ally1 alcohol, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide
d) Isopropyl iodide and an oil.
View Answer
10. What will happen when glycerol is added into acid?
Answer: a a) Esterification
Explanation: Glycerol carbonate prepared by heating such b) Alcoholysis
esters as dimethyl carbonate with glycerol, or reacting c) Transesterification
glycerol with phosgene in the presence of organic bases d) No reaction will occur
such as pyridine, triethylamine or quinoline. View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: When glycerol is added into acid
esterification will occurs, as shown in given reaction.
C3 H5 (OH)3+RCOOH → C3 H5 (OH)2 OOCR+ H2O
Glycerol Acid Ester Water
8. What will happen when glycerol is added into dimethyl
carbonate?

PREPARATION OF ALDEHYDES

1. Primary alcohol is gently heated to produce aldehyde in

presence of acidified solution of which of the following
compound?
a) Glycerol carbonate
a) hydroxide
b) Dihydroxyacetone
b) dichromate
c) Glycerol formate
c) ethanol
d) Isopropyl iodide
d) ethanal
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b
Explanation: Glycerol carbonate prepared by heating such
Explanation: The oxidizing agent used in these reactions is
esters as urea with glycerol, or reacting glycerol with
normally a solution of sodium or potassium dichromate(VI)
phosgene in the presence of organic bases such as
acidified with dilute sulfuric acid. If oxidation occurs, then
the orange solution containing the dichromate(VI) ions is 5. On heating calcium acetate and calcium formate, the
reduced to a green solution containing chromium(III) ions. product formed is which of the following?
a) CH3COCH3
2. In the given reaction, what will be the product P? b) CH3CHO
c) HCHO+CaCO3
d) CH3CHO+CaCO3
View Answer
a) RCH2OH
Answer: d
b) RCOOH
Explanation: Calcium acetate and calcium formate
c) RCHO
decomposes on heating to form aldehyde and calcium
d) RCH3
carbonate.
View Answer
6. In the Rosenmund’s reduction, BaSO4 taken with
Answer: c
catalyst Pd acts as which of the following?
Explanation: The catalytic hydrogenation of acid chlorides
a) Promotor
allows the formation of aldehydes, is known as
b) Catalytic poison
Rosenmund reaction.
c) Cooperator
3. What is the name of the given reaction of preparation of d) Absorber
aldehyde? View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The Pd catalyst must be poisoned, for
a) Reimer-Tiemann reaction example with BaSO4, because the untreated catalyst is too
b) Cannizzaro reaction reactive and will give some overreduction. Some of the
c) Rosenmund reaction side products can be avoided if the reaction is conducted
d) Reformatsky reaction in strictly anhydrous solvents.
View Answer
7. Catalyst SnCl2/HCl is used in which of the following
Answer: c method of synthesis of aldehyde?
Explanation: The catalytic hydrogenation of acid chlorides a) Stephen’s reduction
allows the formation of aldehydes, is known as b) Cannizzaro reaction
Rosenmund reaction. c) Clemmensen’s reduction
d) Rosenmund’s reduction
4. Which Catalyst is used in Rosenmund reduction?
View Answer
a) Pd / BaSO4
b) Zn-Hg couple Answer: a
c) LiAlH4 Explanation: Stephen aldehyde synthesis reaction involves
d) Ni/H2 the preparation of aldehydes (R-CHO) from nitriles (R-CN)
View Answer using tin(II) chloride (SnCl2), hydrochloric acid (HCl) and
quenching the resulting iminium salt ([R-CH=NH2]+Cl−) with
Answer: a
water (H2O).
Explanation: The catalytic hydrogenation of acid chlorides
allows the formation of aldehydes, is known as 8. What is the product X in the following reaction?
Rosenmund reaction. The Pd catalyst must be poisoned,
for example with BaSO4, because the untreated catalyst is
too reactive and will give some overreduction. Some of the a) C6H5CH3
side products can be avoided if the reaction is conducted b) C6H5CH2Cl
in strictly anhydrous solvents. c) C6H5CHO
d) C6H5COOH
View Answer
Answer: c d) Ethanol
Explanation: Aldehyde will be formed when benzene is View Answer
reacted with HCl and carbon monoxide in presence of
anhydrous aluminium chloride. Answer: c
Explanation: Alkyne will be converted into aldehyde and
9. Which of the following gases when passed through oxidation with Grignard reagent will for alcohol and then
warm dilute solution of H2SO4 in presence of HgSO4 gives acetone will be formed.
acetaldehyde?
a) CH4
b) C2H6
c) C2H4
d) C2H2
View Answer 2. Acetophenone is prepared from which reaction?
a) Rosenmund reaction
Answer: d
b) Sandmayer reaction
Explanation: C2H2 gas when passed through warm dilute
c) Wurtz reaction
solution of H2SO4 in presence of HgSO4 gives acetaldehyde.
d) Friedel craft reaction
10. O3 reacts with CH2=CH2 to form ozonide. On hydrolysis View Answer
it forms which of the following?
Answer: d
a) Ethylene oxide
Explanation: Acetophenone is prepared from Friedel craft
b) HCHO
reaction, in the presence of acetyl chloride, as shown
c) Ethylene glycol
below.
d) Ethyl alcohol
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: O3 reacts with CH2=CH2 to form ozonide. On
hydrolysis it forms HCHO. Ozone gas is passed into a
solution of the alkene in some inert solvent like carbon 3. Compound which gives acetone on ozonolysis is?
tetrachloride; evaporation of the solvent leaves the a) CH3−CH=CH−CH3
ozonide as a viscous oil. This unstable, explosive b) (CH3)2C=C(CH3)2
compound is not purified, but is treated directly with c) C6H5CH=CH2
water, generally in the presence of a reducing agent. If d) CH3CH=CH2
oxidsing reagent is used, aldehyde if oxidisable can further View Answer
oxidise into carboxylic acid which is not the case with
reducing agents. Answer: b
Explanation: Alkenes can be oxidized with ozone to form
ketones.

PREPARATION OF KETONES

1. What is the end product in the following sequence of 4. Which one of the following compounds is prepared in
reaction? the laboratory from benzene by a substitution reaction?
a) Glyoxal
b) Cyclohexane
a) Acetic acid c) Acetophenone
b) Isopropyl alcohol d) Hexabromo cyclohexane
c) Acetone View Answer
Answer: c dehydrogenation of isopropyl alcohol over a heated
Explanation: Acetophenone is prepared in the laboratory copper catalyst.
from benzene by a substitution reaction.
8. Dry heating of calcium acetate gives which of the
following?
a) Acetaldehyde
b) Ethane
c) Acetic acid
d) Acetone
5. Ketones can be prepared in one step from which of the View Answer
following process?
a) Hydrolysis of esters Answer: d
b) Oxidation of primary alcohol Explanation: Dry heating of calcium acetate gives acetone
c) Oxidation of secondary alcohol as shown in below reaction.
d) Reaction of acid halide with alcohols
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Secondary alcohols are oxidized to ketones –
and that’s it. For example, if you heat the secondary 9. Which of the following compound gives a ketone with
alcohol propan-2-ol with sodium or potassium Grignard reagent?
dichromate(VI) solution acidified with dilute sulfuric acid, a) Formaldehyde
propanone is formed. Changing the reaction conditions b) Ethyl alcohol
makes no difference to the product. c) Methyl cyanide
d) Methyl iodide
6. Ketones are prepared by which of the following name
View Answer
reaction?
a) Clemmensen’s reduction Answer: c
b) Cannizzaro reaction Explanation: Methyl cyanide gives a ketone with Grignard
c) Rosenmund’s reduction reagent, as shown in below reaction.
d) Oppenaur’s oxidation
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Oppenauer oxidation, named after Rupert
Viktor Oppenauer, is a gentle method for selectively
oxidizing secondary alcohols to ketones.
10. Propyne on hydrolysis in presence of HCl and
7. Isopropyl alcohol on oxidation gives which of the HgSO4gives which of the following?
following? a) Acetaldehyde
a) Acetone b) Acetone
b) Acetaldehyde c) Formaldehyde
c) Ether d) Acetophenone
d) Ethylene View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: a Explanation: Alkynes react with water in the presence of
Explanation: Isopropyl alcohol can be oxidized to acetone, HgSO4 to give an alcohol with double bond. This alcohol is
which is the corresponding ketone. This can be achieved called as enol (en for double bond and ol for alcohol).
using oxidizing agents such as chromic acid, or by These enols are highly unstable and undergo migration to
give ketone.
Preparation of Benzaldehyde & Aromatic Ketones b) Oxidation of benzyl chloride
c) Oxidation of benzyl alcohol
1. The oxidation of toluene to benzaldehyde by chromyl d) Etard reaction
chloride is called as which of the following? View Answer
a) Cannizzaro reaction
b) Wurtz reaction Answer: c
c) Etard reaction Explanation: This involves the treatment of benzyl alcohol
d) Reimer-Tiemann reaction with dil. HNO3 or acidic potassium dichromate or chromic
View Answer anhydride in acetic anhydride or with copper catalyst at
350o C. This process is used for commercial production of
Answer: c benzaldehyde.
Explanation: The oxidation of toluene to benzaldehyde by
chromyl chloride is called as Etard reaction. 5. Which of the following is the not a method of
preparation of benzaldehyde?
a) Gattermann Koch synthesis
b) Etards reaction
2. Benzaldehyde can be prepared by oxidation of toluene c) Stephan’s reaction
by which of the following reagent?
d) Oxidation of secondary alcohol
a) Acidic KMnO4
View Answer
b) K2Cr2O7
c) CrO2Cl2 Answer: d
d) basic KMnO4 Explanation: Oxidation of secondary ketones is the method
View Answer of formation of ketones not aldehydes.

Answer: c
Explanation: Benzaldehyde can be prepared by oxidation
of toluene by CrO2Cl2.

6. What reagents will be used in the preparation of

benzaldehyde via Gattermann Koch synthesis?
a) Carbon dioxide and HCl
b) Carbon monoxide and HCl
3. The oxidation of benzyl chloride with lead nitrate gives c) Oxygen and H2SO4
which of the following compound? d) Carbon monoxide and H2SO4
a) Benzaldehyde View Answer
b) Benzyl alcohol
c) Benzoic acid Answer: b
d) p-chlorobenzaldehyde Explanation: Benzene is converted into benzaldehyde by
View Answer passing a mixture of carbon monoxide and HCl gas under
high pressure into the ether solution of benzene in
Answer: a presence of anhydrous aluminum chloride and cuprous
Explanation: The oxidation of benzyl chloride with lead chloride.
nitrate gives benzaldehyde as shown in given reaction.
Pb(NO3)2 is a mild oxidizing agent so benzaldehyde is 7. Partial reduction of phenyl cyanide with stannous
formed during the oxidation of benzyl chloride with chloride and passing dry HCl gas in ether solution followed
Pb(NO3)2. by hydrolysis of the aldimine stannic chloride with water
to form benzaldehyde is called as which of the following
4. Which of the following is the commercial method of method of preparation of benzaldehyde?
preparation of benzaldehyde? a) Gattermann Koch synthesis
a) Oxidation of toluene b) Etards reaction
c) Stephan’s reaction Answer: d
d) Gattermann reaction Explanation: Benzaldehyde conveniently prepared by
View Answer boiling benzyl chloride with copper nitrate or lead nitrate
solution in a current of carbon dioxide.
Answer: c
Explanation: Partial reduction of phenyl cyanide with 11. Formation of aromatic ketone forms from benzene by
stannous chloride and passing dry HCl gas in ether solution CH3COCl?
followed by hydrolysis of the aldimine stannic chloride a) Friedal craft alkylation
with water to form benzaldehyde is called as Stephan’s b) Friedal craft dealkylation
reaction. c) Friedal craft acylation
d) Friedal craft hydroxyalkylation
8. Ozonolysis of styrene will lead leads to formation of View Answer
benzaldehyde along which compound?
a) O2 Answer: c
b) H2O2 Explanation: Friedal craft acylation froms aromatic ketone.
c) HCHO A proper choice of acid chloride here gives the desired
d) H2O2 and HCHO ketone. The method works for all types of ketones though
View Answer the bulkier aryl acid chlorides may require stronger /
longer heating.
Answer: c
Explanation: Ozonolysis of styrene will lead leads to 12. What will be the product for the given reaction?
formation of benzaldehyde H2O2 and HCHO. a) Propanone
b) Acetophenone
c) Diphenylmethanone
d) Aliphatic and aromatic
View Answer
9. Which of the following cannot be used in formation of
benzaldehyde by Grignard reagent? Answer: d
a) HCN Explanation: Heating solid calcium salts of benzoic acid
b) Carbon monoxide with those of any other carboxylic acid, except methanoic
c) Ethyl format acid, gives the ketones in low yields.
d) HNC
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Reagents like carbon monoxide or HCN and
13. What will be the product of the given reaction?
ethyl format can be used for formation of benzaldehyde
by Grignard reagent.

a) Propanone
b) Acetophenone
c) Diphenylmethanone
10. What is the laboratory method for the formation of d) Aliphatic and aromatic
benzaldehyde? View Answer
a) Gattermann Koch synthesis
Answer: b
b) Etards reaction
Explanation: Aromatic ketones were efficiently prepared in
c) Stephan’s reaction
good yields by the reactions of aryl bromides with n-BuLi,
d) Oxidation of benzyl chloride
followed by the reactions with aromatic aldehydes or
View Answer
aliphatic aldehydes and the subsequent treatment with conditions, to give arylated derivatives which can be
molecular iodine and K2CO3, in a one-pot method. hydrolysed to aromatic ketones.

14. Which reactant can be used to form aromatic ketone

for the following reaction?
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF ALDEHYDES

1. Aldehydes have which type of smell?

a) Fish like smell
a) Arenes
b) Bitter almond smell
b) Aldehyde
c) Pungent smell
c) Alcohol
d) Rotten egg like smell
d) Terperens
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Answer: a
Explanation: The volatile aldehydes have pungent odors.
Explanation: Aromatic ketones were efficiently prepared in
benzaldehyde have bitter almond type smell. Aldehydes
good yields by the reactions of arenes with n-BuLi,
have Pungent type smell.
followed by the reactions with aromatic aldehydes or
aliphatic aldehydes and the subsequent treatment with 2. What is the name of the process in which aldehyde get
molecular iodine and K2CO3, in a one-pot method. oxidise in presence of air?
a) Calcination
15. Aromatic ketones were synthesized from aromatic
b) Autoxidation
compounds via liquid‐phase oxidation at 60 °C and 1 atm
c) Cannizzaro reaction
over vanadium‐containing which catalyst?
d) Baeyer villiger oxidation
a) MCM-41
View Answer
b) MCM-48
c) ZSM-5 Answer: b
d) ZK-5 Explanation: Autoxidation is oxidation that occurs in open
View Answer air or in presence of oxygen (and sometimes UV radiation)
and forms peroxides and hydroperoxides. It can be
Answer: a
considered to be a slow, flameless combustion of
Explanation: Aromatic ketones were synthesized from
materials by reaction with oxygen. Autoxidation is
aromatic compounds via liquid‐phase oxidation at 60 °C
important because it is a useful reaction for converting
and 1 atm over vanadium‐containing MCM‐41 catalysts
compounds to oxygenated derivatives, and also because it
using a batch reactor. The catalysts were prepared by
occurs in situations where it is not desired.
direct hydrothermal (4V‐MCM‐41) and wet impregnation
(9V/MCM‐41) methods. 3. Which of the following aldehyde shows oligomerization?
a) Acetaldehyde
16. Which of the following cannot be used as reactant in
b) Propanal
preparation of aromatic ketones from diazonium salt?
c) Butanal
a) formaldoxime
d) Benzaldehyde
b) Acetaldoxime
View Answer
c) propionaldoxime
d) Terpernes Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: The two aldehydes of greatest importance in
industry, formaldehyde and acetaldehyde, have
Answer: d
complicated behavior because of their tendency to
Explanation: Diazonium salts react with formaldoxime,
oligomerize or polymerize.
acetaldoxime, propionaldoxime, and acetaldehyde
semicarbazone severally, under carefully controlled
4. What will be the product if we add water to the Answer: b
aldehyde? Explanation: Methanal is a gas (boiling point -21°C), and
a) Alcohols ethanal has a boiling point of +21°C. That means that
b) Epoxides ethanal boils at close to room temperature. The other
c) Geminal diols aldehydes and the ketones are liquids, with boiling points
d) Peroxides rising as the molecules get bigger.
View Answer
8. Which of the following compound has more boiling
Answer: c point than aldehyde?
Explanation: It has been demonstrated that water, in the a) Alcohol
presence of an acid or a base, adds rapidly to the carbonyl b) Alkanes
function of aldehydes and ketones establishing a c) Ketones
reversible equilibrium with a geminal-diol or gem-diol. d) Ether
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The aldehyde (with dipole-dipole attractions
as well as dispersion forces) has a boiling point higher than
5. In Infrared spectroscopy, at what wave number will the similarly sized alkane which only has dispersion forces
band of CO bond of aldehyde will occur? and because of more possibility of Hydrogen Bonding and
a) 1500 cm-1 (resonance after so) thus increasing linkage and weight of
b) 1495 cm-1 molecules making it difficult for boiling off, so aldehyde
c) 1965 cm-1 will have higher boiling point than ether and ketones.
d) 1700 cm-1 However, the aldehyde’s boiling point isn’t as high as the
View Answer alcohol’s. In the alcohol, there is hydrogen bonding as well
as the other two kinds of intermolecular attraction.
Answer: d
Explanation: Using IR spectroscopy, they display a strong 9. Which of the following is the characteristic smell of
CO band of aldehyde will occur near to 1700 cm-1. benzaldehyde?
a) Fish like smell
6. What is the chemical shift of formyl hydrogen in
b) Bitter almond like
aldehyde?
c) Pungent smell
a) 6
d) Rotten egg like smell
b) 7
View Answer
c) 8
d) 9 Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: It is a colorless liquid with a characteristic
almond-like odor. The primary component of bitter
Answer: d
almond oil, benzaldehyde can be extracted from a number
Explanation: In their 1H NMR spectra, the formyl hydrogen
of other natural sources.
center absorbs near δH = 9, which is a distinctive part of
the spectrum. This signal shows the characteristic coupling 10. Which of the following aldehyde is most soluble in
to any protons on the alpha carbon. water?
a) Acetaldehyde
7. Which of the following aldehyde is present as gas?
b) Formaldehyde
a) Acetaldehyde
c) Butyraldehyde
b) Formaldehyde
d) Benzaldehyde
c) Butyraldehyde
View Answer
d) Benzaldehyde
View Answer
Answer: b d) Aldehyde
Explanation: As the carbon chain increases in length, View Answer
solubility in water decreases.
Answer: c
Explanation: Because of their inability to serve both as
hydrogen-bond donors and acceptors, ketones tend not to
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF KETONES “self-associate” and are more volatile than alcohols and
carboxylic acids of comparable molecular weights.
1. Which of the following compound has more boiling
point than ketones? 4. Why ketones are volatile in nature?
a) Alcohol a) Due to molecular weight
b) Alkanes b) Hydrogen bonding
c) Aldehyde c) Neither hydrogen bond donor nor acceptor
d) Ether d) Weak bonding
View Answer View Answer
Answer: a Answer: c
Explanation: Amongst aldehydes and ketones, ketones Explanation: Because of their inability to serve both as
have higher boiling point. This is due to the presence of hydrogen-bond donors and acceptors, ketones tend not to
two electron donating alkyl groups around the group “self-associate” and are more volatile than alcohols and
which makes them more polar. As dipole moment is carboxylic acids of comparable molecular weights.
greater so it is more polar and hence has higher boiling
point. However, the aldehyde’s boiling point isn’t as high 5. Why ketones are used as solvent?
as the alcohol’s. In the alcohol, there is hydrogen bonding a) Due to molecular weight
as well as the other two kinds of intermolecular attraction. b) Hydrogen bonding
c) Neither hydrogen bond donor nor acceptor
2. Which of the following has highest boiling point? d) Weak bonding
a) 2-hexanone View Answer
b) 2-pentanone
c) butanoic acid Answer: c
d) 3-methyl-2-butanone Explanation: Because of their inability to serve both as
View Answer hydrogen-bond donors and acceptors, ketones tend not to
“self-associate” and are more volatile than alcohols and
Answer: d carboxylic acids of comparable molecular weights. These
Explanation: 2-hexanone has a carbon chain length of 6 factors relate to the pervasiveness of ketones as solvents.
whereas 2-pentanone has a carbon chain length of 5. 2-
hexanone therefore has a higher boiling point than 2- 6. Which of the ketones are used in nail paint removers?
pentanone. Therefore, the descending order of all four of a) Cyclopropenone
the provided compounds is butanoic acid, 2-hexanone, 2- b) Isopropyl acetone
pentanone then 3-methyl-2-butanone. It can also be c) butanone
concluded that the boiling point of compounds are d) Methyl ethyl ketone
affected by the strength of the intermolecular forces View Answer
present, the chain length of the carbon backbone of the
compound and the presence of any branching within its Answer: b
structure. Explanation: Isopropyl Acetone is a commonly used
solvent and is the active ingredient in nail polish remover
3. Which of the following is more volatile? and some paint thinners.
a) Carboxylic acid
b) Alcohol 7. Which of the following is the used as solvent in gums,
c) Ketones resins, nitrocellulose?
a) Cyclopropenone
b) Isopropyl acetone CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF ALDEHYDES
c) butanone
d) Methyl ethyl ketone 1. During a reaction of Tollens test, the formation of mirror
View Answer inside the tube is due to which of the following?
a) silver ions
Answer: c b) silver atoms
Explanation: Butanone is an effective and common solvent c) silver compounds
and is used in processes involving gums, resins, cellulose d) silver nitrate
acetate and nitrocellulose coatings and in vinyl films. View Answer

8. Which of the following is also known as model cement? Answer: b

a) Cyclopropenone Explanation: Tollens’ reagent oxidizes an aldehyde into the
b) butanone corresponding carboxylic acid.
c) Isopropyl acetone
d) Methyl ethyl ketone
View Answer

Answer: c The reaction is accompanied by the reduction of silver ions

Explanation: As butanone dissolves polystyrene and many in Tollens’ reagent into metallic silver, which, if the test is
other plastics, it is sold as “model cement” for use in carried out in a clean glass test tube, forms a mirror on the
connecting parts of scale model kits. test tube.

9. Which of the following is a toxic ketone? 2. Reduction of Aldehydes to hydrocarbon take place in
a) butanone the presence of which of the following?
b) Acetone a) Zn amalgam and HCl acid
c) Methyl ethyl ether b) Pd/BaSO4
d) Methyl vinyl ketone c) Anhydrous AlCl3
View Answer d) Ni/Pt
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Although it is difficult to generalize on the Answer: a
toxicity of such a broad class of compounds, simple Explanation: Reduction of Aldehydes to hydrocarbon take
ketones are, in general, not highly toxic. Exceptions to this place in the presence of Zn amalgam and HCl acid, is a
rule are the unsaturated ketones such as methyl vinyl clemmensen reduction.
ketone with LD50 of 7 mg/kg (oral).
3. For C6H5CHO which of the following is incorrect?
10. Which of the following cannot be used for the a) On oxidation it yields benzoic acid
characterisation of ketone by spectroscopy? b) It is used in perfumery
a) 1H NMR c) It is an aromatic aldehyde
b) Infra-red spectrum d) On reduction yields phenol
c) 13C NMR View Answer
d) UV spectroscopy
Answer: d
View Answer
Explanation: On reduction of benzaldehyde it gives
Answer: a
Explanation: Ketones absorb strongly in the infra-red
spectrum near 1700 cm−1. The exact position of the peak
depends on the substituents. Whereas 1H NMR benzyalcohol not phenol.
spectroscopy is generally not useful for establishing the
4. Which of the following compound will undergo self-
presence of a ketone, 13C NMR spectra exhibit signals
aldol condensation in the presence of cold dilute alkali?
somewhat downfield of 200 ppm depending on structure.
a) C6H5CHO Answer: a
b) CH3CH2CHO Explanation: The Grignard reagent adds across the carbon-
c) CH≡C−CHO oxygen double bond:
d) CH2=CH−CHO
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Carbon−carbon bond formation using strong Dilute acid is then added to this to hydrolyse it, an alcohol
and weak anion-exchange resins as green catalysts for self- is formed. One of the key uses of Grignard reagents is the
and cross-aldol condensation of propanal in aqueous ability to make complicated alcohols easily.
media was investigated. The reaction pathway followed
the route of aldol condensation to a β-hydroxy aldehyde
and dehydration to an α,β-unsaturated aldehyde. The
resulting products were further converted to hemi-acetal. 8. To distinguish between formaldehyde and
acetaldehyde, we require which of the following reagent?
5. Which of the following will not undergo aldol
a) Tollen’s reagent
condensation?
b) Fehling’s solution
a) Acetaldehyde
c) Schiff’s reagent
b) Propanaldehyde
d) Caustic soda solution
c) Benzaldehyde
View Answer
d) Trideuteroacetaldehyde
View Answer Answer: d
Explanation: Reaction of formaldehyde is a Cannizzaro
Answer: c
reaction when react with Dil. NaOH and reaction of
Explanation: Deuterium behaves like H and hence
acetaldehyde is aldol condensation reaction when react
trideuteroacetaldehyde also undergoes aldol condensation
with Dil. NaOH.
but benzaldehyde does not since it has no a-hydrogen.

6. Acetaldehyde cannot show which of the following test?

a) Iodoform test
b) Lucas test
c) Benedict’s test 9. If formaldehyde and KOH are heated, then we get which
d) Tollen’s test of the following compound?
View Answer a) Acetylene
b) Methane
Answer: b
c) Methyl alcohol
Explanation: Lucas reagent is a solution of anhydrous
d) Ethyl formate
ZnCl2 & concentrated HCl. This solution is used to classify
View Answer
alcohols of low molecular weight. This reaction is
substitution in which a chloride replaces hydroxyl group. It Answer: c
is to differentiate between Primary, Secondary & tertiary Explanation: Methyl alcohol is formed when formaldehyde
alcohols. and KOH are heated.
ROH + HCl → RCl + H2O

7. What will be the product if aldehyde reacts with NaOH?

a) Benzyl alcohol 10. Acetaldehyde reacts with C2H5MgCl the final product is
b) Benzoic alcohol which of the following?
c) Hydrobenzamide a) An aldehyde
d) Cinnamic acid b) A ketone
View Answer c) A primary alcohol
d) A secondary alcohol D2O undergoes enolisation, deutration (addition of D2O)
View Answer and dehydration (removal of H2O). The repeated
enolisation, deutration and dehydration ultimately gives
Answer: d CD3.COCD3.
Explanation: One of the R groups is hydrogen and the
other CH3 in ethanal. So, the final product has one
CH3group and one hydrogen attached:

A secondary alcohol has two alkyl groups (the same or 3. Acetone reacts with HCN to form a cyanohydrin. It is an
different) attached to the carbon with the -OH group on it. example of which type of reaction?
a) electrophilic addition
b) electrophilic substitution
CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF KETONES c) nucleophilic addition
d) nucleophilic substitution
1. Which of the following reaction is not shown by View Answer
ketones?
a) reaction with HCN Answer: c
b) reaction with NaHSO3 Explanation: In the reaction, Acetone reacts with HCN to
c) reaction with 2,4-Dinitrophenyl hydrazine form a cyanohydrin, dissociated proton from HCN
d) reaction with Fehling solution activates the carbonyl, which facilitates the nucleophilic
View Answer attack of CN.

Answer: d 4. Which of the following has most acidic hydrogen?

Explanation: Fehling’s can be used to distinguish aldehyde a) 3-Hexaone
vs ketone functional groups. The compound to be tested is b) 2,4- Hexanedione
added to the Fehling’s solution and the mixture is heated. c) 2, 3-Hexanedione
Aldehydes are oxidized, giving a positive result, but d) 2, 5-Hexanedione
ketones do not react, unless they are alpha-hydroxy- View Answer
ketones.
Answer: b
2. The enol form of acetone, after treatment with D2O, Explanation: 2, 4-hexanedione (a 1, 3-diketone) has the
gives which of the following product? most acidic hydrogen. This is because the carbanion left
after the removal of H+ is resonance stabilised in this case.

a)

b)

c) 5. Which of the following will fail to react with potassium

dichromate and dilute sulphuric acid?
a) Ethyl alcohol (ethanol)
b) Acetaldehyde (ethanal)
d)
c) Secondary propyl alcohol (2-propanol)
View Answer
d) Acetone (propanone)
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: The enol form of acetone on treatment with
Answer: d Answer: a
Explanation: Acetone oxidise by K2Cr2O7 & conc. H2SO4 into Explanation: The product(s) obtained via oxymercuration
carboxylic acid. It is not oxidised by dilute H2SO4. (HgSO4+H2SO4) of 1-butyne would be what?) of 1-butyne is
butan-2-one.
6. Which of the following reactions give benzophenone?
a) 2C6H6 + CCl4 + AlCl3 + H2O→
b) C6H6 + C6H5COCl + AlCl3→
c) o−CH3C6H4COC6H5 + Heat→
9. Benzophenone does not react with which of the
d) o−HOOC−C6H4−COC6H5 + Cu260oC→
following compound?
View Answer
a) RNH2
Answer: b b) SO3
Explanation: The C6H6 + C6H5COCl + AlCl3→ reaction is a c) NaOH
Friedel craft acylation and the mechanism is as follow, d) Na2CO3
which give benzophenone. View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Except Na2CO3 benzophenone react with rest
of options.

10. The conversion of acetophenone to acetanilide is best

accomplished by using which reaction?
a) Backmann rearrangement
b) Curtius rearrangement
7. Which of the following statements regarding chemical c) Lossen rearrangement
properties of acetophenone are wrong? d) Hofmann rearrangement
I. It is reduced to methyl phenyl carbinol by sodium and View Answer
ethanol
Answer: a
II. It is oxidised to benzoic acid with acidified KMnO4
Explanation: The conversion of acetophenone to
III. It does not undergo iodoform electrophilic substitution
acetanilide is best accomplished by using Backmann
like nitration at meta position
rearrangement.
IV. It does not undergo iodoform reaction with iodine and
alkali
a) I and II
b) II and IV
c) III and IV
d) I and III NUCLEOPHILIC ADDITION REACTIONS
View Answer
1. What type of reaction takes place upon treatment of a
Answer: c ketone with HCN to form a cyanohydrin?
Explanation: It undergoes electrophilic substitution at m- a) Nucleophilic addition
position and also gives iodoform test. b) Nucleophilic substitution
c) Electrophilic addition
8. The product(s) obtained via oxymercuration d) Electrophilic substitution
(HgSO4+H2SO4) of 1-butyne would be what? View Answer
a) CH3CH2COCH3
b) CH3CH2CH2CHO Answer: a
c) CH3CH2CHO + HCHO Explanation: The atoms of HCN add to the carbon-oxygen
d) CH3CH2COOH + HCOOH double bond of the ketone by nucleophilic attack of the
View Answer cyanide anion on the electrophilic carbon of the carbonyl.
2. What is the major organic product obtained from the
following reaction?

d)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Ozonolysis of an alkene results in cleavage of
the carbon-carbon double bond to form two carbonyl
a) bonds. Ozonolysis of a cyclic alkene in which the double
bond has a hydrogen atom on each of the carbon atoms of
the carbon-carbon double bond will lead to the formation
b) of a dialdehyde.

4. What is the major organic product obtained from the

following reaction?
c)

d)
View Answer
a)
Answer: c
Explanation: Di-isobutyl aluminium hydride (DIBAH) is a
selective reducing agent. It does not reduce esters to 1°
b)
alcohols (lithium aluminium hydride can be used to reduce
esters to 1° alcohols).
c)
3. What is the major organic product obtained from the
following reaction?
d)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Treatment of an alkyne with aqueous acid in
the presence of Hg2+ results in a hydration reaction to
form an enol, which tautomerizes to form a ketone. The
a) regiochemistry of the addition is that predicted by
Markovnikov’s rule, with the oxygen adding to the more
substituted end of the carbon-carbon triple bond.

b) 5. What is the major organic product obtained from the

following reaction?

c)
 d) 4-penten-2-ol
View Answer
a)
Answer: d
Explanation: Lithium aluminium hydride (LiAlH4) is a
reducing agent which reacts with ketones to give 2°
alcohols. It does not react with carbon-carbon double
b)
bonds.

c) 8. What is the major organic product obtained from the

following reaction?
d)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Silver(I) oxide in aqueous ammonia (“Tollens
reagent”) is a mild oxidizing agent which oxidizes
aldehydes to carboxylic acids without reacting with
carbon-carbon double bonds or many other functional
groups.
a)
6. What is the major organic product obtained from the
following reaction?

b)

a) 2,4-dimethyl-4-heptanol
b) 4,7-dimethyl-4-heptanol
c)
c) 3,5-dimethyl-4-heptanol
d) 3,5-dimethyl-3-heptanol
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: It is also important that products are d)
identified accurately using IUPAC nomenclature: 4,7- View Answer
Dimethyl-4-heptanol is not an IUPAC name.
Answer: d
7. What is the major organic product obtained from the Explanation: 1° Amines react with ketones by nucleophilic
following reaction? addition to form a carbinolamine intermediate which
undergoes dehydration to give an imine, not an 2° amine.

9. What is the major organic product obtained from the

following reaction?

a) 4-hydroxy-2-pentanone
b) 2-pentanol
c) 2-pentanone
 CONDENSATION REACTIONS

1. Condensation reaction is the reverse of which of the

following reaction?
a)
a) lock and key hypothesis
b) oxidation
c) hydrolysis
d) glycogen formation
b) View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: This reaction example is the reverse of
hydrolysis, which splits a chemical entity into two parts
c)
through action from the polar water molecule, which itself
splits into hydroxide and hydrogen ions.

2. Condensation reaction always results in the formation

d) of complex sugar (disaccharide or polysaccharide) and
View Answer which of the following?
a) amino acids
Answer: a b) lipids
Explanation: Hydroxylamine reacts with ketones by c) water
nucleophilic addition followed by elimination to give an d) maltose
oxime. View Answer

10. What is the major organic product obtained from the Answer: c
following reaction? Explanation: Condensation reaction always results in the
formation of complex sugar (disaccharide or
polysaccharide) and water.

3. In which condensation an enol or an enolate ion reacts

a) 2-methylpropene with a carbonyl compound to form a β-hydroxyaldehyde
b) 2-butene or β-hydroxyketone (an aldol reaction), followed by
c) 1-butene dehydration to give a conjugated enone happens?
d) 2-methyl-1-propanol a) Aldol condensation
View Answer b) Claisen reduction
c) Henry condensation
Answer: a
d) Knoevenagel condensation
Explanation: Reaction of a ketone with a phosphonium View Answer
ylide results in a nucleophilic addition reaction to form a
betaine which undergoes ring closure followed by Answer: a
elimination of a phosphine oxide to make a new carbon- Explanation: Aldol condensation in which condensation an
carbon double bond of an alkene. This is a Wittig reaction. enol or an enolate ion reacts with a carbonyl compound to
It is important to recognize that the new carbon-carbon form a β-hydroxyaldehyde or β-hydroxyketone (an aldol
double bond in the product is formed between the carbon reaction), followed by dehydration to give a conjugated
atom of the carbonyl and the phosphorus-substituted enone happens.
carbon atom of the ylide. It is also useful to draw out the
mechanism for this reaction to determine the structure of 4. Which combination of carbonyl compounds gives phenyl
the product. vinyl ketone by an aldol condensation?
 Answer: a
Explanation: With malonic compounds the reaction
product can lose a molecule of carbon dioxide in a
a) Acetophenone and ketone subsequent step. In the so-called Doebner modification
b) Acetophenone and aldehyde the base is pyridine. For example, the reaction product of
c) Benzaldehyde and aldehyde acrolein and malonic acid in pyridine is trans-2,4-
d) Benzaldehyde and ketone Pentadienoic acid with one carboxylic acid group and not
View Answer two.
Answer: a 7. What will be the product of the following reaction?
Explanation: Draw the structures of the possible aldol
products (3-hydroxy carbonyl compounds) before
dehydration from the pairs of reactants shown below,
then identify which aldol will lead to phenyl vinyl ketone
upon dehydration.
a) –Nitro alcohol
5. Which ester will not give a good yield of the Claisen b) -nitro alcohol
condensation product with NaOEt in EtOH? c) Nitroalkene
d) -amino alcohol
View Answer
a)
Answer: a
Explanation: This is a Henry Reaction, it is the combination
of a nitroalkane and an aldehyde or ketone in the
b) presence of a base to form β-Nitro alcohols.

8. What will be the product ‘B’ in the reaction?

c)

d)
View Answer a) α-nitro alcohol
b) α-nitro ketone
Answer: c
c) nitroalkene
Explanation: The Claisen condensation is reversible and it
d) β-amino alcohol
is formation of a stabilized enolate of the product which
View Answer
leads to a high yield at equilibrium. When the product
cannot give a stabilized enolate, the yield will be poor. Answer: b
Explanation: This is a Henry Reaction, it is the combination
6. What will be the product for the following reaction?
of a nitroalkane and an aldehyde or ketone in the
presence of a base to form β-Nitro alcohols, followed by
oxidation of the secondary alcohol to yield α-nitro
ketones.
a) trans-2,4-pentadienoic acid
9. What will be the product ‘B’ in the reaction?
b) cis -2,4-pentadienoic acid
c) 3-aminobenzoic acid
d) 2-aminobenzoic acid
View Answer
a) α-nitro alcohol
b) α-nitro ketone Answer: a
c) nitroalkene Explanation: A more substituted double bond is generally
d) β-amino alcohol more stable.
View Answer
2. Which of the following is the least abundant aldol
Answer: c adduct formed from an equimolar mixture of ethanal and
Explanation: This is a Henry Reaction, it is the combination propanone in aqueous NaOH solution?
of a nitroalkane and an aldehyde or ketone in the
presence of a base to form β-Nitro alcohols, followed by
dehydration of nitroalkene. a)

10. What will be the product ‘B’ in the reaction?

b)

c)
a) α-nitro alcohol
b) α-nitro ketone
c) nitroalkene
d) β-amino alcohol d)
View Answer View Answer

Answer: d Answer: d
Explanation: This is a Henry Reaction, it is the combination Explanation: Adduct (d) is the propanone dimer which is
of a nitroalkane and an aldehyde or ketone in the destabilized by the steric strain caused by the geminal
presence of a base to form β-Nitro alcohols, followed by methyl groups; the aldol reaction is reversible and a less
reduction of the nitro group to yield β-amino alcohols. stable product will be less abundant.

3. An acetoacetic ester synthesis of a ketone proceeds by

alkylation of the enolate of the acetoacetic ester followed
ENOLATES
by ester hydrolysis and decarboxylation of the β-ketoacid.
1. Which of the following is the structure of the most Which of the following methyl ketones is difficult to
stable enol form of 2-methylpentan-3-one? prepare by this method?

a)
a)

b)

b)
c)

c) d)
View Answer

Answer: a
d)
Explanation: The alkylation of the enolate is an SN2
View Answer
reaction, and sterically hindered alkyl groups are difficult
to introduce. However, even dialkylation is possible with
reactive alkylating agents.
a)
4. A malonic ester synthesis of a carboxylic acid proceeds
by alkylation of the enolate of the malonic ester followed
by ester hydrolysis and decarboxylation of the β-
b)
dicarboxylic acid. Which of the following carboxylic acids is
difficult to prepare by this method?
a) PhCH2CH2CO2H
b) (CH3)2CHO2H c)
c) PhCH2CO2H

d)
d)
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: c
Explanation: Conjugation of the C=C double bond with the
Explanation: The alkylation of an enolate is an SN2
remaining carbonyl provides a more stable enol, which
reaction, and halobenzene do not react by this
rules out. Enols may all be obtained by protonation of the
mechanism; consequently, phenyl cannot be introduced in
same enolate or the readily interconverting stereoisomeric
this way. However, even dialkylation is sometimes possible
enolates. Of these, It allow stabilizing intramolecular
with primary alkyl halides.
hydrogen bonding; it is the more stable of the two owing
5. Which of the following is the most stable enolate to the conjugative stability of the remaining ester group.
derived from 4-methylhexan-3-one?
7. Which is a wrong structure as a resonance contributor
to the most stable enolate form of pentan-2,4-dione?

a)
a)

b) b)

c)
c)

d)
View Answer
d)
View Answer Answer: d
Explanation: Structure is of a different enolate ion (the
Answer: c position of a hydrogen atom is changed).
Explanation: A more substituted double bond is generally
more stable. The difference in stability between the 8. Which enol form of the following dicarbonyl compound
stereoisomeric enolates. is predominant at equilibrium?

6. Which enol form of ethyl 3-oxobutanoate is

predominant at equilibrium?
 order in the concentration of the base
b) The rate constant for the base-catalysed α-halogenation
of propanone decreases in the order Cl2 > Br2 > I2
a)
c) The base-catalysed α-halogenation of propanone
proceeds easily to give 1,1,1-trihalopropanone
b) d) Polyhalogenation of propanone is difficult under acidic
conditions, but the products are the same as those
obtained under basic conditions
c) View Answer

Answer: b
d) Explanation: The rate-determining step of the base-
View Answer catalyzed α-halogenation is usually the initial proton
abstraction to give the enolate, so the rate constant is
Answer: b independent of the identity (or concentration) of the
Explanation: For enolate ions of 1,3-dicarbonyl halogen.
compounds. Conjugation of the C=C double bond with the
remaining carbonyl provides a more stable enol, which
rules out. Enols may all be obtained by protonation of the
ACETALS
same enolate or the readily interconverting stereoisomeric
enolates. Of these, allow stabilizing intramolecular 1. Which of the following statements is wrong?
hydrogen bonding. NMR evidence indicates that is the a) Hydrolysis of an acetal is catalysed by acids
more stable of the two presumably owing to the b) Hydrolysis of an acetal is catalysed by aqueous acid
conjugative stability of the remaining amide group. c) Oximes are stabilized by conjugation between the C=N
and OH groups
9. Which enolate derived from 1-phenylbutan-2-one is
d) Enamines are formed between secondary amines and
most stable?
the carbonyl group of aldehydes and ketones
View Answer
a)
Answer: b
Explanation: Hydrolysis of an acetal is catalysed by
aqueous acid, Acetals are not stable to aqueous acid and
are very readily hydrolyzed back to the parent alcohol and
b)
carbonyl compound under these reaction conditions.

2. Acetal on acid hydrolysis generates which of the

c) following?
a) Alcohol
b) Amine and aldehyde
d) c) Ketone and alcohol
View Answer d) Ketone and ether
Answer: c View Answer
Explanation: Formation of the double bond in conjugation Answer: c
with the phenyl group leads to a more stable enolate, and Explanation: A series of cyclic and acyclic acetals and ketals
it is probably more stable (less sterically strained) than the were hydrolyzed to their corresponding carbonyl
stereoisomeric. compounds by a catalytic amount of CBr4 (20%) in
10. Which of the following statements is wrong? CH3CN/H2O solvent mixture under different energy
a) The base-catalysed α-halogenation of propanone is first sources, thermal or ultrasound.
3. Which combination of an aldehyde and an alcohol most with an acid catalyst?
readily forms a hemiacetal with base catalysis?

a)
a)

b)

b)
c)

c)
d)
View Answer

d) Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: The reaction conditions given are those for
acetal formation.
Answer: c
Explanation: An electron-withdrawing substituent (e.g., Cl) 6. Which is normally the main product when a mixture of
facilitates nucleophilic addition to the carbonyl of an aldehyde RCHO and an excess of alcohol R’OH is treated
aldehyde whereas bulky groups in an alcohol lead to steric with a base catalyst?
hindrance in its addition to a carbonyl in the formation of
a hemiacetal; for formation of hemiacetals. The balance of
these effects in the following leads to being the most a)
reactive system.

4. Which of the following most readily forms a cyclic b)

hemiacetal with acid catalysis?

c)
a)

d)
b) View Answer

Answer: a
c) Explanation: In the presence of a base rather than an acid,
the reactants go no further than formation of the
hemiacetal.
d)
View Answer 7. Consider the mechanism of the acid-catalysed formation
of cyclic acetals from ketones and diols, which of the
Answer: c following structures does not represent a legitimate
Explanation: Hydroxy aldehydes and ketones of the right intermediate in this reaction?
carbon chain length form cyclic hemiacetals with acid
catalysis; ones leading to a five-membered product usually
give the highest yields, and hydroxy aldehydes generally
give better yields than hydroxy ketones.

5. Which is normally the main product when a mixture of

aldehyde RCHO and an excess of alcohol R’OH is treated
 9. Dimethoxymethane is dimethyl acetal of which of the
following?
a) Formaldehyde
b) Acetaldehyde
a)
c) Tolualdehyde
d) Propionaldehyde
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Dimethoxymethane is dimethyl acetal
b) formaldehyde.

10. Which of the following is not polyacetal?

a) Dimethoxymethane
c) b) Dioxolane
c) Starch
d) Cellulose
View Answer

Answer: d
d) Explanation: Cellulose is a ubiquitous example of a
View Answer polyacetal. Dimethoxymethane, dioxolane and starch is an
example of a polyacetal.
Answer: b
Explanation: It does not represent a legitimate
intermediate in this reaction, Consider the mechanism of
TAUTOMERISM
the acid-catalysed formation of cyclic acetals from ketones
and diols, it does not form the desired acetal form. 1. How many enolisable hydrogens are there in the
following compound?
8. Which of the following structures is a hemiacetal?

a) a) 4
b) 5
c) 6
d) 7
b)
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: The hydrogen atom present on the carbon
c) which is adjacent to the carbon attached to the functional
group, and here it is 4.

2. How many tautomers can you draw for the following

d)
ketone?
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: An acetal is a functional group with the
following connectivity R2C(OR’)2, where both R’ groups are
organic fragments. a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
View Answer
d)
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: Two isomers can be drawn as shown below:
Answer: c
Explanation: According to the tautomerism the tautomer

3. How many tautomers can you draw for the following of phenol is c.
ketone?
5. Which of the following compound exhibit tautomerism?

a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
a) I
View Answer
b) II
Answer: b c) I and II
Explanation: Two isomers can be drawn as shown below. d) Neither I nor II
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: For Keto-Enol tautomerism, keto form should
have α-hydrogen.

4. Which of the following is a tautomer of phenol?

a)

b) 6. In keto-enol from presence of which type of hydrogen is

must?
a) Alpha
b) Beta
c) c) Gamma
d) Any position of hydrogen
View Answer
Answer: a a) I > II > III
Explanation: For Keto-Enol tautomerism, keto form should b) II > I > III
have α-hydrogen, as shown in below example. c) III > II > I
d) I > III > II
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The keto–enol tautomerization, less stable
enolate ion will be formed faster as it is
thermodynamically stable, so III is more stable than I.
II is most sable as it is keto form.

10. Which of the following structure can show

tautomerism?
7. Which of the following tautomeric form is more stable?
CH3-CH=O ↔ CH2=C-OH
(I) (II)
a) I
b) II
c) Both are equally stable
a) I
d) Both are unstable
b) II
View Answer
c) III
Answer: a d) I and III
Explanation: The keto–enol tautomerization chemical View Answer
equilibrium is highly thermodynamically driven, and at
Answer: b
room temperature the equilibrium heavily favors the
Explanation: Quinone has an α-hydrogen; however, it is a
formation of the keto form.
vinylic hydrogen (hydrogen attached to a carbon atom
8. What is the stability order for the following compounds? which is sp2 hybridized), it is very difficult to abstract such
a hydrogen, and hence it becomes very less acidic.
Therefore, no abstraction of α-hydrogen from it, by a base,
hence, it does not show tautomerism, same is for III.

a) I > II > III

b) II > I > III PREPARATION OF CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
c) III > II > I
1. Hydrolysis of CH3CH2NO2 with 85% H2SO4 gives which of
d) I > III > II
the following compound?
View Answer
a) CH3CH2OH
Answer: b b) C2H6
Explanation: The keto–enol tautomerization, less stable c) CH3CH=NOH
enolate ion will be formed faster as it is d) CH3COOH
thermodynamically stable, so III is more stable than I. View Answer
II is most sable as it is keto form.
Answer: d
9. What is the stability order for the following compounds? Explanation: Hydrolysis of CH3CH2NO2 with 85%
H2SO4 gives carboxylic acid as shown in below chemical
equation:
2. Acetic acid is obtained when which of the given reaction Answer: d
takes place? Explanation: Benzyl chloride gives benzoic acid on
a) Methyl alcohol is oxidised with potassium oxidation.
permanganate C6H5CH2CI + 2 KOH + 2 *O+ → C6H5COOK + KCl + H2O.
b) Calcium acetate is distilled in the presence of calcium
formate 6. In the below sequence of reactions, A and B are which
c) Acetaldehyde is oxidised with potassium dichromate of the following?
and sulphuric acid
d) Glycerol is heated with sulphuric acid
View Answer a) (CH3)2C(OH)CN, (CH3)2C(OH)COOH
b) (CH3)2C(OH)CN, (CH3)2C(OH)2
Answer: c
c) (CH3)2C(OH)CN, (CH3)2CHCOOH
Explanation: Acetic acid is obtained when acetaldehyde is
d) (CH3)2C(OH)CN, (CH3)2C=O
oxidised with potassium dichromate and sulphuric acid.
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: In the below sequence of reactions, A and B
3. Acetic acid is manufactured by the fermentation of are a shown below (a):
which of the following reaction?
a) Ethanol
b) Methanol
c) Ethanal 7. Formic acid is obtained when which of the given
d) Methanal reaction occurs?
View Answer a) Calcium acetate is heated with conc. H2SO4
b) Calcium formate is heated with calcium acetate
Answer: a
c) Glycerol is heated with oxalic acid at 110℃
Explanation: Ethanol fermentation leads to the formation
d) Acetaldehyde is oxidised with K2Cr2O7 and H2SO4
of acetic acid.
View Answer

Answer: c
4. When benzyl alcohol is oxidised with KMnO4, the Explanation: Glycerol is heated with oxalic acid at 110℃
gives formic acid.
product obtained is which of the following compound?
a) Benzaldehyde
b) Benzoic acid
c) CO2 and H2O
d) Benzophenone
View Answer 8. o-xylene when oxidised in presence of V2O5 the product
is which carboxylic acid?
Answer: a a) Benzoic acid
Explanation: When benzyl alcohol is oxidised with KMnO4, b) Phenyl acetic acid
the product obtained is benzoic acid. c) Phthalic acid
d) Acetic acid
5. Which of the following gives benzoic acid on oxidation?
View Answer
a) Chlorophenol
b) Chlorotoluene Answer: c
c) Chlorobenzene Explanation: o-xylene when oxidised in presence of
d) Benzyl chloride
View Answer
V2O5 the product is phthalic acid. Answer: c
Explanation: BrCH2CH2COOH is least acidic or has less Ka
i.e., dissociation constant. It is A due to lesser -I effect of Br
than F and B Br atom further away form −COOH group.

2. The vapour of a carboxylic acid HA when passed over

MnO2 at 573 K yields propanone. What is the acid HA?
9. The below reaction is called as which of the following a) Methanoic acid
name reaction? b) Ethanoic acid
c) Propanoic acid
d) Butanoic acid
View Answer
a) Wurtz reactions
Answer: b
b) Koch reaction
Explanation: The vapour of ethanoic acid (HA) when
c) Clemenson’s reduction
passed over MnO2 at 573 K yields propanone.
d) Kolbe’s reaction
View Answer

Answer: b
3. Which acid is strongest or Which is most acidic?
Explanation: The Koch reaction is an organic reaction for
a) Cl2CH.COOH
the synthesis of tertiary carboxylic acids from alcohols or
b) ClCH2COOH
alkenes.
c) CH3COOH
10. By aerial oxidation, which one of the following gives d) Cl3C.COOH
phthalic acid? View Answer
a) Naphthalene
Answer: b
b) Benzene
Explanation: Presence of -I effect chlorine atom increases
c) Mesitylene
the acidic nature by withdrawing electrons.
d) Toluene
Cl3CCOOH > Cl2CHCOOH > Cl−CH2−COOH > CH3COOH
View Answer
4. The acid which reduces Fehling solution is which of the
Answer: a
following?
Explanation: By aerial oxidation naphthalene, we can get
a) Methanoic acid
phthalic acid.
b) Ethanoic acid
c) Butanoic acid
d) Propanoic acid
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Methanoic acid resemble with aldehyde due
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF CARBOXYLIC ACIDS to its structure. So, it reduces Fehling reagent.

1. Which of the following acids has the smallest 5. Which class of compounds shows H-bonding even more
dissociation constant? than in alcohols?
a) CH3CHFCOOH a) Phenols
b) FCH2CH2COOH b) Carboxylic acids
c) BrCH2CH2COOH c) Ethers
d) CH3CHBrCOOH d) Aldehydes
View Answer View Answer
Answer: b Answer: b
Explanation: Forms H-bonding by means two highly Explanation: CH3COOH is slightly ionised than H2SO4.
electronegative atoms present in it. Acetic acid is weak acid than sulphuric acid because It has
less degree of ionization.
6. Which of the following is the strongest acid?
a) CH3COOH 10. In CH3COOH and HCOOH, HCOOH will be which of the
b) BrCH2COOH following?
c) ClCH2COOH a) Less acidic
d) FCH2COOH b) Equally acidic
View Answer c) More acidic
d) cannot say about acidic behaviour
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: Presence of -I effect fluorine atom increases
the acidic nature by withdrawing electrons. Answer: c
F−CH2−COOH > Cl−CH2−COOH > Br−CH2−COOH > Explanation: Presence of methyl group decreases the
CH3COOH. acidic character of acetic acid due to positive inductive
effect (+I).
7. The reaction of HCOOH with conc.H2SO4 gives which of
the following compound?
a) CO2
b) CO CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
c) Oxalic acid
1. Hydrogenation of C6H5CHOH−COOH over
d) Acetic acid Rh−Al2O3catalyst in methanol gives which of the following?
View Answer a) C6H5CH2COOH
Answer: b b) C6H11CHOHCOOH
Explanation: The reaction of HCOOH with conc.H2SO4gives c) C6H5CHOHCH2OH
carbon monoxide and water. d) C6H11CH2COOH
View Answer

Answer: b
8. Which one is strongest acid among following options? Explanation: Hydrogenation of C6H5CHOH−COOH over
a) CH2FCOOH Rh−Al2O3 catalyst in methanol gives C6H11CHOHCOOH.
b) CH2ClCOOH
c) CHCl2COOH
d) CHF2COOH
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: CHF2−COOH. Difluoroacetic acid is strongest 2. In the anion HCOO− the two carbon-oxygen bonds are
because presence of two F atoms increases its acidic found to be of equal length. What is the reason for it?
nature. a) Electronic orbitals of carbon atom are hybridised
b) The C = O bond is weaker than the C – O bond
9. Acetic acid is weak acid than sulphuric acid because
c) The anion HCOO− has two resonating structures
which of the following reasons?
d) The anion is obtained by removal of a proton form the
a) It decomposes on increasing temperature
acid molecule
b) It has less degree of ionisation
View Answer
c) It has -COOH group
d) It has more inductive effect Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: Anion HCOO− has two resonating structure
(identical).
3. In a set of the given reactions, acetic acid yielded a a) CaCO3
product C b) CaO
c) CaC2O4
d) Ca(OH)2
What would be product C? View Answer
a) CH3−C-C2H5(OH)C6H5
b) CH3CH(OH)C2H5 Answer: c
c) CH3COC6H5 Explanation: CaC2O4 is a salt of oxalic acid which is more
d) CH3CH(OH)C6H5 acidic than acetic acid, so it is insoluble in acetic acid.
View Answer
7. Identify the wrong statement from the following?
Answer: a a) Salicylic acid’s a monobasic acid
Explanation: In a set of the given reactions, acetic acid b) Methyl salicylate is an ester
yielded a product C is CH3−C-C2H5(OH)C6H5. c) Salicylic acid gives violet colour with neutral ferric
chloride as well as brisk effervescence with sodium
bicarbonate
d) Methyl salicylate does not occur in natural oils
View Answer

Answer: d
4. Carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenol and alcohol Explanation: Methyl salicylate occurs in natural essential
because of which of the following? oils like winter green.
a) Intermolecular hydrogen bonding
b) Formation of dimers 8. When CH3COOH reacts with CH3−Mg−X, which of the
c) Highly acidic hydrogen following is formed?
d) Resonance stabilization of their conjugate base a) CH3COX is formed
View Answer b) Hydrocarbon is formed
c) Acetone is formed
Answer: d d) Alcohol is formed
Explanation: Resonance stabilization of their conjugate View Answer
base i.e., carboxylate ion.
Answer: b
5. When propionic acid is treated with aqueous sodium Explanation: When CH3COOH reacts with CH3−Mg−X
bicarbonate CO2 is liberated. The ‘C’ of CO2 comes from formed as hydrocarbon.
which of the following? CH3COOH + CH3 – Mg – X → CH3 – CH3
a) Methyl group
b) Carboxylic acid group 9. Hydrolysis of an ester gives a carboxylic acid which on
c) Methylene group Kolbe’s electrolysis yields ethane. The ester is which of the
d) Bicarbonate following?
View Answer a) Ethyl methonoate
b) Methyl ethanoate
Answer: d c) Propylamine
Explanation: When propionic acid is treated with aqueous d) Ethylamine
sodium bicarbonate CO2 is liberated and ‘C’ of CO2 comes View Answer
from bicarbonate.
CH3CH2COOH(aq) + NahCO3(aq) → CH3CH2COONa + CO2 + Answer: b
H2O. Explanation: Hydrolysis of an ester gives a carboxylic acid
propionic acid sod.bicarbonate which on Kolbe’s electrolysis yields ethane, this ester is
methyl ethanoate.
6. The compound not soluble in acetic acid is which of the
following?
10. Sulphonation of benzoic acid produces mainly which of 3. When formic acid reacts with PCl5 it forms which of the
the following? following?
a) o-sulphobenzoic acid a) Formyl chloride
b) m-sulphobenzoic acid b) Acetyl chloride
c) p-sulphobenzoic acid c) Methyl chloride
d) o- and p-sulphobenzoic acid d) Propionyl chloride
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: a
Explanation: Sulphonation of benzoic acid produces mainly Explanation: When formic acid reacts with PCl5 it forms
m-sulphobenzoic acid. formyl chloride.
HCOOH + PCl5 → HCOCl + POcl3 + HCl
Formic acid Formyl chloride

4. Laboratory method for the preparation of acetyl

chloride is which of the following?
a) CH3COOH + SOCl2→CH3COCl
b) CH3COOH + PCl3→CH3COCl
ACID CHLORIDES c) CH3COONa + PCl3→CH3COCl
d) CH3COONa + PCl3→CH5COCl
1. Which of the following is the name given to the given View Answer
compound?
Answer: a
Explanation: Acetyl chloride is produced in the laboratory
by the reaction of acetic acid with chlorodehydrating
a) Acetyl chloride
agents such as SOCl2.
b) Formyl chloride
c) Chloretone 5. Which of the following gives benzoic acid on oxidation?
d) Oxochloromethane a) Chlorophenol
View Answer b) Chlorotoluene
c) Chlorobenzene
Answer: b
d) Benzyl chloride
Explanation: Formyl chloride is the organic compound with
View Answer
the formula HC(O)Cl.
Answer: d
2. Benzoyl chloride is prepared from benzoic acid by which
Explanation: Benzyl chloride gives benzoic acid on
of the following?
oxidation.
a) Cl2, hv
b) SO2, Cl2
c) SOCl2
d) Cl2, H2O
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Benzoyl chloride is prepared from benzoic 6. What is the product D in the given reaction?
acid be SOCl2. C6H5CCl3 + C6H5CO2H → 2 C6H5COCl + D
a) Cl2
b) H2O
c) HCl
d) H2
View Answer
Answer: c d) Acetyl chloride
Explanation: C6H5CCl3 + C6H5CO2H → 2 C6H5COCl + HCl View Answer
Benzoyl chloride is produced along HCl with from
benzotrichloride using either water or benzoic acid. Answer: b
Explanation: Alcohols react with acyl chlorides to give
7. What will be the product B in the given reaction? esters:
2 C6H5COCl + H2O2 + 2 NaOH → B + 2 NaCl + 2 H2O RCOCl + R′OH → RCO2R′ + HCl
a) Chlorophenol
b) Chlorotoluene 10. For synthesis of carboxylic acid, the intermediate
c) Chlorobenzene product needed is which of the following?
d) Benzyl peroxide a) Acyl chloride
View Answer b) aryls
c) benzene
Answer: d d) carboxylic acid
Explanation: Benzoyl peroxide, a common reagent in View Answer
polymer chemistry, is produced industrially by treating
benzoyl chloride with hydrogen peroxide and sodium Answer: a
hydroxide: Explanation: For synthesis of carboxylic acid, the
2 C6H5COCl + H2O2 + 2 NaOH → (C6H5CO)2O2 + 2 NaCl + 2 intermediate product needed is acid chloride.
H2O

8. What is the product in the given reaction when benzyl

ACID ANHYDRIDES
chloride reacts with phenol?
1. What is the major product of the following reaction?

a) Chlorophenol
b) Benzophenone
c) Chlorobenzene
d) Benzyl peroxide
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: It undergoes the Friedel-Crafts acylation with a)
aromatic compounds to give the corresponding
benzophenones and related derivatives.

b)

9. Which of the following is the product B when acid c)

chloride reacts with alcohol?
RCOCl + R′OH → B + HCl
a) Chlorophenol d)
b) Ester View Answer
c) Ether
Answer: c carboxylic acids would naturally re-form the two carboxylic
Explanation: In order for this product to form, a second acids from which they were obtained.)
methyl amine nitrogen atom would have to attack the
carbonyl carbon of the carboxylate anion (the leaving 4. Which of the following compounds is not an acid
group of the original anhydride) and this is energetically anhydride?
not favoured due to repulsion by the negative charge on

the oxygen atom.

a)
2. What will be the reactivity order of the following with
water?
a) acid halide > ester > acid anhydride > amide
b) acid anhydride > amide > acid halide > ester b)
c) amide > ester > acid anhydride > acid halide
d) acid halide > acid anhydride > ester > amide
View Answer

Answer: d c)
Explanation: Acid halide are more reactive than
anhydrides, which are more reactive than esters, which
are more reactive than amides. This is due to the d)
electronegative group, such as chlorine, polarizing the View Answer
carbonyl group more strongly than an alkoxy group (ester)
Answer: b
or an amino group (amide).
Explanation: An organic acid anhydride is an acid
3. Which of the following is an anhydride? anhydride that is an organic compound. An acid anhydride
is a compound that has two acyl groups bonded to the
same oxygen atom. A common type of organic acid
anhydride is a carboxylic anhydride, where the parent acid
a) is a carboxylic acid, the formula of the anhydride being
(RC(O))2O.

5. Acetic anhydride is less reactive toward attack by a

b) nucleophile than which of the following?
a) Acetic acid
b) Ethyl acetate
c) Acetyl chloride
c) d) Acetonitrile
View Answer

Answer: c
d) Explanation: Nucleophilic substitution reactions usually
View Answer take place in two steps: addition of the nucleophile and
elimination of a leaving group. Although both steps can
Answer: b
affect the overall rate of the reaction, it is generally the
Explanation: Acid anhydrides, or simply anhydrides, are
first step that is rate-limiting. Therefore, any factor that
compounds which would react additively with water to
makes the carbonyl group of the carboxylic acid derivative
form two molecules of the parent carboxylic acid. (Mixed
more easily attacked will favor the reaction.
anhydrides, RCOOCOR’, i.e. anhydrides derived from two
6. Which of the following compounds would be converted 8. Which of the following is most reactive?
to acetic anhydride when treated with sodium acetate?
a) Acetaldehyde
b) Acetyl chloride
c) Methyl acetate
a) 1
d) Acetamide
b) 2
View Answer
c) 3
Answer: b d) 1 and 2
Explanation: The acid chloride can then be converted to a View Answer
less reactive derivative such as an anhydride.
Answer: a
7. Which will be the product of the following reaction? Explanation: Acid anhydrides are more reactive than
esters, which are more reactive than amides. This is due to
the electronegative group, polarizing the carbonyl group
more strongly than an alkoxy group (ester) or an amino
group (amide).

9. What is the formed product when acid anhydride is

hydrolyzed?
a) Aldehyde
b) Ketone
c) Alcohols
a)
d) Carboxylic acid
View Answer

Answer: d
b) Explanation: Hydrolysis of acid anhydrides in water occurs
at a slow rate and may also need heating (boiling) with
water – a reaction rate which contrasts rather strongly
with the acid halides and leads to formation of carboxylic
acid.
c) 10. What will be the product for the following reaction?

d) a) Ester and carboxylic acid

View Answer b) Ether and carboxylic acid
c) Ketones and ester
Answer: d
d) Aldehyde and carboxylic acid
Explanation: The product when reaction of acid anhydride
View Answer
with ethanol is the ester ethyl ethanoate, as shown in
given reaction. Answer: a
(CH3CO)20 + ROH → CH3COOR + CH3COOH Explanation: Phenol and ethanoic anhydride reacts to
But, here the acid anhydride is closed so both ester and
carboxylic part will be in same molecule.
form, phenyl ethanoate with ethanoic acid. amides. With an alkyl amine the lone pair electron is
localized on the nitrogen. However, the lone pair electron
on an amide are delocalized between the nitrogen and the
oxygen through resonance. This makes amides much less
basic compared to alkyl amines. And more the stabilization
in amide less will be basic, here PhCH2CONH2 will be
stabilizes by resonance.
AMIDES
4. By refluxing unsubstituted amide with acid, it will yield
1. When acetamide is treated with HNO2, the gas is which of the following product(s)?
evolved which of the following? a) ammonia
a) H2 b) carboxylic acid
b) O2 c) nitrogen gas
c) N2 d) ammonia and carboxylic acid
d) CH4 View Answer
View Answer Answer: d
Answer: c Explanation: By refluxing unsubstituted amide with acid, it
Explanation: When acetamide is treated with HNO2, the will yield and ammonia and carboxylic acid.
gas is evolved in nitrogen gas. 5. Which one of the following reducing agents is likely to
CH3 – CO – NH2 + HNO2 → CH3COOH + N2↑ + H2O
be the most effective in bringing about the following
Acetamide Acetic acid
change?
2. On heating acetamide in presence of P2O5, which of the R−CONH2 → RCH2NH2
following is formed? a) H2−Ni
a) Ammonium acetate b) NaBH4
b) Acetonitrile c) LiAlH4
c) NH3 d) Na-alcohol
d) Methylamines View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b Explanation: H2−Ni reducing agents is likely to be the most
Explanation: On heating acetamide in presence of P2O5, effective in conversion of amide to amine.
acetonitrile is formed.

6. Ethyl amine on acetylation gives which of the following?

3. Decreasing order of basicity of the given compound is a) N-ethyl acetamide
which of the following? b) Acetamide
(1) CH3CONH2 c) Methyl acetamide
(2) CH3CH2NH2 d) N,N-dimethyl acetamide
(3) PhCH2CONH2 View Answer
a) 1 > 2 > 3
b) 2 > 1 > 3 Answer: a
c) 3 > 2 > 1 Explanation: Ethyl amine on acetylation gives N-ethyl
d) 1 > 3 > 2 acetamide, as shown in given reaction.
View Answer CH3CH2NH2 + CH3COCl → CH3CH2NHCOCH3 + HCl

Answer: b 7. Benzamide on reaction with POCl3 gives which of the

Explanation: Comparing the basicity of alkyl amines to following?
a) Aniline d) Methyl cyanide
b) Chlorobenzene View Answer
c) Benzyl amine
d) Benzonitrile Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: Ethylamine can be prepared by the action of
bromine and caustic potash on propionamide.
Answer: d CH3 – CH2 – CO – NH2 + Br2 + 4KOH → CH3CH2NH2+ K2CO3 +
Explanation: POCl3 is a dehydrating agent so Benzamide on 2KBr + 2H2O
reaction with POCl3 propionamide
gives benzonitrile.

ESTERS

1. Which of the following compounds is an ester?

8. Amides may be converted into amines by reaction

named after which of the following reaction?
a)
a) Perkin
b) Claisen
c) Hoffmann
d) Kolbe b)
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Amides may be converted into amines by c)
reaction named after Hoffmann bromamide reaction.

9. What will be the product for the given reaction? d)

View Answer

Answer: c
a) CH3Br Explanation: Esters are characterized by their possession
b) CH4 of a modified carboxyl group, in which the H of the -OH
c) CH3COBr group is replaced by an alkyl group, to form the general
d) CH3NH2 functional group -COOR.
View Answer
2. Which of the following is used as catalyst for the
Answer: c esterification of carboxylic acid and alcohol?
Explanation: Amide on reacting with NaOBr will give an a) Nitrous acid
amine as shown below. b) Sulphuric acid
c) Sulphurous acid
d) Nitric acid
View Answer
10. Ethylamine can be prepared by the action of bromine
and caustic potash on which of the following? Answer: b
a) Acetamide Explanation: The classic synthesis is the Fischer
b) Propionamide esterification, which involves treating a carboxylic acid
c) Formamide with an alcohol in the presence of a dehydrating agent:
RCO2H + R′OH ⇌ RCO2R′ + H2O 6. What is the characteristic smell for ester?
The equilibrium constant for such reactions is about 5 for a) Fruity like smell
typical esters, e.g., ethyl acetate. The reaction is slow in b) Fish like smell
the absence of a catalyst. Sulfuric acid is a typical catalyst c) Rotten egg smell
for this reaction. d) Alcoholic smell
View Answer
3. What will be the product for the given reaction?
CH3OH + CO →? Answer: a
a) Ethyl formate Explanation: Many esters have distinctive fruit-like odors,
b) Methyl formate and many occur naturally in the essential oils of plants.
c) Ethyl acetate This has also led to their commonplace use in artificial
d) Methyl acetate flavorings and fragrances when those odors aim to be
View Answer mimicked.

Answer: b 7. Salts of carboxylate anions can be alkylating agent with

Explanation: The carbonylation of methanol yields methyl alkyl halides to give esters. In the case that an alkyl
formate, which is the main commercial source of formic chloride is used, an iodide salt can catalyze the reaction.
acid. What is the name reaction for the given reaction?
CH3OH + CO → CH3O2CH a) Favorskii rearrangement
b) Baeyer–Villiger oxidation
4. Hydrolysis of ester leads to the formation of which of c) Pinner reaction
the following products in basic medium? d) Finkelstein reaction
a) Ether and alcohol View Answer
b) Alcohol and sodium carboxylate
c) Aldehyde and alcohol Answer: d
d) Sodium carboxylate Explanation: Salts of carboxylate anions can be alkylating
View Answer agent with alkyl halides to give esters. In the case that an
alkyl chloride is used, an iodide salt can catalyze the
Answer: b reaction this reaction is known as Finkelstien reaction.
Explanation: Under basic conditions, hydroxide acts as a
nucleophile, while an alkoxide is the leaving group. 8. What will be the product of given reaction?

a) Ether and alcohol

5. What will be the product for the given reaction? b) Alcohol and sodium carboxylate
C2H4 + CH3CO2H + 1⁄2 O2 →? c) Aldehyde and alcohol
a) Ethyl formate d) Carboxylic acid and alkene
b) Vinyl formate View Answer
c) Ethyl acetate
Answer: d
d) Methyl acetate
Explanation: Ester pyrolysis in is a vacuum pyrolysis
View Answer
reaction converting esters containing a β-hydrogen atom
Answer: b into the corresponding carboxylic acid and the alkene.
Explanation: In the presence of palladium-based catalysts,
ethylene, acetic acid, and oxygen react to give vinyl
acetate:
C2H4 + CH3CO2H + 1⁄2 O2 → C2H3O2CCH3 + H2O 9. Fries rearrangement reaction of phenol ester leads to
the formation which type of product?
a) Ketone
b) Aldehyde 2. What is the geometry of the intermediate formed in the
c) Alcohol mechanism of transesterification?
d) Alkene a) Octahedral
View Answer b) Square planner
c) Tetrahedral
Answer: a d) Square bipyramidal
Explanation: The Fries rearrangement is a rearrangement View Answer
reaction of a phenolic ester to a hydroxy aryl ketone by
catalysis of Lewis acids. Answer: c
Explanation: In the transesterification mechanism, the
10. What is the order or solubility in water of the following carbonyl carbon of the starting ester reacts to give a
compound? tetrahedral intermediate, which either reverts to the
1) ethyl methanoate starting material, or proceeds to the transesterified
2) ethyl butanoate product.
3) ethyl ethanoate
4) ethyl propanoate 3. What chemical reaction makes biodiesel?
a) 1 > 2 > 3 > 4 a) Transesterification
b) 1 > 3 > 4 > 2 b) Sublimation
c) 1 > 2 > 4 > 3 c) Polymerization
d) 3 > 1 > 4 > 2 d) Fermentation
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: a
Explanation: As chain length increases, the hydrocarbon Explanation: Transesterification chemical reaction makes
portion forces itself between water molecules, breaking biodiesel. The most common method of transesterification
the relatively strong hydrogen bonds between water is the reaction of the ester with an alcohol in the presence
molecules without offering an energetic compensation; of an acid catalyst.
furthermore, the water molecules are forced into an
ordered alignment along the chain, decreasing the entropy 4. Polyethylene terephthalate is prepared by a
in the system. This makes the process thermodynamically transesterification reaction.
less favorable, and so solubility decreases. a) True
b) False
View Answer

TRANSESTERIFICATION Answer: a
Explanation: By transesterification reaction between
1. Which of the following is true about transesterification? dimethyl terephthalate and the dihydric alcohol, ethylene
a) exchanging the organic alkyl group of an ester with the glycol, polyethylene terephthalate is prepared along with
organic group alkyl of an alcohol methanol, which is evaporated to drive the reaction
b) exchanging the organic alkyl group of an alcohol with forward.
the organic group alkyl of an ester
c) exchanging the organic alkyl group of an ester with the 5. What type of solution is used in transesterification for
organic group alkyl of an alkane the determination of fatty acid compositions?
d) exchanging the organic alkyl group of an ester with the a) Methanol in NaOH
organic group alkyl of an ether b) Methanol in NaCl
View Answer c) Methanol in KOH
d) Methanol in H2O
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: Transesterification is the process of
exchanging the organic group R″ of an ester with the Answer: a
organic group R′ of an alcohol. Explanation: In aqueous warm solution of methanol in
NaOH esterification for the determination of fatty acid hydrochloric acid?
compositions. a) Ethyl ethanoate
b) Methyl ethanoate
6. Transesterification reaction is an irreversible reaction. c) Ethyl propanoate
a) True d) Propyl ethanoate
b) False View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Answer: b Explanation: Methyl propanoate reacts with ethanol in the
Explanation: The most common method of presence of hydrochloric acid to form ethyl propanoate
transesterification is the reaction of the ester with an and methanol.
alcohol in the presence of an acid catalyst. Since both the
reactants and the products are an ester and an alcohol, 10. Which of the following is the product formed when
the reaction is reversible and the equilibrium constant is butyl acetate and ethanol in presence of hydrochloric
close to one. acid?
a) Ethyl ethanoate
7. Which of the following is the product formed when b) Methyl acetate
methyl ethanoate and ethanol in presence of hydrochloric c) Ethyl acetate
acid? d) Propyl ethanoate
a) Ethyl ethanoate View Answer
b) Methyl ethanoate
c) Ethyl propanoate Answer: c
d) Propyl ethanoate Explanation: Butyl acetate reacts with ethanol in the
View Answer presence of hydrochloric acid to form ethyl acetate and
butanol.
Answer: a
Explanation: Methyl ethanoate reacts with ethanol in the
presence of hydrochloric acid to form ethyl ethanoate and
methanol. SAPONIFICATION

1. Which of the following processes can saponification be

used for?
a) For the production of plastics
8. Which of the following is the product formed when b) In blow glass artistry
alkylene carbonate and alcohol in presence of hydrochloric c) To make soap
acid? d) The formation of alloys
a) Dialkyl carbonate View Answer
b) Methyl ethanoate
c) Alkyl carbonate Answer: c
d) Propyl ethanoate Explanation: Saponification is a process that produces
View Answer soap. Soaps are salts of fatty acids.

Answer: a 2. What is the name of the soap produced through the

Explanation: The transesterification reaction implies an saponification of this triglyceride?
alkylene or cyclic carbonate and an alcohol in the presence
of either a homogeneous or heterogeneous acidic or basic
catalyst to coproduce dialkyl carbonate and the alkane diol
or glycol.

9. Which of the following is the product formed when a) Sodium dececanoate

methyl propanoate and ethanol in presence of b) Sodium oleate
c) Sodium stearate
d) Sodium acetate b) The shorter the chain of fatty acid, the higher is the
View Answer saponification value
c) The higher the saturation in chain of fatty acid, the
Answer: c lower is the saponification value
Explanation: The soap has the formula C17H35COONa and d) The lower the saturation in chain of fatty acid, the
its name is sodium stearate. higher is the saponification value
View Answer
3. Lye is used in soap-making. Lye is a concentrated
solution of which ionic compound? Answer: a
a) K2CO3 Explanation: The shorter the chain of fatty acid, the higher
b) CuSO4 is the saponification value, the long chain fatty acids found
c) NaOH in fats have a low saponification value because they have a
d) NaCl relatively fewer number of carboxylic functional groups
View Answer per unit mass of the fat as compared to short chain fatty
Answer: a acids.
Explanation: Lye is another name for a strongly basic 7. Which of the following fat or oil is unsaponifiable?
solution. Mostly it is a solution of sodium hydroxide. a) Paraffin wax
4. Which of the following term describe saponification? b) Bee wax
a) Cleaving of ester molecules into carboxylic acid and c) Olive oil
d) Shea butter
alcohol
View Answer
b) Dehydration synthesis by removing water
c) Hydrolysis of a salt by adding a weak acid Answer: a
d) Synthesis of two alkyl groups to make an ether Explanation: Unsaponifiables are components of an oily
View Answer (oil, fat, wax) mixture that fail to form soaps when treated
Answer: a with sodium hydroxide (lye) or potassium hydroxide.
Unsaponifiable value of paraffin wax is approximately 100.
Explanation: Cleaving of ester molecules into carboxylic
acid and alcohol that is triglyceride is treated with a strong 8. Saponification value is the number of milligrams of KOH
base, which cleaves the ester bond, releasing fatty acid required to saponify what present in the 1g of oil or fat?
salts (soaps) and glycerol. a) Salts
5. Which of the following is considered a useful alkali in b) Hydrocarbon
saponification reactions? c) Fatty acids
a) CCl4 d) unsaturation
b) Cl– View Answer
c) NaOH Answer: c
d) Pb+ Explanation: The saponification is the value of oil
View Answer determined as the number of mgs of KOH needed to
Answer: c saponify the fatty acids present in the 1g of oil.
Explanation: Depending on the nature of the alkali used in 9. Which of the following compound is an industrial
their production, soaps have distinct properties. Sodium manufacturing product by saponification?
hydroxide (NaOH) gives “hard soap”; hard soaps can also a) Sodium chloride
be used in water containing Mg, Cl, and Ca salts. b) Potassium hydroxide
6. Which of the following statement is true about c) Glycerol
saponification value of oil? d) Sodium hydroxide
View Answer
a) The shorter the chain of fatty acid, the higher is the
saponification value
Answer: c 2. Which ester will not give a good yield of the Claisen
Explanation: The triglyceride is treated with a strong base condensation product with NaOEt in EtOH?
which cleaves the ester bond, releasing fatty acid salts
(soaps) and glycerol. This process is also the main
industrial method for producing glycerol. In some soap- a)
making, the glycerol is left in the soap.

10. Soap can be precipitated out by salting by using which b)

chemical compound?
a) Sodium chloride
b) Potassium hydroxide c)
c) Glycerol
d) Sodium hydroxide
View Answer d)
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: If necessary, soaps may be precipitated by Answer: c
salting it out with sodium chloride. Explanation: The Claisen condensation is reversible and it
is formation of a stabilized enolate of the product which
leads to a high yield at equilibrium. When the product
CLAISEN AND CROSS CLAISEN CONDENSATION cannot give a stabilized enolate, the yield will be poor.

1. Which of the following reaction shows Claisen 3. Which of the following is a product formed in Claisen
condensation? condensation?
a) β- ester
b) β-ketone
c) β-keto ester
a) d) Y-diketone
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The Claisen condensation is a carbon–carbon
b)
bond forming reaction that occurs between two esters or
c)
one ester and another carbonyl compound in the presence
of a strong base, resulting in a β-keto ester or a β-
diketone.

4. Which of the following stamen is incorrect about Claisen

condensation?
a) The product is a β-keto ester which resists
d) deprotonation by the strong base in the reaction mixture
View Answer b) The reaction involves the condensation of two esters in
the presence of strong base
Answer: c c) A strong base is required to remove H+ from an α-H
Explanation: The Claisen condensation is a carbon–carbon position in one of the starting esters
bond forming reaction that occurs between two esters or d) A strong base is required to remove H+ from an α-H
one ester and another carbonyl compound in the presence position in one of the starting esters
of a strong base, resulting in a β-keto ester or a β- View Answer
diketone.
Answer: a sodium ethoxide, affords β-keto esters.
Explanation: The product is a β-keto ester which gets
deprotonated by the strong base in the reaction mixture
and get converted into simple keto group.

5. What will be the product of the following reaction?

7. What will be the product of the following reaction?

a) Ethyl acetoacetate
b) Methyl acetoacetate
c) Propyl acetoacetate
d) Butyl acetoacetate a)
View Answer

Answer: a
b)
Explanation: The Claisen Condensation between esters
containing α-hydrogens, promoted by a base such as
sodium ethoxide, affords β-keto esters.
c)

d)
6. What will be the product of the following reaction? View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: If one of the ester partners has enolizable α-
hydrogens and the other does not (e.g., aromatic esters or
carbonates), this will be the mixed reaction or cross
Claisen condensation.

a)

b) 8. What will be the product of the following reaction?

c)

d) a)
View Answer

Answer: d b)
Explanation: The Claisen Condensation between esters
containing α-hydrogens, promoted by a base such as
c)

d)
View Answer
Answer: b Answer: c
Explanation: If one of the ester partners has enolizable α- Explanation: Mechanism of Claisen condensation consist
hydrogens and the other does not (e.g., aromatic esters or of main three steps. First, an acid-base reaction. The
carbonates), this will be the mixed reaction or cross alkoxide functions as a base and removes the acidic a-
Claisen condensation. hydrogen giving the reactive ester enolate. The
nucleophilic ester enolate attacks the carbonyl C of
another ester in a nucleophilic substitution process giving
the tetrahedral intermediate. The intermediate collapses,
9. which of the following is the reactant precursor for the reforming the C=O, resulting in loss of the leaving group,
given product? the alkoxide, leading to the b-ketoester product.

INTRAMOLECULAR CLAISEN CONDENSATION

1. Which type of precursor is used as reactant in

intramolecular Claisen condensation?
a) One molecule with an ester end
b) Two molecules of ester
c) One molecule with two ester ends
a) I and III
d) One molecule of ester and enolate
b) II and III
View Answer
c) III and IV
d) I and II Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: In intramolecular Claisen condensations,
reactions occur for 1,6 and 1,7 diesters, as these
Answer: d
substances result in the formation of compounds
Explanation: In Claisen condensation, the driving force is
containing five and six membered rings, respectively.
the formation of the stabilized anion of the β-keto ester. If
two different esters are used, an essentially statistical 2. Which is the main product of the following reaction?
mixture of all four products is generally obtained, and the
preparation does not have high synthetic utility.

10. Which of the following mechanism shows the correct a)

curve arrow of the reaction of the enolate ion from ethyl
acetate with ethyl acetate in the Claisen condensation?

b)

c)

d)
View Answer

View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: This is an example of an intramolecular
Claisen condensation. These reactions occur for 1,6 and d)
1,7 diesters, as these substances result in the formation of View Answer
compounds containing five and six membered rings,
respectively. Answer: c
Explanation: Favours the formation of the more stable 5-
3. What is the other name for the intramolecular Claisen or 6-membered rings, as the ring stain in 5 and 6
condensation? membered rings are less.
a) Perkin condensation
b) Stobbe condensation
c) Knoevenagel condensation
d) Dieckmann condensation
View Answer 6. Which is the main product of the following
intramolecular Claisen condensation?
Answer: d
Explanation: Diester compounds can be used to give an
intramolecular Claisen condensation which is known as the
Dieckmann condensation.

4. Dieckmann Condensation is intramolecular

condensation of ……. to form cyclic product.
a) diamide
b) diol a)
c) diester
d) diketone
View Answer
b)
Answer: c
Explanation: These reactions occur for 1,6 and 1,7 diesters,
as these substances result in the formation of compounds c)
containing five and six membered rings.

5. What will be the product of the following intramolecular

d)
Claisen condensation?
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: This reaction is an intramolecular Claisen
condensation, which is followed by attack of carbocation
on carbon attached to ester group.

a)

7. Which is the main product of the following

b) intramolecular Claisen condensation?

c)
 9. Which is the main product of the following
intramolecular Claisen condensation?
a)

b)

c) a)

d) b)
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: This reaction is an intramolecular Claisen c)
condensation, in which the product is a β-keto ester which
gets deprotonated by the strong base in the reaction
mixture and get converted into simple keto group.

d)
View Answer

8. What will be the product(s) of the following Answer: b

intramolecular Claisen condensation? Explanation: This reaction is an intramolecular Claisen
condensation, favours the formation of the more stable 5-
or 6-membered rings, as the ring stain in 5 and 6
membered rings are less and 6-membered rings are more
stable than 5 membered.

10. Which is the main product of the following

intramolecular Claisen condensation?
a) I
b) II
c) I and II
d) II and III
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: This reaction is an intramolecular Claisen
a)
condensation, favours the formation of the more stable 5-
or 6-membered rings, as the ring stain in 5 and 6
membered rings are less. In both II and III five membered
ring is formed. b)
 primary amine.

c)
3. Ethylamine can be prepared by the action of bromine
and caustic potash on which compound?
a) Acetamide
d) b) Propionamide
View Answer c) Formamide
d) Methyl cyanide
Answer: a
View Answer
Explanation: This reaction is an intramolecular Claisen
condensation, favours the formation of the more stable 5- Answer: b
or 6-membered rings, as the ring stain in 5 and 6 Explanation: Ethylamine can be prepared by the action of
membered rings are less and 6-membered rings are more bromine and caustic potash on propioamide.
stable than 5 membered. But in case bridge ring is present CH3 – CH2 – CO – NH2 + Br2 + 4KOH → CH3CH2NH2+ K2CO3 +
which is unstable as compared to 5 and 6 membered ring. 2KBr + 2H2O
propioamide

4. Reduction of nitroalkanes yields which compound?

NITROGEN CONTAINING ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
a) Acid
PREPARATION OF AMINES – 1 b) Alcohol
c) Amine
1. The amine formed from an amide by means of bromine d) Diazo compounds
and alkali has how many number of carbon atoms? View Answer
a) Same number of C atoms as that of amide
b) One less C atom than that of amide Answer: b
c) One more C atom than that of amide Explanation: Reduction of nitroalkanes yields amines, as
d) Two more C atoms than that of amide shown in below reaction.
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: The amine formed from an amide by means 5. What is the name of the reaction when acetamide
of bromine and alkali has one less C atom than that of changes into methylamine?
amide. a) Hofmann bromamide reaction
b) Hofmann reaction
c) Friedel-Craft’s reaction
d) Hinsberg reaction
View Answer
2. The compound X is which of the following?
Answer: a
Explanation: When an amide is treated with bromine in an
a) CH3CONH2
b) CH3CH2NH2 aqueous or ethanolic solution of sodium hydroxide,
c) C2H6 degradation of amide takes place leading to the formation
of primary amine. This reaction involving degradation of
d) CH3NHCH3
View Answer amide and is popularly known as Hoffmann bromamide
degradation reaction.
Answer: b
6. When methyl iodide is heated with ammonia, what is
Explanation: Reduction of nitriles leads to formation of
the product obtained?
a) Methylamine
b) Dimethylamine d) Oxime
c) Trimethylamine View Answer
d) A mixture of the above three amines
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: Nitriles of reduction gives amine and on
Answer: d hydrolysis gives carboxylic acid.
Explanation: When methyl iodide is heated with ammonia,
the product obtained is mixture of methylamine,
dimethylamine, trimethylamine.

10. When ethanol is mixed with ammonia and passed over

alumina the compound formed is which compound?
7. The Hinsberg’s method is used for which of the a) C2H5NH2
following? b) C2H4
a) Preparation of primary amines c) C2H5OC2H5
b) Preparation of secondary amines d) CH3OCH3
c) Preparation of tertiary amines View Answer
d) Separation of amine mixtures
View Answer Answer: a
Explanation: When ethanol is mixed with ammonia and
Answer: d passed over alumina the compound formed is amine.
Explanation: The Hinsberg reaction is a test for the
detection of primary, secondary and tertiary amines. In
this test, the amine is shaken well with Hinsberg reagent in
the presence of aqueous alkali (either KOH or NaOH). A
reagent containing an aqueous sodium hydroxide solution PREPARATION OF AMINES – 2
and benzenesulfonyl chloride is added to a substrate.
1. Which of the following reaction does not form amines?
8. Which one of the following compound gives a secondary
amine on reduction?
a) Nitromethane
b) Nitrobenzene
c) Methyl isocyanide
d) Methyl cyanide
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Methyl isocyanide gives a secondary amine Answer: c
on reduction. Explanation: Nitrile gives carboxylic acid on hydrolysis and
amines on reduction.

9. In the given reaction what is the X?

2. Starting from propanoic acid, the following reactions
were carried out, what is the compound Z?

a) Isonitrile
a) CH3−CH2−Br
b) Nitrile
b) CH3−CH2−NH2
c) Nitrite
c) CH3-CH2-COBr
d) CH3−CH2−CH2−NH2 Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: Gabriel phthalimide synthesis is preferred for
synthesising primary amines. Phthalimide is alkylated with
Answer: b alkyl or benzyl halide and then hydrolysed or
Explanation: Starting from propanoic acid, the following hydrazinolysis to get pure primary amine.
reactions were carried out, the compound is ethylamine.
6. What will be the product of the following reaction?

a) Propanamine
b) N-methylpropaneamine
3. In the given equation, what is the final product C? c) N, N-dimethylpropanemamine
d) Ethyl amine
View Answer

a) Ammonium acetate Answer: a

b) Acetamide Explanation: Amides yield primary amines on reduction by
c) Amino methane lithium aluminium hydride.
d) Ethanal
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Carboxylic acid with PCl5 forms acid chloride
and acid chloride reacts with NH3 to give amide which on 7. What will be the product of the following reaction?
reduction gives amine.

4. Which of the following reactions will not give primary

amine? a) Propanamine
a) CH3CONH2 + KOH.Br2 b) N-methylpropaneamine
b) CH3CN + LiAlH4 c) N, N-dimethylpropanemamine
c) CH3NC + LiAlH4 d) Ethyl amine
d) CH3CONH2 + LiAlH4 View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: c Explanation: N‐substituted Amides on reduction by lithium
Explanation: Nitrile on reduction gives secondary amine. aluminum hydride yield secondary amines.

5. Gabriel’s phthalimide synthesis is used for the

preparation of which amine?
a) Primary aromatic amine 8. What will be the product of the following reaction?
b) Secondary amine
c) Primary aliphatic amine
d) Tertiary amine
View Answer
a) Propanamine PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF AMINES
b) N-methylpropanamine
c) N, N-dimethylpropanmamine 1. Which of the following compound is expected to be
d) Ethyl amine most basic?
View Answer a) Aniline
b) Methylamine
Answer: b c) Hydroxylamine
Explanation: N, N‐disubstituted Amides on reduction by d) Ethylamine
lithium aluminum hydride yield tertiary amines. View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: Alkyl groups are electron donating (EDG). So,
the alkyl group stabilizes the positive charge on the
attached nitrogen atom.
9. Which type of amine is produced by reaction of ketones
with primary amines, followed by reduction? 2. A solution of methyl amine shows which type of
a) Secondary Aromatic amine property with litmus paper?
b) N-substituted amine a) Turns blue litmus red
c) N, N-disubstituted amine b) Turns red litmus blue
d) Primary aromatic amine c) Does not affect red or blue litmus
View Answer d) Bleaches litmus
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: N‐substituted amines are produced by Answer: b
reaction of ketones with primary amines, followed by Explanation: Methyl amine changes red litmus blue, this
reduction. litmus paper test shows basic nature of methyl amine.

3. Which of the following statement is true about methyl

amine?
a) Methyl amine is slightly acidic
b) Methyl amine is less basic than NH3
c) Methyl amine is stronger base than NH3
10. Which type of amine is produced by reaction of d) Methyl amine forms salts with alkali
ketones with secondary amines, followed by reduction? View Answer
a) Secondary Aromatic amine
Answer: c
b) N-substituted amine
Explanation: Presence of alkyl group increases electron
c) N, N-disubstituted amine
density on nitrogen atom due to +I effect. Thus, basic
d) Primary aromatic amine
nature increases.
View Answer
4. By the presence of a halogen atom in the ring, what is
Answer: c
the effect of this on basic properties of aniline?
Explanation: N, N‐disubstituted amines can be produced
a) Increased
by reaction of 2° amines with ketones followed by
b) Decreased
reduction.
c) Unchanged
d) Doubled
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: By the presence of a halogen atom in the
ring, basic properties of aniline is increased because it is
more electronegative so donation of electron will be easy, c) C6H5NH2 > C2H5NH2 > CH3NH2 > NH3
so basicity increases. d) CH3NH2 > C2H5NH2 > C6H5NH2 > NH3
View Answer
5. What is the characteristic smell of liquid amines?
a) Fish like smell Answer: b
b) Rotten egg smell Explanation: All of the amines are more basic than
c) Fruity smell ammonia, but primary and secondary amines are the most
d) Bitter almond smell basic.
View Answer
9. Unpleasant smelling carbylamines are formed by
Answer: a heating alkali and chloroform with which of the following?
Explanation: Amines possess a characteristic ammonia a) Any amine
smell, liquid amines have a distinctive “fishy” smell. b) Any aliphatic amine
c) Any aromatic amine
6. Which of the following have less melting point than d) Any primary amine
amine? View Answer
a) Alcohol
b) Phosphine Answer: d
c) Carboxylic acid Explanation: The unpleasant smell is due to formation of
d) Ether isocyanide.
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Hydrogen bonding significantly influences the
10. Which statement is an incorrect statement?
properties of primary and secondary amines. Thus, the
a) Amines form hydrogen bond
melting points and boiling points of amines are higher than
b) Ethyl amine has higher boiling point than propane
those of the corresponding phosphines, but generally
c) Methyl amine is more basic than ammonia
lower than those of the corresponding alcohols and
d) Dimethyl amine is less basic than methyl amine
carboxylic acids, ether.
View Answer
7. Which of the following amine has highest boiling point?
Answer: d
a) Butyl amine
Explanation: In methyl amine only one electron releasing
b) Diethylamine
group is present but in dimethyl amine two electron
c) Triethylamine
releasing groups are present which increase the basicity
d) Dipropylamine
higher in dimethyl amine.
View Answer
11. Which of the following is most basic?
Answer: d
a) C6H5NH2
Explanation: Primary and secondary amines have higher
b) (CH3)2NH
boiling because they can engage in intermolecular
c) (CH3)3N
hydrogen bonding. The boiling points of tertiary amines,
d) NH3
which cannot engage in hydrogen bonding because they
View Answer
have no hydrogen atom on the nitrogen atom, and d is
correct option because it has more molar mass than other Answer: b
primary, secondary and tertiary amine, more +I effect of Explanation: In dimethyl amine two electron releasing
propyl group. groups are present which increase the basicity higher in
dimethyl amine.
8. What is the correct decreasing order of the basic
character of the three amines and ammonia? 12. If methyl is alkyl group, then which order of basicity is
a) NH3 > CH3NH2 > C2H5NH2 > C6H5NH2 correct?
b) C2H5NH2 > CH3NH2 > NH3 > C6H5NH2 a) R2NH > RNH2 > R3N > NH3
b) R2NH > R3N > RNH2 > NH3 effect), due to increase in electron density on N atom. As a
c) RNH2 > NH3 > R2NH > R3N rule, the basicity of 3° amine should be more than that of
d) NH3 > RNH2 > R2NH > R3N 2° amine, but actually it is found to be lesser than 2°
View Answer amines. This is due to more solvation by water in
secondary amine. Hence the correct order of basicity is:
Answer: a (CH3)2NH > (CH3)3N > CH3NH2.
Explanation: Alkyl groups are electron donating (EDG), so
they stabilize the positively charge ammonium ions, i.e.,
the methyl ammonium ion is more stable than the parent
ammonium ion because the alkyl group stabilizes the CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF AMINES – 1
positive charge on the attached nitrogen atom. In dimethyl 1. Which of the following is converted into an alcohol on
amine two electron releasing groups are present which treatment with HNO2?
increase the basicity higher in dimethyl amine. a) Methyl amine
13. Among the following, which one is the strongest base? b) Aniline
a) C6H5NH2 c) Dimethyl amine
b) p−NO2C6H4NH2 d) Triethyl amine
c) m−NO2−C6H4NH2 View Answer
d) C6H5CH2NH2 Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: Methyl amine is converted into an alcohol on
Answer: d treatment with HNO2.
Explanation: Alkyl groups are electron donating (EDG) and
NO2 group is electron withdrawing group. So, the alkyl
group stabilizes the positive charge on the attached
2. The action of nitrous acid on ethyl amine gives which of
nitrogen atom.
the following?
14. Which of the following is true characteristic feature of a) Ethane
aniline? b) Ammonia
a) Colourless solid c) Ethyl acohol
b) Brown coloured solid d) Nitroethane
c) Colourless liquid View Answer
d) Brown coloured liquid
Answer: c
View Answer
Explanation: The action of nitrous acid on ethyl amine
Answer: c gives ethyl alcohol, along with nitrogen and water.
Explanation: Pure aniline is a colourless liquid, but the CH3CH2NH2 + HNO2 → CH3CH2OH + N2 + H2O
colour of aniline changes to dark brown on storage due to
3. Indicate which nitrogen compound amongst the
atmospheric oxidation.
following would undergo Hofmann’s reaction (i.e. reaction
15. The correct order of basicity of amines in water is with Br2 and strong KOH) to furnish the primary amine.
which of the following?
a) (CH3)2NH > (CH3)3N > CH3NH2
a)
b) CH3NH2 > (CH3)2NH > (CH3)3N
c) (CH3)3N > (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2
d) (CH3)3N > CH3NH2 > (CH3)2NH
View Answer b)

Answer: a
Explanation: Basicity of amines increase with increase in c)
number of −CH3 groups (or any group which cause +I
 Answer: d
Explanation: Nitroso amines (R2N−N=O) are soluble in
d)
water. On heating them with concentrated H2SO4 they
View Answer
give secondary amines, this reaction is called as
Answer: c Liebermann’s nitroso reaction.
Explanation: This reaction is Hoffman degradation of
7. Ethyl amine undergoes oxidation in the presence of
amide.
KMnO4 to form which compound?
R – CONH2 + Br2 + 4KOH → R – NH2 +2KBr + k2CO3+ 2H2O.
a) An acid
4. Aniline reacts with acetaldehyde to form which of the b) An alcohol
following? c) An aldehyde
a) Schiff’s base d) A nitrogen oxide
b) Carbylamine View Answer
c) Immine
Answer: c
d) Diazonium salt
Explanation: Ethyl amine undergoes oxidation in the
View Answer
presence of KMnO4 to form an aldehyde.
Answer: c
Explanation: Aniline reacts with acetaldehyde to form
Schiff base.
8. Reaction of primary amines with aldehyde yields which
of the following compound?
a) Amides
b) Aldimines
c) Nitriles
d) Nitro compounds
View Answer
5. p-chloroaniline and anilinium hydrochloride can be
distinguished by which test? Answer: b
a) Sandmeyer reaction Explanation: Reaction of primary amines with aldehyde
b) NaHCO3 yields aldimines.
c) AgNO3 R – CH2 – NH2 + O = CH – R → R – CH2 – N = CH – R + H2O
d) Carbylamine test 1oamine aldehyde Aldimine
View Answer
9. When primary amines are treated with HCl, the product
Answer: b obtained is which of the following?
Explanation: Anilinium hydrochloride is an acid salt and a) An alcohol
liberates CO2 from b) A cyanide
NaHCO3. But p-chloro aniline is basic not acidic it does not c) An amide
liberate CO2. p-chloro aniline does not contain ionic d) Ammonium salt
chlorine to it does not give white ppt with AgNO3. View Answer
6. Nitroso amines (R2N−N=O) are soluble in water. On Answer: d
heating them with concentrated H2SO4 they give Explanation: When primary amines are treated with HCl,
secondary amines. What is this reaction called as? the product obtained is ammonium salt.
a) Perkin’s reaction CH3 – CH2 – NH2 + HCl → CH3CH2 – NH3+Cl–
b) Fittig’s reaction
c) Sandmeyer’s reaction 10. Primary amines can be distinguished from secondary
d) Liebermann’s nitroso reaction and tertiary amines by reacting with which of the
View Answer following?
a) Chloroform and alcoholic KOH
b) Methyl iodide 14. When an organic compound was treated with sodium
c) Chloroform alone nitrite and hydrochloric acid in the ice cold, nitrogen gas
d) Zinc dust was evolved copiously. What is the compound?
View Answer a) A nitrocompound
b) A primary amine
Answer: a c) An aliphatic primary amine
Explanation: Primary amine reacts with CHCl3 and alc. KOH d) An aromatic primary amine
to form isocyanide while secondary and tertiary amines do View Answer
not react.
Answer: c
11. When chloroform reacts with ethyl amine in presence Explanation: When an aliphatic primary amine was treated
of alcoholic KOH, the compound formed is which of the with sodium nitrite and hydrochloric acid in the ice cold,
following? nitrogen gas was evolved.
a) Ethyl cyanide
b) Ethyl isocyanide 15. Primary amines react with nitrous acid to yield which
c) Formic acid of the following?
d) An amide a) Insoluble nitrite salts
View Answer b) Yellow oily layer
c) Nitrogen gas
Answer: b d) Azo dye
Explanation: When chloroform reacts with ethyl amine in View Answer
presence of alcoholic KOH, the compound formed is ethyl
isocyanide. 16. The reaction of HNO2 with ‘A’ gives quaternary
ammonium salt. A is which of the following?
12. The compound which on reaction with aqueous nitrous a) Methyl amine
acid on HNO2 at low temperature produces an oily b) Dimethyl amine
nitrosoamine is which of the following? c) Trimethyl amine
a) Diethylamine d) Aniline
b) Ethylamine View Answer
c) Aniline
d) Methylamine Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: The reaction of HNO2 with trimethyl amine
gives quaternary ammonium salt.
Answer: a R3N + HONO → R3N . HONO
Explanation: The compound which on reaction with
aqueous nitrous acid on HNO2 at low temperature
produces an oily nitrosoamine is diethylamine.
(C2H5)2NH + (aq.)HONO → (C2H5)2N – N = O + H2O CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF AMINES – 2

13. Aniline on treatment with excess of bromine water 1. A primary amine can be converted to an alcohol by the
which of the following? action of which of the following?
a) Aniline bromide a) Alkali
b) o-bromoaniline b) Nitrous acid
c) p-bromoaniline c) Reducing agent
d) 2, 4, 6-tribromoaniline d) Oxidizing agent
View Answer View Answer

Answer: d Answer: b
Explanation: Aniline on treatment with excess of bromine Explanation: A primary amine can be converted to an
water is a nucleophilic substitution reaction and will form alcohol by the action nitrous acid.
2, 4, 6-tribromoaniline. R – NH2 + HNO2 → R – OH + N2 + H2O
2. The amine which can react with C6H5−SO2−Cl to form a Answer: b
product insoluble in alkali shall be, is which of the Explanation: Reaction of aniline with benzaldehyde is a
following? condensation reaction. Aniline react by initially attacking
a) Primary amine the carbonyl carbon, followed by hydrogen transfers to
b) Secondary amine give an amine where the nitrogen is bonded to a carbon
c) Tertiary amine that also contains a hydroxy group. Under acidic
d) Both primary and secondary amines conditions, the hydroxyl group is protonated, followed by
View Answer loss of water to give the conjugate acid of the observed
product(imine). The condensation step to give water is
Answer: b acid catalyzed and is the rate-determining step of the
Explanation: C6H5SO2Cl is called Hinsberg’s reagent they sequence.
react with sec amine to form a product in soluble in
alkalies. This reaction used to separate primary, secondary 6. In the reaction, what is the compound C6H5N=CHC6H5is
and tertiary amine from their mixture. known as?
C6H5CHO + C6H5NH2 → C6H5N=HCC6H5 + H2O
3. A mixture of benzene and aniline can be separated by a) Aldol
which of the following? b) Schiffs reagent
a) Hot water c) Schiffs base
b) dil. HCl d) Benedict reagent
c) dil. NaOH View Answer
d) Alcohol
View Answer Answer: c
Explanation: Aniline react by initially attacking the
Answer: b carbonyl carbon (benzaldehyde), followed by hydrogen
Explanation: A mixture of benzene and aniline can be transfers to give an amine where the nitrogen is bonded to
separated by dil. HCl. The mixture is treated with dil. HCL. a carbon that also contains a hydroxy group. Under acidic
Only aniline dissolves. It is then shaken with ether. conditions, the hydroxyl group is protonated, followed by
Nitrobenzene goes into ether layer. It is separated. loss of water to give the conjugate acid of the observed
4. An organic amino compound reacts with aqueous product(imine). Hydrogen ion transfer then gives the Schiff
nitrous acid at low temperature to produce an oily nitroso base product. The condensation step to give water is acid
catalyzed and is the rate-determining step of the
amine. What is this compound?
sequence.
a) CH3NH2
b) CH3CH2NH2 7. Electrophilic substitution of aniline with bromine in
c) CH3CH2NH.CH2CH3 presence of gacial acetic acid gives which of the following?
d) (CH3CH2)3 a) 1, 4, 6-tribromo aniline
View Answer b) 2, 4, 6-tribromo aniline
Answer: b c) 4-bromo aniline
Explanation: Secondary amines gives oily nitrosamine with d) 3-bromo aniline
View Answer
nitrous acid.
(CH3CH2)2NH + HONO → (CH3CH2)2N.NO + H2O Answer: c
5. Reaction of aniline with benzaldehyde is which type of Explanation: In water,bromine is ionised up to greater
extent to form large number of bromonium ions.Hence
reaction?
a) Polymerisation Br+ ions attack on aniline from either side to form 2,4,6,-
b) Condensation tribromoaniline. In order to obtain monobromo aniline,
c) Addition reaction is carried out in presence of acetic acid. In glacial
d) Substitution acetic acid, bromine is ionised to lesser extent and hence
View Answer relatively less number of bromonium ions are formed.Thus
interference of water is ceased.
8. During acetylation of amines what is replaced by acetyl d) o-Bromoacetanilide
groups? View Answer
a) Hydrogen atom attached to nitrogen atom
b) One or more hydrogen atoms attached to carbon atom Answer: a
c) One or more hydrogen atoms attached to nitrogen atom Explanation: p-Bromoaniline is formed. For the protection
d) Hydrogen atoms attached to either carbon atom or of p- position for bromination, reaction of aniline with
nitrogen atom acetic anhydride is done and followed by bromination of
View Answer the product (acetanilide). And then removal of protective
group in p-bromoacetanilide is done by hydrolysis, and p-
Answer: c Bromoaniline is formed.
Explanation: During acetylation of amines One or more
hydrogen atoms attached to nitrogen atom are removed.

12. Aniline reacts with which of these to form Schiff base?

9. Ethyl amine on acetylation gives which of the following? a) Acetic acid
b) Benzaldehyde
a) N-ethyl acetamide
c) Acetone
b) Acetamide
d) NH3
c) Methyl acetamide
View Answer
d) Propyl acetamide
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: Aniline reacts with benzaldehyde and forms
Answer: a
Schiff’s base (benzal aniline) or anils.
Explanation: Ethyl amine on acetylation gives N-ethyl
acetamide.
CH3CH2NH2 + CH3COCl → CH3CH2NHCOCH3 + HCl
13. Reaction of cyclohexanone with dimethylamine in the
10. p-chloro aniline and anilinium hydrogen chloride can
presence of catalytic amount of an acid forms a compound
be distinguished by which of the following?
if water during the reaction is continuously removed.
a) Sandmaeyer reaction
What is the compound formed is generally known as?
b) Carbyl amine reaction
a) A Schiff’s base
c) Hinsberg’s reaction
b) An enamine
d) AgNO3
View Answer c) An imine
d) An amine
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: Anilinium hydrogen chloride produces
Answer: b
chloride ion which gives white precipitate with AgNO3. In
Explanation: Reaction of cyclohexanone with
fact, anilium chloride is a part of aniline.
dimethylamine in the presence of catalytic amount of an
11. Identify the product Z in the following reaction. acid forms a compound if water during the reaction is
continuously removed. This compound is known as
enamine.

14. Nitration of aniline also gives m-nitro aniline, in strong

a) p-Bromoaniline acidic medium because of which of the following reasons?
b) p -Bromoacetophenone a) In electrophilic substitution reaction amino group is
c) o-Bromoacetophenone meta directive
b) Inspite of substituents nitro group always goes to m-
position Answer: a
c) In strong acidic medium, nitration of aniline is a Explanation: Aromatic primary amines cannot be prepared
nucleophic substitution reaction by this method because aryl halides do not undergo
d) In strong acidic medium aniline present as anilinium ion nucleophilic substitution with the anion formed by
View Answer phthalimide.

Answer: b 3. What are A and B in the given sequence, respectively?

Explanation: The reason for this is that, in acidic condition
protonation of −NH2 group gives anilinium ion (+NH3),
which is of deactivating nature and of m-directive nature.

15. The reductive amination of an aldehyde (e.g. the

a) Aldehyde, nitro compound
reaction of propanal with ethylamine) can be carried out in
b) Nitro compound, phenyl amine
the laboratory using which of the following as a reducing
c) Phenyl amine, nitro compound
agent?
d) Phenthalene, phenyl amine
a) NaBH3CN
View Answer
b) LiAlH4
c) BH3 Answer: b
d) NaBH4 Explanation: Nitrobenzene is reduced to phenyl
View Answer ammonium(A) ions using a mixture of tin and
concentrated hydrochloric acid. The phenylamine(B) is
Answer: a
formed together with a complicated mixture of tin
Explanation: The reductive amination of an aldehyde (e.g.
compounds from reactions between the sodium hydroxide
the reaction of propanal with ethylamine) can be carried
solution and the complex tin ions formed.
out in the laboratory by using NaBH3CN reagent.
4. Which reducing agent is used for the reduction of nitro
compound to phenyl amine?
PREPARATION OF AROMATIC AMINES a) LiAlH4
b) Sn/HCl
1. Aniline is usually purified by which of the following c) Na/alcohol
method? d) H2/Ni
a) Steam distillation View Answer
b) Simple distillation
c) Vacuum distillation Answer: b
d) Extraction with a solvent Explanation: Aromatic amines were prepared in good
View Answer yields by a novel reduction of aromatic nitro compounds
with tin metal in hydrochloric acid.
Answer: a
Explanation: Aniline is usually purified by Steam
distillation. The separation is long, tedious and potentially
5. What is the known name of the reaction given below?
dangerous – involving steam distillation, solvent extraction
and a final distillation.

2. Which of the following method cannot be used for

preparation of aromatic amine?
a) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis (where, X=Cl, Br, I, OTf; R2=Alkyl, aryl, H; R3=alkyl, aryl)
b) Reduction of nitro compound a) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis
c) Reduction of nitrile with LiAl4 b) Buchwald-Hartwig Reaction
d) Decarboxylation of amino acids c) Chan-Lam coupling
View Answer
d) Ullmann reaction d) aqueous
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: b
Explanation: The Buchwald–Hartwig amination is a Explanation: Various anilines are prepared by treatment of
chemical reaction used in organic chemistry for the functionalized aryl boronic acids with H2N-OSO3H (HSA) as
synthesis of carbon–nitrogen bonds via the palladium- a common, inexpensive source of electrophilic nitrogen,
catalyzed cross-coupling of amines with aryl halides. under basic aqueous conditions.

6. What is the known name of the reaction given below?

9. What will be the product for the following reaction?

a) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis
b) Buchwald-Hartwig Reaction
c) Chan-Lam coupling
d) Ullmann reaction
View Answer
a) secondary aliphatic amine
Answer: d b) primary aromatic amine
Explanation: The Ullmann reaction or Ullmann coupling is c) tertiary aromatic amine
a coupling reaction between aryl halides and copper and d) secondary aromatic amine
substituted ammonia to form aromatic amines. The View Answer
traditional version of the Ullmann reaction requires harsh
Answer: c
reaction conditions, and the reaction has a reputation for
Explanation: this reaction is N- arylation of acyclic
erratic yields.
secondary amine, in which CuI and DMPAO are catalyst.
7. What is the known name of the reaction given below?

a) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis

b) Buchwald-Hartwig Reaction
c) Chan-Lam coupling 10. In the direct amination of alkyl and aryl pinacol
d) Ullmann reaction boronates to form aromatic amine, which of the following
View Answer is used as reagent with pinacol?
a) Aryl boric acid
Answer: c b) Copper oxide
Explanation: This reaction allows aryl carbon-heteroatom c) Pd(OAc)2
bond formation via an oxidative coupling of boronic acids, d) Lithiated methoxyamine
stannanes or siloxanes with N-H containing compounds in View Answer
air. The reaction is induced by a stoichiometric amount of
copper(II) or a catalytic amount of copper catalyst which is Answer: d
reoxidized by atmospheric oxygen or another primary Explanation: The direct amination of alkyl and aryl pinacol
oxidant. boronates with lithiated methoxyamine provides aliphatic
and aromatic amines, stereospecifically, and without
8. Which type medium is required for the formation of preactivation of the boronate substrate.
aniline by reaction of aryl boric acid and HAS?
a) Acidic
b) Basic aqueous
c) Neutral dry
 d) Esterification reaction
View Answer
BENZENE DIAZONIUM CHLORIDE – 1
Answer: c
1. What is the general formula of Diazonium salt? Explanation: The aryl group can be coupled to another
a) RN2+X– using aryldiazonium salts. For example, treatment of
b) RN+ benzene diazonium chloride with benzene (an aromatic
c) RXI compound) in the presence of sodium hydroxide gives
d) RN2+HSO–2 diphenyl. This reaction is known as the Gomberg–
View Answer Bachmann reaction.
Answer: a 5. What is the known name of the given reaction?
Explanation: Diazonium compounds or diazonium salts are [C6H5N+2]BF−4 → C6H5F + BF3 + N2
a group of organic compounds sharing a common a) Gattermanns reaction
functional group R−N2+X– where R can be any organic b) Sandmeyers reaction
group, such as an alkyl or an aryl, and X is an inorganic or c) Dehydrogenation reaction
organic anion, such as a halogen. d) Balz-Schiemann reaction
2. What is the known name of the given reaction? View Answer
C6H5N+2 + CuCl → C6H5Cl + N2 + Cu+ Answer: d
a) Gattermanns reaction Explanation: Fluorobenzene is produced by thermal
b) Sandmeyers reaction decomposition of benzene diazonium fluoroborate. The
c) Dehydrogenation reaction conversion is called the Balz-Schiemann reaction.
d) Esterification reaction
View Answer 6. What is the known name of the given reaction?
[C6H5N+2]Cl− + ArCH=CHCO2H → ArC=C−C6H5 + N2 + CO2 +
Answer: b HCl
Explanation: Benzene diazonium chloride heated with a) Gattermanns reaction
cuprous chloride or cuprous bromide respectively b) Sandmeyers reaction
dissolved in HCl or HBr yield chlorobenzene or c) Meerwein reaction
Bromobenzene, respectively. d) Balz-Schiemann reaction
3. What is the known name of the given reaction? View Answer
C6H5N+2 + CuX → C6H5X + N2 + Cu+ Answer: a
a) Gattermanns reaction Explanation: Benzenediazonium chloride reacts with
b) Sandmeyers reaction compounds containing activated double bonds to
c) Dehydrogenation reaction produces phenylated products. The reaction is called the
d) Esterification reaction Meerwein arylation.
View Answer
7. Benzene diazonium chloride when reacts with
Answer: a hypophosphorus acid produces which of the following
Explanation: In the Gatterman reaction, benzene compound?
diazonium chloride is warmed with copper powder and a) Benzene
HCl or HBr to produce chlorobenzene and bromobenzene b) Phenyl phosphate
respectively. c) Phenol
4. What is the known name of the given reaction? d) Phenyl isocyanide
[C6H5N+2]Cl− + C6H6 → C6H5−C6H5 + N2 + HCl View Answer
a) Gattermanns reaction Answer: a
b) Sandmeyers reaction Explanation: Arene diazonium cations are reduced by
c) Gomberg–Bachmann reaction
hypophosphorous acid or sodium stannite gives benzene: BENZENE DIAZONIUM CHLORIDE – 2
[C6H5N+2]Cl− + H3PO2 + H2O → C6H6 + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl
1. Replacement of diazo group by other groups is helpful in
8. p-amino azo benzene is obtained by treating diazonium preparing those substituted aromatic compounds which
chloride with which of the following compound? cannot be prepared which type of reaction?
a) Benzene a) Direct elimination
b) Aniline b) Addition reaction
c) Phenol c) Direct substitution
d) Benzoic acid d) Replacement reaction
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: c
Explanation: p-amino azo benzene is obtained by treating Explanation: Replacement of diazo group by other groups
diazonium chloride with aniline. The reactions are is helpful in preparing those substituted aromatic
specifically acid catalyzed and involve pre‐equilibrium compounds which cannot be prepared by direct
formation of amine and diazonium salt followed by substitution.
rate‐limiting attack of the diazonium ion at a C‐atom
(C‐coupling) to give the corresponding aminoazo 2. What happens when benzene diazonium chloride is
compounds. treated with potassium cyanide in presence of Cu powder?
a) Benzophenone
9. When hypophosphorous acid is treated with diazonium b) Methyl isocyanide
salts, it is reduced to which of the following compound? c) Acetonitrile
a) Arene d) Benzonitrile
b) Methane View Answer
c) Ethyl alcohol
d) Amines Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: By treating diazonium salts with cuprous
cyanide or KCN and copper powder it forms aryl nitrile.
Answer: a Illustrative is the preparation of benzonitrile using the
Explanation: When hypophosphorous acid is treated with reagent cuprous cyanide: C6H5N+2 + CuCN → C6H5CN + Cu+
diazonium salts it is reduced to arene. Arene diazonium + N2.
cations are reduced by hypophosphorous acid or sodium
stannite gives benzene: 3. By treating diazonium salts with cuprous cyanide or KCN
[C6H5N+2]Cl− + H3PO2 + H2O → C6H6 + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl. and copper powder it forms which of the following
compound?
10. Which of the following amine will form stable a) Citric acid
diazonium salt at 273-283 K? b) Benzoic acid
a) C6H5NH2 c) Aryl nitrile
b) C6H5N(CH3)2 d) Oxalic acid
c) C2H5NH2 View Answer
d) C6H5CH2NH2
View Answer Answer: c
Explanation: By treating diazonium salts with cuprous
Answer: a cyanide or KCN and copper powder it forms aryl nitrile.
Explanation: Diazonium salts are prepared by treatment of The cyano group usually cannot be introduced by
aromatic amines i.e. aniline (C6H5NH2) with nitrous acid nucleophilic substitution of haloarenes, but such
and additional acid. Usually the nitrous acid is generated in compounds can be easily prepared from diazonium salts.
situ (in the same flask) from sodium nitrite and the excess
mineral acid. 4. Benzene diazonium chloride forms orange red dye with
which of the following compound?
a) Nitrophenol
b) Benzophenol
c) Resorcinol
d) Methanol
View Answer

Answer: c a) C6H5CH2NH2
Explanation: Benzene diazonium chloride forms orange b) C6H5NHCH2CH3
red dye with resorcinol, Reaction of benzene diazonium c) C6H5NHOH
chloride with resocinol in basic medium is a coupling d) C6H5CH2OH
reaction,in which p-hydroxyazobenzene is obtained .Which View Answer
is nothing but orange dye.
Answer: d
5. Which of the following is compound A for following Explanation: First of all, diazonium will be formed and then
sequence of reaction gave benzoic acid benzoic acid? it will show Sandmeyer reaction with CuCN and then
reduction of cyanide and oxidation to benzyl alcohol.

a) Nitrobenzene
b) Aniline 8. Azo dye is prepared by the coupling of phenol and which
c) Benzaldehyde of the following compound?
d) Amides a) Diazonium chloride
View Answer b) o-nitro aniline
c) Benzoic acid
Answer: b
d) Chlorobenzene
Explanation: In the following sequence reaction between
View Answer
aniline and NaNO2/HCl will form diazonium salt and with
KCN it will form cyanide and at last carboxylic acid will be Answer: a
formed. Explanation: The most widely practiced reaction of
diazonium salts is azo coupling. In this process, the
6. In the series of reaction, what are X and Y are
diazonium compound is attacked by, i.e., coupled to,
respectively?
electron-rich substrates. When the coupling partners are
arenes such as anilines and phenols, the process is an
example of electrophilic aromatic substitution.
a) C6H5−N=N−C6H5, C6H5N+2Cl–
b) C6H5N+2Cl–, C6H5−N=N−C6H5 9. Identify the product in following order when 3,4,5-
c) C6H5N+2Cl–, C6H5NO2 Tribromoaniline undergoes diazotisation followed by
d) C6H5NO2, C6H6 attack of H3PO2?
View Answer a) 3, 4,5-Tribromobenzene
b) 1, 2, 3-Tribromobenzene
Answer: c
c) 2, 4, 6-Tribromobenzene
Explanation: In the following sequence reaction between
d) 3, 4, 5-Tribromo nitro benzene
aniline and NaNO2/HCl will form diazonium salt and with
View Answer
HNO2 nitrobenzene will be formed.
Answer: a
Explanation: When 3,4,5-Tribromoaniline undergoes
7. Aniline in a set of reactions yielded a product D. The diazotisation followed by attack of H3PO2, 1, 2, 3-
structure of product D would be
Tribromobenzene is formed. nitrite (NaNO3) replaces an alkyl halide. In the so-called Ter
Meer reaction (1876) named after Edmund ter Meer.

3. In Ter Meer reaction, a method of preparation of nitro

compound, which of the following used as reagent?
a) HNO2
b) HNO3
10. When diazonium salt solution is treated with KI, it c) NaNO2
forms which of the following compound?
d) RX (alkyl halide)
a) Bromobenzene View Answer
b) Iodobenzene
c) Phenol Answer: c
d) Acid Explanation: In Ter Meer reaction, which is a nucleophilic
View Answer aliphatic substitution, sodium nitrite (NaNO2) is used as
reactant which replaces an alkyl halide.
Answer: b
Explanation: Iodine is not easily introduced into the 4. What will be the product if 1,1-halonitroalkane
benzene ring directly. However, it can be introduced by undergoes nucleophilic aliphatic substitution reaction in
treating aryldiazonium cations with potassium iodide: presence of ethanol?
C6H5N+2 + KI → C6H5I + K+ + N2. a) 1,1-dinitro dimer
b) 1,2-dinitro dimer
c) 1.-nitro compound
PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS d) 2-nitrocompound
View Answer
1. Which of the following is used as a reactant for the
nitration of benzene to form nitrobenzene? Answer: a
a) HNO2 Explanation: 1,1-dinitro dimer along with sodium chloride
b) HNO3 will be the products if 1,1-halonitroalkane undergoes
c) Mixture of HNO2 AND HNO3 nucleophilic aliphatic substitution reaction in presence of
d) Mixture of HNO2 and H2SO4 ethanol.
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Nitration is achieved using a mixture of nitric
acid and sulfuric acid, which produce the nitronium ion 5. What will be the product if 1,1-halonitroalkane
(NO2+), which the electrophile. undergoes nucleophilic aliphatic substitution reaction in
presence of potassiam hydroxide?
2. What is the name of the following reaction?
a) 1,1-dinitro dimer
b) 1,2-dinitro dimer
c) 1.-nitro compound
d) 2-nitrocompound
a) Ter meer reaction View Answer
b) Riemer tiemann reaction
c) Perkin condensation Answer: b
d) Ullmann reaction Explanation: 1,1-dinitro dimer along with sodium chloride
View Answer will be the products if 1,1-halonitroalkane undergoes
nucleophilic aliphatic substitution reaction in presence of
Answer: a potassium hydroxide. Aqueous KOHKOH is alkaline in
Explanation: In nucleophilic aliphatic substitution, sodium nature i.e. it dissociates to produce a hydroxide ion. These
hydroxide ions act as a strong nucleophile and replace the a) 1) HNO3/H2SO4, 2) CH3CH2CH2Cl/AlCl3
halogen atom in an alkyl halide. b) 1) CH3CH2CH2Cl/AlCl3, 2) HNO3/H2SO4
c) 1) CH3CH2COCl/AlCl3, 2) HNO3/H2SO4, 3) H2NNH2/NaOH
6. Which of the following is not a natural occurring nitro d) 1) HNO3/H2SO4, 2) CH3CH2COCl/AlCl3, 3) H2NNH2/NaOH
compound? View Answer
a) Chloramphenicol
b) 2-Nitrophenol Answer: d
c) 3-Nitropropionic acid Explanation: Friedel-Crafts reactions are not usually
d) nitrobenzene successful with strongly deactivated arenes such as
View Answer nitrobenzene, and that linear alkyl groups longer than
ethyl easily rearrange to secondary alkyls during the
Answer: d Friedel-Crafts alkylation.
Explanation: No information about the natural occurrence
of nitrobenzene was found in the readily-available 9. Nitration of furan using acetyl nitrate also leads to a 2,5-
literature. Chloramphenicol is a rare example of a naturally addition product. How can this competing process be
occurring nitro compound. At least some naturally suppressed?
occurring nitro groups arose by the oxidation of amino a) By using concentrated nitric and sulfuric acids instead of
groups. 2-Nitrophenol is an aggregation pheromone of acetyl nitrate
ticks. 3-Nitropropionic acid found in fungi and plants. b) By carrying out the reaction at higher temperatures
c) By carrying out the nitration in the presence of pyridine
7. Which gives a meta-nitro compound as the main d) By using nitric acid instead of acetyl nitrate
product upon nitration with a nitric acid-sulfuric acid View Answer
mixture?
Answer: c
Explanation: 2-Nitrofuran may be nitrated with 70% nitric
a) acid and then affords 2,5-dinitrofuran (67%) and 2,4-
dinitrofuran (5%). The acetyl nitrate method usually
proceeds by an addition–elimination mechanism and in
b) certain cases the addition products may be isolated and
require treatment with a base such as pyridine to effect
elimination of acetic acid.

c) 10. Predict the major product of the following reaction.

d)
View Answer
a) o-nitrobenzaldehyde and p-nitrobenzaldehyde
Answer: c
b) m-nitrobenzaldehyde
Explanation: This activation or deactivation of the benzene
c) o-formylbenzenesulfonic acid and p-
ring toward electrophilic substitution may be correlated
formylbenzenesulfonic acid
with the electron donating or electron withdrawing
d) m-formylbenzenesulfonic acid
influence of the substituents, as measured by molecular
View Answer
dipole moments. Methoxy group(-OCH3) is an electron
donating substituent, which activates the benzene ring Answer: b
toward electrophilic attack and direct substitution to the Explanation: This activation or deactivation of the benzene
meta location. ring toward electrophilic substitution may be correlated
with the electron donating or electron withdrawing
8. Which combination of reagents used in the indicated
influence of the substituents, as measured by molecular
order with benzene will give m-nitropropylbenzene?
dipole moments. CHO- group is a deactivating substituent, used for enamine synthesis due to the preferential
and direct substitution to the meta location. formation of the more thermodynamically stable imine
species.

4. Enamine shows which type of behavior?

ENAMINES a) Basic
1. What is the name of the given compound? b) Electrophilic and acidic
c) Nucleophilic and basic
d) Nucleophilic
View Answer

Answer: c
a) Amine Explanation: Enamines are both good nucleophiles and
b) Imine good bases. Their behaviour as carbon-based nucleophiles
c) Enamine are explained with reference to the following resonance
d) Amide
View Answer

Answer: c structures.
Explanation: An enamine is an unsaturated compound
5. What is the type of the following reaction?
derived by the condensation of an aldehyde or ketone
with a secondary amine. Enamines are versatile
intermediates.
a) Condensation reaction
2. The phenomenon or process by which imine are b) Acylation reaction
converted into enamine is which of the following? c) Rearrangement reaction
a) Imination d) Redox reaction
b) Enamination View Answer
c) Amination
d) Tautomerism Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: An enamine is an unsaturated compound
derived by the condensation of an aldehyde or ketone
Answer: d with a secondary amine.
Explanation: The enamine-imine tautomerism may be
considered analogous to the keto-enol tautomerism. In 6. What is the name of the compound A in the given
both cases, a hydrogen atom switches its location between reaction of formation of enamine?
the heteroatom (oxygen or nitrogen) and the second
carbon atom.

3. Which of the following is not true about enamines?

a) Enamine are derived by the condensation of an
aldehyde or ketone with a primary amine a) Imine
b) Enamines are versatile intermediates b) Amine
c) Enamines are considered to be nitrogen analogs of enols
c) Carbinoamine
d) They are tautomeric form of imine d) Amide
View Answer View Answer
Answer: a Answer: c
Explanation: An enamine is an unsaturated compound Explanation: Methyl ketone self-condensation is a side-
derived by the condensation of an aldehyde or ketone reaction which can be avoided through the addition of
with a secondary amine. Primary amines are usually not
TiCl4 into the reaction mixture (to act as a water a) Condensation reaction
scavenger). This is an example of an aldehyde reacting b) Alkylation reaction
with a secondary amine to form an enamine via a c) Rearrangement reaction
carbinolamine intermediate. d) Redox reaction
View Answer
7. What is the name of the compound A in the given
reaction of enamine? Answer: b
Explanation: This reaction is an alkylation reaction, in
which, the enamine nucleophile can attack haloalkanes to
form the alkylated iminium salt intermediate which then
hydrolyzes to regenerate a ketone. This reaction was
pioneered by Gilbert Stork, and is sometimes referred to
by the name of its inventor.
a) Imine salt
b) Amine 10. Which cyclic ketone enamine is most reactive?
c) Carbinoamine a) Five membered
d) Amide b) Six membered
View Answer c) Seven membered
d) Eight membered
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: The enamine nucleophile can attack
haloalkanes to form the alkylated iminium salt Answer: a
intermediate which then hydrolyzes to regenerate a Explanation: Cyclic ketone enamines follow a reactivity
ketone (a starting material in enamine synthesis). trend where the five membered ring is the most reactive
due to its maximally planar conformation at the nitrogen.
8. What is the name of the compound formed when
alkylation of enamine is followed by hydrolysis?
a) Carboxylic acid
STEREOCHEMISTRY
b) Ketone
c) Amide 1. Compounds which have different arrangements of
d) ester atoms in space while having same atoms bonded to each
View Answer other are said to have
a) position isomerism
Answer: b
b) functional group isomerism
Explanation: The enamine nucleophile can attack
c) chain isomerism
haloalkanes to form the alkylated iminium salt
d) stereoisomerism
intermediate which then hydrolyzes to regenerate a
View Answer
ketone.
Answer: d
Explanation: Stereoisomer his contrasts with structural
isomers, which share the same molecular formula, but the
bond connections or their order differs. By definition,
molecules that are stereoisomers of each other represent
the same structural isomer.
9. What is the name of the following reaction of enamine?
2. Which of the following can make difference in optical
isomers?
a) heat
b) temperature
c) polarized light
d) pressure a) They are equatorial to one another
View Answer b) They are axial to one another
c) They are cis to one another
Answer: c d) They are trans to one another
Explanation: An optically active substance is one which can View Answer
rotate the plane of polarisation of plane polarised light. if
you shine a beam of polarised monochromatic light (light Answer: d
of only a single frequency – in other words a single colour) Explanation: Axial and equatorial are terms that describe
through a solution of an optically active substance, when the orientation of a single group with respect to a chair
the light emerges, its plane of polarisation is found to have and can therefore be ruled out. The bromine and chlorine
rotated. are both oriented downward, on the same side of the
chair. By definition, they are cis to one another.
3. Which of the following Fischer projections is different
from the other three? 6. What is the stereochemical relationship between the
following two molecules?

a) 1
b) 2
c) 3 a) Geometrical isomers
d) 4 b) Enantiomers
View Answer c) Diastereomers
d) Identical
4. Which of the following terms best describes the
View Answer
following pair of molecules?
Answer: d
Explanation: Both molecules have the same molecular
a) Isomers formula (C9H16BrCl) and the same connectivity. Each
b) Constitutional isomers molecule also has three stereocenters, marked above with
c) Configurational isomers an asterisk, and does not contain a plane of symmetry.
d) Geometrical isomers Therefore, both molecules are chiral. Using one of the
View Answer methods outlined in this tutorial, it can be determined that
these molecules are superimposable. Therefore, the
Answer: d molecules are identical.
Explanation: These molecules have the same molecular
formula (C7H14), making them isomers. However, the 7. Which of the following is an alkane which can exhibit
molecules differ in their spatial orientations due to a optical activity?
double bond. Therefore, the molecules can best be a) Neopentane
described as geometric isomers. b) Isopentane
c) 3–Methylpentane
5. What is the relationship between the two groups in the d) 3–Methylhexane
following molecules? View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: 3-Methyl pentane shows optical activity as
shown below: structural isomers, then they could be separated by

physical means.

8. What is the molecular formula for the alkane of smallest 10. Which of the following statements can be deduced
molecular weight which possesses a stereogenic center? about the stereochemistry of this compound?
a) C4H10
b) C5H12
c) C6H14
d) C7H16
View Answer

Answer: d a) This compound is optically active because it has

Explanation: See as the compounds who shows optical stereogenic centers that create cis-trans isomers
isomerism have a chiral carbon so an unsymmetrical b) This compound is optically active because the
alkane can show the optical isomerism. 6 carbon and 8 compound contains a center, plane, or axis of chirality
carbon alkane is not the answer. So, the smallest alkane is c) This compound is not optically active since there are no
7 carbon alkane is 3 methyl hexane which have 3rd carbon stereogenic centers
as chiral carbon. d) This compound is not optically active because of its
symmetry
9. Which of the following statements most accurately
View Answer
describes the stereochemistry between the various
cyclohexanes? Answer: a
a) Cis-1,2-dichlorocyclohexane and trans-1,2- Explanation: In identifying stereogenic centers, any
dichlorocyclohexane rotate plane-polarized light in quaternary or tertiary carbons would be a good place to
opposite directions, and together in equal proportions look. There are no quaternary carbons, and all the tertiary
form a racemic mixture carbons are part of a benzene ring structure.
b) The diaxial and diequatorial forms of trans-1,3-
dichlorohexane can be separated by their differing
physical properties
STEREOISOMERS
c) Only cis-1,4-dichlorocyclohexane is achiral due to a
plane of symmetry, and cis-1,4-dichlorocyclohexane is 1. What is the complete IUPAC name of the following
diastereomeric to trans-1,4-dichlorocyclohexane substance?
d) The conformational isomers of trans-1,2-
dichlorocyclohexane are enantiomers, which are not
interconvertible, but resolvable
View Answer

Answer: d
a) (1S,3S)-1-methylcyclopentane-1,3-diol
Explanation: In the below given diagram of trans-1,3-
b) (1R,3R)-1-methylcyclopentane-1,3-diol
dichlorohexane the chlorines cannot be positioned diaxial
c) (1S,3R)-1-methylcyclopentane-1,3-diol
or diequatorial but can only be axial and equatorial or vice
d) (1R,3S)-1-methylcyclopentane-1,3-diol
versa. Additionally, if they were diastereomers or
View Answer
Answer: d Answer: a
Explanation: The IUPAC name will be (1R,3S)-1- Explanation: 2,3-Butanediol has two chirality centers but
methylcyclopentane-1,3-diol, where 1 position shows R the sets of four substituents on each chirality center are
and 3 position shows S. identical. Each chirality center can have either an S or R
configuration. The (2R,3R) and (2S,3S) compounds are
2. How many stereoisomers are there for the following enantiomers of one another, but the structures drawn as
structure? (2R,3S) and (2S,3R) compounds are identical (this is the
achiral meso compound), so there are only three different
stereoisomers. For a compound with n chirality centers
there is the possibility of a maximum of 2n stereoisomers.
However, if the sets of four substituents on each chirality
center are identical there will be fewer than 2n
a) 1
stereoisomers.
b) 2
c) 3 5. What is the complete IUPAC name of the following
d) 4 stereoisomer?
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: In the case of 2,3-dihydroxybutanedioic acid,
known as tartaric acid, the two chiral centers have the
same four substituents and are equivalent. As a result, two
a) (1S)-2-ethyl-3,3-dimethylcyclopentane
of the four possible stereoisomers of this compound are
b) (1R)-2-ethyl-3,3-dimethylcyclopentane
identical due to a plane of symmetry, so there are only
c) (1S)-1-ethyl-,3,3-diimethylcyclopentane
three stereoisomeric tartaric acids.
d) (1S)-3-ethyl-1,1-diimethylcyclopentane
3. How many stereoisomers of 3-bromo-2-butanol, View Answer
CH3CH(OH)CHBrCH3, exist?
Answer: c
a) 3
Explanation: The IUPAC name will be (1S)-1-ethyl-,3,3-
b) 1
diimethylcyclopentane, where at 1 position it is S.
c) 2
d) 4 6. Which of the following structures represent the same
View Answer stereoisomer?

Answer: d
Explanation: 3-Bromo-2-butanol has two chirality centers
with different sets of four substituents. Each chirality
center can have either an S or R configuration. For a
compound with n chirality centers there is the possibility
of a maximum of 2n stereoisomers. In this case there is a) Only 1 and 2
more than one stereoisomer. b) Only 2 and 3
c) 1, 2 and 3
4. How many stereoisomers of 2,3-butanediol, d) Only 3 and 1
CH3CH(OH)CH(OH)CH3, exist? View Answer
a) 3
b) 4 Answer: b
c) 1 Explanation: It is important that you can rotate around
d) 2 carbon-carbon single bonds to make different
View Answer conformations, and to rotate molecules in three-
dimensions to compare their chirality chemistry (model
kits are often useful). Another way to determine which of d) 5
these structures are identical is to determine the View Answer
configuration of each chirality center. In this case, for each
chirality center the priority of the substituents is -Cl >; - Answer: a
CHClCH3 >; -CH3 >; -H. For example, the configurations of Explanation: 3 structural isomers, but if you are
the chirality centers of compound 1 are both S. However, 1 considering chirality/diastereomers, there are two chiral
and 3 are not identical. carbons, so the maximum number of stereoisomers is
22=4, from which cis-1,2-dichlorocyclopentane and cis-1,3-
7. Which of the following compounds can exhibit dichlorocyclopentane will have same structure in their
geometrical isomerism? individual 4 isomers as shown below, so total isomers will
a) 1-Hexene be 7.
b) 2-Methyl-2-Pentene
c) 3-methyl-1-pentene
d) 2-Hexene
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: There are several isomers of hexene,
depending on the position and geometry of the double
bond in the chain. One of the most common industrially
useful isomers is 1-hexene an alpha-olefin.
POLARIMETER
8. How many number of stereoisomers possible for 2, 3-
pentanediol? 1. What does a polarimeter measure?
a) 3 a) Polarity of the substance
b) 4 b) Angle of rotation of an optical active compound
c) 5 c) Concentration of the substance
d) 6 d) pH of the substance
View Answer View Answer

Answer: b Answer: b
Explanation: 2, 3-pentanediol contains two chiral atoms. Explanation: A polarimeter is a scientific instrument used
So, the number of possible stereoisomers is 4 (22). to measure the angle of rotation caused by passing
polarized light through an optically active substance.
9. How many chiral stereoisomers can be drawn for
CH3CHFCHFCH(CH3)2? 2. A solution of 0.1 g/mL of a pure R enantiomer in a 1.0
a) 4 dm (i.e., 10 cm) polarimeter rotates plane polarized light
b) 5 by +4.8°. What is the rotation observed on this solution in
c) 6 a 2 dm polarimeter?
d) 7 a) +2.4°
View Answer b) +4.8°
c) +19°
Answer: a d) +9.6°
Explanation: CH3CHFCHFCH(CH3)2 contains 2 chiral atoms. View Answer
So, the number of possible stereoisomers is 4 (22).
Answer: d
10. What is the total number of isomers, stereoisomers Explanation: The specific optical rotation of a sample, *α+,
included, designated by the dichlorocyclopentane? is calculated using the equation *α+ = α/cl, where α is the
a) 7 observed rotation, c is the concentration (in g/mL), and l is
b) 6 the pathlength (in dm). *α+ is a constant for a sample.
c) 4
3. Polarimeter works on the principle of which of the 6. Which of the following groups has the highest priority
following? according to the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog sequence rules?
a) polarisation of light a) CH3
b) change of the electrical conductivity of solution with b) CH2Cl
composition c) CH2OH
c) change of angle of refraction with composition d) CHO
d) change of electrical conductivity of solution with View Answer
temperature
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: R/S and E/Z descriptors are assigned by using
Answer: a a system for ranking priority of the groups attached to
Explanation: If light encounters a polarizer, only the part of each stereocenter. This procedure, often known as the
the light that oscillates in the defined plane of the sequence rules, is the heart of the CIP system. Compare
polarizer may pass through. That plane is called the plane the atomic number (Z) of the atoms directly attached to
of polarization. The plane of polarization is turned by the stereocenter; the group having the atom of higher
optically active compounds. According to the direction in atomic number receives higher priority.
which the light is rotated, the enantiomer is referred to as
dextro-rotatory or levo-rotatory. 7. What is the percent composition of a mixture of (S)-(+)-
2-butanol, α= +13.52°, and (R)-(-)-2-butanol, α = -13.52°,
4. What is the effect of the I on the specific optical rotation with a specific rotation α = +6.76°?
(α), if I gets double? a) 75%(R) 25%(S)
a) α gets double b) 25%(R) 75%(S)
b) α gets halved c) 50%(R) 50%(S)
c) α gets four times d) 67%(R) 33%(S)
d) α eight times View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: a Explanation: The specific optical rotation of a sample, *α+,
Explanation: Specific rotation, *α+, is a fundamental is calculated using the equation *α+ = α/cl, where α is the
property of chiral substances that is expressed as the angle observed rotation, c is the concentration (in g/mL), and l is
to which the material causes polarized light to rotate at a the pathlength (in dm). *α+ is a constant for a sample.
particular temperature, wavelength, and concentration.
Doubling l will double the value of α. 8. What can be said with certainty if a compound has α= -
9.25°?
5. If a solution of a compound (30.0 g/100 mL of solution) a) The compound has the (S) configuration
has a measured rotation of +15° in a 2 dm tube, what is b) The compound has the (R) configuration
the specific rotation? c) The compound is not a meso form
a) +50° d) The compound possesses only one stereogenic center
b) +25° View Answer
c) +15°
d) +7.5° Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: Compounds which rotate the plane of
polarization of plane polarized light counterclockwise are
Answer: b said to be levorotary and correspond with negative values.
Explanation: The specific optical rotation of a sample, *α+, It is optically active substance.
is calculated using the equation *α+ = α/cl, where α is the
observed rotation, c is the concentration (in g/mL), and l is 9. Which of these is a comparatively insignificant factor
the pathlength (in dm). *α+ is a constant for a sample. affecting the magnitude of specific optical rotation?
a) Concentration of the substance of interest
b) Purity of the sample
c) Temperature of the measurement enantiomers have identical chemical and physical
d) Length of the sample tube properties in an achiral environment but form different
View Answer products when reacted with other chiral molecules and
exhibit optical activity. A pair of stereoisomers that are
Answer: c non-superimposable mirror images of one another are
Explanation: The specific rotation of a molecule is the enantiomers.
rotation in degrees observed upon passing polarized light
through a path length of 1 decimetre (dm) at a 2. Which of the following statements is not true regarding
concentration of 1 g/mL. Specific rotation is almost always pairs of enantiomers?
reported along with the temperature, wavelength of light a) They have identical boiling points
used, the solvent, and the concentration, since it is b) They rotate plane polarized light in opposite directions
sensitive to these factors as well. c) They react at identical rates with chiral reagents
d) They have identical melting points
10. What is the specific optical rotation of (S)-malic acid at View Answer
a concentration of 5.5 g/ mL in the solvent pyridine at 20°C
at a wavelength of 589 nm? Answer: b
a) the specific rotation is –27° Explanation: This statement is true. All (+) enantiomers are
b) the specific rotation is +27° levorotatory, corresponding to rotation of plane polarized
c) the specific rotation is –17° light in a clockwise direction.
d) the specific rotation is +17°
View Answer 3. Which of the following statements regarding optical
rotation is not true?
Answer: a a) All R enantiomers are dextrorotatory
Explanation: The specific optical rotation of a sample, *α+, b) All (+) enantiomers are laevorotatory
is calculated using the equation given below, α (is the c) All (-) enantiomers rotate plane polarized light in a
measured rotation in degrees, l is the path length in counter clockwise direction
decimeters, and ρ (Greek letter “rho”) is the concentration d) (+) and (-) enantiomers rotate plane polarized light in
of the liquid in g/mL, for a sample at a temperature T opposite directions
(given in degrees Celsius) and wavelength λ (in View Answer

Answer: c
nanometers). Explanation: This statement is false. Pairs of enantiomers
react at different rates with chiral reagents.

4. How many enantiomers are there of the molecule

ENANTIOMERISM shown below?

1. Which of the following is the definition for

enatiomerism?
a) A pair of stereoisomers each of which has two chirality
centres
b) A pair of stereoisomers that are not mirror images of a) 6
one another b) 2
c) A pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable c) 0
mirror images of one another d) 1
d) Any pair of stereoisomers View Answer
View Answer
Answer: c
Answer: c Explanation: Chiral centers are carbons that have four non-
Explanation: The relationship between two stereoisomers identical substituents on them and are designated as
having molecules that are mirror images of each other; either of R stereochemistry or S stereochemistry. If a
molecule has one stereocenter of R configuration, then in Answer: b
the mirror image of that molecule, the stereocenter would Explanation: For being an enantiomer it is necessary that
be of S configuration, and vice-versa. And above carbon atom has four non-identical substituents around it,
compound does not satisfy these conditions to show making this carbon a chiral center, and as proof of its
enantiomerism. chirality the molecule has a non-superimposable mirror
image. Molecules that are mirror images of each other is
5. Which of the following notations is not used to enantiomers.
distinguish between pairs of enantiomers?
a) R and S 8. Which of the following is true of any (S)-enantiomerism?
b) E and Z a) It rotates plane-polarized light to the right
c) + and – b) It rotates plane-polarized light to the left
d) D and L c) It is a racemic form
View Answer d) It is the mirror image of the corresponding (R)-
enantiomer
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: All four of these notations are used to
distinguish between isomers, but only three are used Answer: d
specifically in the context of enantiomers. The fourth – E Explanation: Stereocenters, (sometimes called chiral
and Z – is used to differentiate between geometric centers) are carbons that have four non-identical
isomers, not enantiomers. substituents on them and are designated as either of R
stereochemistry or S stereochemistry. If a molecule has
6. Which among the following is true about one stereocenter of R configuration, then in the mirror
enantiomerism? image of that molecule, the stereocenter would be of S
a) Assignments of R and S labels and (+) and (–) labels are configuration, and vice-versa.
not connected
b) The labels R and S refer to different conformers 9. Which of the following is not true of enantiomers? They
c) The labels (+) and (–) are used to distinguish have the same:
enantiomers a) boiling point
d) The specific rotation of enantiomers is equal and b) melting point
opposite c) specific rotation
View Answer d) density
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: R and S not refers to different conformers. Answer: c
Chiral centers are carbons that have four non-identical Explanation: Enantiomers have identical chemical and
substituents on them and are designated as either of R physical properties in an achiral environment but form
stereochemistry or S stereochemistry. If a molecule has different products when reacted with other chiral
one stereocenter of R configuration, then in the mirror molecules and exhibit optical activity. A pair of
image of that molecule, the stereocenter would be of S stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images
configuration, and vice-versa. of one another are enantiomers.

7. Which of the following molecules does not possess 10. In the absence of specific data, it can only be said that
enantiomers? (R)–2–bromopentane is which of the following?
a) CH3CH2CH2CHBrCH3 a) dextrorotatory (+)
b) CH3CH2CBr2CH3 b) levorotatory (–)
c) CH3CHBrCH2CH3 c) optically inactive
d) CHBr2CH2CHBrCH3 d) analogous in absolute configuration to (R)–2–
View Answer chloropentane
View Answer
Answer: d d) Only A
Explanation: In the absence of specific data, it can only be View Answer
said that (R)–2–bromopentane analogous in absolute
configuration to (R)–2–chloropentane. Answer: d
Explanation: Chiral molecules are non-superimposable on
their mirror images. A good way to determine whether a
molecule is chiral is to determine whether it has a plane of
CHIRALITY symmetry. A molecule with a plane of symmetry is achiral
1. Which statement about a chiral compound A is (not chiral). Molecule 1 does not have a plane of symmetry
so it is chiral. Molecules 2 and 3 both have planes of
incorrect?
a) A racemate contains equal amounts of (+)-A and (–)-A symmetry, so they are not chiral.
b) If A is resolved, it is separated into its enantiomers 4. Which symmetry element makes the given compound
c) (+)-A can also be labelled R-A, because (+) means the achiral?
same as R
d) (+)-A and (–)-A will rotate polarized light equally but in
opposite directions
View Answer

Answer: c
a) Plane of symmetry (POS)
Explanation: Follow the direction of the remaining 3
b) Center of symmetry (COS)
priorities from highest to lowest priority (lowest to highest
c) Axis of symmetry (AOS)
number, 1<2<3). A clockwise direction is an R (rectus, Latin
d) Alternating axis of symmetry (AAOS)
for right) configuration. A dextrorotary compound is often
View Answer
prefixed “(+)-” or “d-“
Answer: a
2. Which of the following is the definition of chirality?
Explanation: In order for a molecule to be achiral, it must
a) The superimposability of an object on its mirror image
be superimposable on its mirror image. Molecules with a
b) A molecule with a mirror image
plane of symmetry or a center of symmetry meet this
c) The non-superimposability an object on its mirror image
criterion.
d) A molecule that has a carbon atom with four different
substituents 5. Which of the following compound(s) is/are chiral?
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: Chirality is not restricted to molecules. While
it is common for the presence of a carbon atom in a
molecule with four different substituents to be the origin
of chirality of a compound, it is not a requirement for
a) Both A and B
chirality.
b) Only B
3. Which of the following compound(s) is/are chiral? c) Only A
d) Neither A nor B
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: In order for a molecule to be chiral, it must
not be superimposable on its mirror image. Molecules
a) Only A and B
with a plane of symmetry or a center of symmetry do not
b) Only B
meet this criterion. Molecule A has a plane of symmetry
c) Only B and C (shown above in fuchsia), molecule B has no symmetry.
6. The given compound is a chiral molecule. 9. Which of the following compound(s) is/are achiral?

a) True
b) False a) I
View Answer b) II
c) III
Answer: b
d) I and II
Explanation: In order for a molecule to be chiral, it must
View Answer
not be superimposable on its mirror image. Molecules
with a plane of symmetry or a center of symmetry do not Answer: a
meet this criterion. This molecule is having plane of Explanation: In order for a molecule to be chiral, it must
symmetry, it is an achiral molecule. not be superimposable on its mirror image. Molecules
with a plane of symmetry or a center of symmetry do not
7. Which symmetry element makes the given compound
meet this criterion. Molecule II and III are not having
achiral?
symmetry element, they are chiral molecule. Molecule ‘I’
is having plane of symmetry, it is an achiral atom.

10. Which of the following compound(s) is/are chiral?

a) Plane of symmetry (POS)

b) Center of symmetry (COS)
c) Axis of symmetry (AOS)
d) Alternating axis of symmetry (AAOS)
View Answer
a) I
Answer: b
b) II
Explanation: In order for a molecule to be achiral, it must
c) III
be superimposable on its mirror image. Molecules with a d) I and II
center of symmetry meet this criterion. View Answer
8. The given compound is a chiral molecule. Answer: d
Explanation: In order for a molecule to be chiral, it must
not be superimposable on its mirror image. Molecules
with a plane of symmetry or a center of symmetry do not
meet this criterion. Molecule I and II are not having plane
a) True of symmetry, they are chiral molecule. Molecule ‘III’ is
b) False having plane of symmetry, it is an achiral atom.
View Answer

Answer: a
ENANTIOMERS
Explanation: In order for a molecule to be chiral, it must
not be superimposable on its mirror image. Molecules 1. Which of the following statements regarding
with a plane of symmetry or a center of symmetry do not enantiomers not true?
meet this criterion. This molecule is not having any a) All (+) enantiomers are levorotatory
symmetry element, it is a chiral molecule. b) All (-) enantiomers rotate plane polarized light in a
counterclockwise direction
c) (+) and (-) enantiomers rotate plane polarized light in Answer: d
opposite directions Explanation: Priorities are assigned to each of the four
d) All R enantiomers are dextrorotatory different groups attached to a given chiral center (one
View Answer through four, one being the group of highest priority). (It
should be understood that each chiral center has to be
Answer: d treated separately.) Orient the molecule so that the group
Explanation: This statement is true. (+) and (-) enantiomers of priority four (lowest priority) points away from the
rotate plane polarized light in opposite directions. observer. Draw a circular arrow from the group of first
priority to the group of second priority. If this circular
2. Which of the following is/are the S-enantiomer of
alanine? motion is counterclockwise, it is the S enantiomer.

5. Which of the following is the pair of enantiomer from

the following substance?

a) Only 1
b) Only 2
a) I and II
c) 1 and 3
b) II and III
d) 2 and 3
c) III and IV
View Answer
d) I and V
Answer: d View Answer
Explanation: 1 and 3 have an S configuration, but 2 has an
Answer: c
R configuration. The priority of the substituents on the
Explanation: Stereocenters, (sometimes called chiral
chirality center of alanine is: -NH2 > -COOH > -CH3 > -H.
centers) are carbons that have four non-identical
3. Would the following compound have an enantiomer? substituents on them and are designated as either of R
stereochemistry or S stereochemistry. If a molecule has
one stereocenter of R configuration, then in the mirror
image of that molecule, the stereocenter would be of S
configuration, and vice-versa.

a) True 6. Is the given pair of compound enantiomers?

b) False
View Answer

Answer: a
a) True
Explanation: Yes, this compound has enantiomer because
b) False
of the steric bulk of the phenyl groups, the molecule
View Answer
would be held in place.
Answer: a
4. Which of the following is true of any (S)-enantiomer?
Explanation: Stereocenters, (sometimes called chiral
a) It rotates plane-polarized light to the right
centers) are carbons that have four non-identical
b) It rotates plane-polarized light to the left
substituents on them and are designated as either of R
c) It is a racemic form
stereochemistry or S stereochemistry. If a molecule has
d) It is the mirror image of the corresponding (R)-
one stereocenter of R configuration, then in the mirror
enantiomer
image of that molecule, the stereocenter would be of S
View Answer
configuration, and vice-versa.
7. Which of the following is the enantiomer for the b) trans-1,3-Cyclohexanediol
following substance? c) cis-1,4-Cyclohexanediol
d) trans-1,4-Cyclohexanediol
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Trans-1,3-Cyclohexanediol exist as
a) enantiomer. (S,S)-cyclohexane-1,3-diol is shown below.

b)
10. Which of the following is capable of existing as a pair
of enantiomers?
a) 2-methylpropane
c)
b) 2-methylpentane
c) 3-methylpentane
d) 3-methylhexane
View Answer
d)
View Answer Answer: d
Explanation: 3-methylhexane exists as a pair of
Answer: a
enantiomer. This carbon atom has four non-identical
Explanation: Stereocenters, (sometimes called chiral
substituents around it, making this carbon a chiral center,
centers) are carbons that have four non-identical
and as proof of its chirality the molecule has a non-
substituents on them and are designated as either of R
superimposable mirror image. A fancy term used in
stereochemistry or S stereochemistry. If a molecule has
textbooks and in the literature to describe molecules that
one stereocenter of R configuration, then in the mirror
are mirror images of each other is enantiomers, as in “the
image of that molecule, the stereocenter would be of S
enantiomer of the left molecule above is the molecule on
configuration, and vice-versa.
the right, its mirror image.”
8. Which of the following molecules exists as a pair of
enantiomers?
a) 2-Bromopropane
b) 1-Bromo-3-methylbutane
c) 2-Cyclohexen-1-ol
d) cis-1,2-Dichlorocyclobutane
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: 2-Cyclohexen-1-ol can exist as enantiomers as
shown below tis compound is called as (1R)-2-Cyclohexen- DIASTEREOMERS

1. Which of the following is the definition of a pair of

diastereomers?
a) A pair of stereoisomers each of which has two chirality
1-ol.
centers
9. Which of the following diols exists as a pair of b) Any pair of stereoisomers
enantiomers? c) A pair of stereoisomers that are not mirror images of
a) cis-1,3-Cyclohexanediol one another
d) A pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable
mirror images of one another
View Answer
d)
Answer: c View Answer
Explanation: Not all stereoisomers are diastereomers. For
example, a pair of molecules which are non- Answer: a
superimposable mirror images of one another are Explanation: Both molecules are chiral. It can be
enantiomers, not diastereomers. determined that these molecules are non-superimposable
and are not mirror images. Therefore, the molecules are
2. What is the relationship between given compound? diastereomers.

4. Which of the following can exist as diastereomers?

a) Lactic acid
b) 1-Butene
c) 2-Butene
a) Diastereomer
d) Ethane
b) Enantiomer
View Answer
c) Identical
d) Don’t have any relation Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: The two possible geometries of 2-butene are
cis-2-butene and trans-2-butene; cis indicates that
Answer: a
substituents are arranged on the same side of the double
Explanation: Both molecules have the same molecular
bond, while trans indicates opposite sides. These are
formula (C9H17Cl) and the same connectivity. Each
stereoisomers; the atoms are connected in the same way
molecule also has three stereocenters and does not
but arranged differently in space.
contain a plane of symmetry. Therefore, both molecules
are chiral. It can be determined that these molecules are
non-superimposable and are not mirror images. Therefore,
the molecules are diastereomers.

3. Which of the following is the diastereomer of the

following compound? 5. Which structure(s) represent(s) diastereomer(s) of the
following compound?

a)

a)
b)

c) b)
 8. What is the relation between the given compound?

c)

a) diastereomers
b) constitutional isomers
d) c) enantiomers
View Answer d) identical
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: a
Explanation: It can be determined that these molecules
Explanation: It can be determined that these molecules
are non-superimposable and are not mirror images.
Therefore, the molecules are diastereomers. are non-superimposable and are not mirror images.
Therefore, the molecules are diastereomers.
6. What is the relation between the given compound?
9. What is the relation between the given compound?

a) constitutional isomers
b) enantiomers
c) diastereomers
a) diastereomers
d) identical
b) constitutional isomers
View Answer
c) enantiomers
Answer: c d) identical
Explanation: It can be determined that these molecules View Answer
are non-superimposable and are not mirror images.
Answer: a
Therefore, the molecules are diastereomers.
Explanation: It can be determined that these molecules
7. What is the relation between the given compound? are non-superimposable and are not mirror images.
Therefore, the molecules are diastereomers.

10. Which of the following compounds would be suitable

for preparing the necessary diastereomeric salts in
preparation of Naproxen?
a) constitutional isomers a) Quinoline
b) enantiomers b) Tartaric acid
c) diastereomers c) Malic acid
d) identical d) Cinchonidine
View Answer View Answer
Answer: c Answer: d
Explanation: It can be determined that these molecules Explanation: The correct answer is cinchonidine. Because
are non-superimposable and are not mirror images. naproxen contains a carboxylic acid, it will be necessary to
Therefore, the molecules are diastereomers. use an amine to form a salt. This rules out malic acid and
tartaric acid. The amine also has to be chiral in order to 4. Which statement is not true for a meso compound?
make the diastereomeric salt, so quinoline which is achiral. a) The specific rotation is 0°
b) There are one or more planes of symmetry
c) A single molecule is identical to its mirror image
d) The stereochemical labels, (R) and (S), must be identical
MESO STRUCTURES
for each stereogenic center
1. Which of the following is the definition of a meso View Answer
compound?
a) A molecule with chirality centers which is chiral Answer: d
Explanation: Statement stereochemical labels, (R) and (S),
b) A chiral compound with more than one chirality center
c) A diastereomer with no chirality centers must be identical for each stereogenic center is not true
d) A molecule with chirality centers which is not chiral about meso compounds, stereochemical labels, (R) and
View Answer (S), can or cannot be identical for each stereogenic center.

5. Which is a meso compound?

Answer: d
Explanation: Meso compounds are not chiral. Molecule a) (2R,3R)-2,3-Dibromobutane
b) (2R,3S)-2,3-Dibromopentane
with chirality centers which is chiral are false. So, other
statements are false. c) (2R,4R)-2,4-Dibromopentane
d) (2R,4S)-2,4-Dibromopentane
2. A compound whose molecules are superimposable on View Answer
their mirror images even though they contain asymmetric
Answer: d
carbon atoms is called
a) A threo compound Explanation: (2R,4S)-Dibromopentane is superimposable
b) A meso compound on its mirror image, so it is achiral (i.e., not chiral). Achiral
c) A unsymmetric compound molecules which have chirality centers are called meso
compounds. Meso compounds are possible if two (or
d) An erythro compound
View Answer more) chirality centers in a molecule have the same set of
four substituents. Examination of molecular models might
Answer: b help you when examining stereoisomers.
Explanation: Meso compounds are possible if two (or
more) chirality centers in a molecule have the same set of 6. Which of the following is a mesocompound?
four substituents. Examination of molecular models might
help you when examining stereoisomers.

3. Which of the following compounds is a meso

compound? a) I
a) (2R,3R)-dibromobutane
b) II
b) (2R,3S)-dibromobutane
c) III
c) (2R,3S)-3-bromo-2-butanol
d) IV
d) (2R,3R)-3-bromo-2-butanol
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: b
Explanation: Compound I is superimposable on its mirror
Explanation: (2R,3S)-Dibromobutane is superimposable on
image, so it is achiral. Achiral molecules which have
its mirror image, so it is achiral (i.e., not chiral). Achiral chirality centers are called meso compounds. Meso
molecules which have chirality centers are called meso
compounds are possible if two (or more) chirality centers
compounds. Meso compounds are possible if two (or
in a molecule have the same set of four substituents.
more) chirality centers in a molecule have the same set of
Examination of molecular models might help you when
four substituents. Examination of molecular models might
examining stereoisomers.
help you when examining stereoisomers.
7. The given compound is meso compound. more) chirality centers in a molecule have the same set of
four substituents. Examination of molecular models might
help you when examining stereoisomers.

10. Which is the meso isomer of butane-1,2,3,4-tetraol?

a) True
b) False
View Answer
a)
Answer: a
Explanation: The given compound is superimposable on its
mirror image, so it is achiral. Achiral molecules which have b)
chirality centers are called meso compounds. Meso
compounds are possible if two (or more) chirality centers
in a molecule have the same set of four substituents. c)
Examination of molecular models might help you when
examining stereoisomers.

8. Which of the following is(are) not meso compound(s)? d)

View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: If we redraw each structure with the OH
groups (for example) on C2 and C3 eclipsed, or re-write
the structures as Fischer projections, then we can see
a) II
more easily which structure has a mirror plane between C2
b) II and III
and C3. And this condition will satisfy the meso
c) I and III
compound.
d) I and II
View Answer

Answer: a HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

Explanation: Meso compounds are possible if two (or
more) chirality centers in a molecule have the same set of FIVE MEMBERED RINGS
four substituents. Examination of molecular models might
1. Which of the following is not true about the five
help you when examining stereoisomers.
membered rings?
9. Which of the following is(are) not meso compound(s)? a) Five membered rings are more stable than 4 membered
rings
b) Five membered rings are more stable than 6 membered
rings
c) Five membered rings are more stable than 7 membered
rings
d) Five membered rings are more stable than 8 membered
a) I
rings
b) II and III
View Answer
c) I and III
d) I and II Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: 6-membered rings can have 3D
conformations, such as the chair conformation (the more
Answer: b
stable) and the boat conformation. These conformations
Explanation: Meso compounds are possible if two (or
relax the angles, getting them closer to the tetrahedral
angle. Thus, cycle gains stability. That is why 5-membered Answer: a
rings are less stable than 6-membered. Explanation: Pyrrole is more reactive than furan and
thiophene in electrophilic reactions. Therefore; pyrrole is
2. Which of the following is a not a five membered ring? more prone to electrophilic substitution than furan. The
a) Pyridine nitrogen atom in pyrrole can conjugate with the π-
b) Pyrrole electrons on the ring, so the density of the π-electrons on
c) Furan the ring will increase.
d) Thiophene
View Answer 6. What is the product when thiophene reacts with Br2 in
benzene?
Answer: a a) 2-bromothiophene
Explanation: Pyridine is a basic five membered heterocyclic b) 3-bromothiophene
organic compound with the chemical formula C5H5N. It is c) 2,5-dibromothiophene
structurally related to benzene, with on (=CH–) group d) 3,4-dibromothiophene
replaced by a nitrogen atom. View Answer
3. Which of the following five membered rings is most Answer: c
resonance stabilized? Explanation: This is electrophilic substitution reaction,
a) Furan bromination of thiophene in presence of benzene leads to
b) Thiophene formation of 2,5-dibromothiophene.
c) Pyrrole
d) Pyridine
View Answer

Answer: b 7. What is the product when pyrrole reacts with Br2 in

Explanation: Thiophene is most resonance stabilized five ethanol?
membered rings among above compounds. As thiophene a) 2,3-dibromopyrrole
has Sulphur and least electronegativity ring than nitrogen b) 2,3,4,5-tetrabromopyrrole
and oxygen in pyrrole and furan respectively. c) 2,5-dibromopyrrole
d) 3,4-dibromopyrrole
4. Five membered rings come under which category of
View Answer
heterocycle classification on the basis of chemical
behavior? Answer: b
a) -excessive heterocycle Explanation: This is electrophilic substitution reaction,
b) -deficient heterocycle bromination of pyrrole in presence of ethanol leads to
c) -equivalent heterocycle formation of 2,3,4,5-tetrabromopyrrole.
d) Can’t say about the five membered rings
View Answer 8. What is the name of the following reaction?

Answer: a
Explanation: In five membered ring, 6 π electrons are
distributed between 5 atoms, each atom shares more than
1 e– (1.2e–).
a) Gattermann reaction
5. What is the reactivity order in the following five b) Riemer tiemann reaction
membered heterocyclic compounds? c) Friedal craft reaction
a) Pyrrole d) Blanc’s chloromethylation
b) Furan View Answer
c) Thiophene
Answer: b
d) Pyridine
Explanation: This is a Riemer tiemann reaction, in which
View Answer
boiling pyrrole will react with aqueous or alcoholic potash The only way we can have five carbons, a nitrogen, and
and chloroform. only five hydrogens is if the carbons and nitrogen form a
ring with alternating double bonds.
9. What is the name of the following reaction?
2. Which element is present as hetero atom in pyridine?
a) Sulphur
b) Nitrogen
c) Oxygen
d) Sulphur and nitrogen
a) Gattermann reaction
View Answer
b) Riemer tiemann reaction
c) Friedal craft reaction Answer: b
d) Blanc’s chloromethylation Explanation: Pyridine is an analogue of benzene in which
View Answer one -CH unit is replaced by N. The chemical formula for
pyridine is: C5H5N.
Answer: a
Explanation: This is a Gattermann reaction, in which 3. The electron of Nitrogen participating in the resonance
boiling pyrrole will react with HCN and HCl followed by in pyridine is present in which orbital?
addition of water and leads to formation of pyrole-2- a) p-orbital
carbaldehyde. b) sp2-orbital
c) sp3-orbital
10. What will be the reagent used for the completion of
d) sp -orbital
the following reaction?
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: In pyridine, from three sp2 orbital, one hybrid
orbital is used for one electron which is utilized in the π-
a) Concentrated acid
cloud.
b) Dilute acid
c) Concentrated base 4. Pyridine is a not a planner compound?
d) Dilute base a) True
View Answer b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In dilute acid for a brief time, pyrrole form Answer: b
trimer. Explanation: Pyridine is planner monocyclic compound and
contains 6 πe- the aromatic sextet. It fulfils the criteria for
the Huckel’s rule.
STRUCTURE OF PYRIDINE
5. How many number of resonating structure stabilises a
1. Pyridine is a which type of heterocyclic compound from pyridine molecule?
the following options? a) 4
a) Six membered heterocyclic compound b) 5
b) Seven membered heterocyclic compound c) 6
c) Four membered heterocyclic compound d) 7
d) Five membered heterocyclic compound View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: a Explanation: Like benzene, pyridine also has 2 kekule
Explanation: Pyridine is a five membered heterocyclic structure (a and b) along with 3 more resonating structure
compound. The chemical formula for pyridine is: C5H5N. (c, d and e) which contributes to a lesser extent to the
stability of molecule. 9. Which of the following is the correct range for the bond
length in the pyridine molecule?
a) 1.34 – 1.40 A°
b) 1.24 – 1.32 A°
c) 2.4 – 2.49 A°
d) 1.02 – 1.17 A°
6. Pyridine come under which category of heterocycle View Answer
classification on the basis of chemical behavior?
Answer: a
a) -excessive heterocycle
Explanation: As shown in below diagram, 1.34 – 1.40 A° is
b) -deficient heterocycle
the correct range for the bond length in the pyridine
c) -equivalent heterocycle
d) can’t say about the five membered rings
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: Nitrogen is more electronegative than other molecule.
carbon atom in pyridine, so distribution of 6 e– is unequal
10. What is the greatest angle in pyridine ring?
(more electron on N). a) 116°
7. What is the smallest angle in pyridine ring? b) 140°
a) 116.7° c) 124°
b) 115.0° d) 118°
c) 124.0° View Answer
d) 118.1° Answer: c
View Answer
Explanation: As shown in below diagram, the angle
Answer: a between C-C-N is the greatest angle which is 124°.
Explanation: As shown in below diagram, the angle
between C-N-C is the smallest angle which is 116.7°.

SOURCE OF PYRIDINE COMPOUNDS

8. What is the dipole moment of the pyridine?
a) Zero 1. Which of the following plant is the natural source of
b) 2.2 D pyridine?
c) 1.17 D a) Atropa belladonna
d) 4.3 D b) Ocimum tenuiflorum
View Answer c) Azadirachta indica
d) Ficus religiose
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: The dipole moment of the pyridine is 2.2D
Answer: a
Explanation: Pyridine is not abundant in nature, it is
present in the leaves and roots of belladonna (Atropa
belladonna).
towards the nitrogen molecule.
2. Why is extraction of pyridine from coal tar or as a nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD). These
byproduct of coal gasification ineffective? compounds assist dehydrogenase enzymes in the
a) Less concentration of desired compound catabolism of fat, carbohydrates, and amino acids, and in
b) This method is expensive the enzymes involved in synthesis of fats and steroids and
c) Reactive is rare other vital metabolites.
d) Dangerous procedure
View Answer 6. Mycobacterium tuberculosis and Escherichia coli
produce nicotinic acid by condensation of which of the
Answer: a following compounds?
Explanation: The process was labor-consuming and a) Glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate
inefficient because coal tar contains only about 0.1% b) Kynurenine
pyridine, and therefore a multi-stage purification was c) Pyrrole
required, which further reduced the output. d) Tryptophan
View Answer
3. Which of the following derivative of pyridine is mostly
found in mycobacterium tuberculosis? Answer: c
a) Niacin Explanation: Mammals synthesize nicotinic acid through
b) Nicotinamide oxidation of the amino acid ‘tryptophan’, where an
c) Nicotinic acid intermediate product, aniline, creates a pyridine
d) Strychnine derivative, kynurenine.
View Answer
7. What is the name of the reaction given below when
Answer: c condensation of acrolein and acetaldehyde take place?
Explanation: The bacteria Mycobacterium tuberculosis and
Escherichia coli produce nicotinic acid by condensation.

4. Mycobacterium tuberculosis and Escherichia coli

produce nicotinic acid by condensation of which of the a) Chichibabin synthesis
following compounds? b) Dealkylation of alkylpyridine
a) Glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate c) Hantzsch pyridine synthesis
b) Amino acid d) Bonnemann cyclisation
c) Pyrrole View Answer
d) acetylene
Answer: a
View Answer
Explanation: The reaction can be described as a
Answer: c condensation reaction of aldehydes, ketones, α, β-
Explanation: The bacteria Mycobacterium tuberculosis and unsaturated carbonyl compounds, or any combination of
Escherichia coli produce nicotinic acid by condensation by the above, in ammonia. In particular, unsubstituted
glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate and aspartic acid. pyridine is produced from acetaldehyde, which are
inexpensive and widely available.
5. Which of the following derivative of pyridine is mostly
found in mammals? 8. In the synthesis of pyridine by Chichibabin synthesis,
a) Nicotinamide synthesis of acroloien is done which method?
b) Vitamin B6 a) Knoevenagel Condensation
c) Nicotinic acid b) Aldol condensation
d) Strychnine c) Dieckmann condensation
View Answer d) Claisen condensation
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Mammals synthesize nicotinic acid through Answer: a
oxidation. The coenzyme forms of nicotinic acid are Explanation: Acrolein is formed in a Knoevenagel
condensation from the acetaldehyde and formaldehyde. It cyclooctadiene) as a catalyst, and can be performed even
is then condensed with acetaldehyde and ammonia into in water.
dihydropyridine.
12. What is the name reaction of the following reaction?
9. Which of the following reagent can’t be used as the
reagent in the dealkylation of alkylpyridines in the pyridine
synthesis?
a) Vanadium oxide
a) Chichibabin synthesis
b) Nickel based catalyst
b) Dealkylation of alkylpyridines
c) Silver or platinum-based catalyst
c) Hantzsch pyridine synthesis
d) Copper catalyst
d) Bönnemann cyclization
View Answer
View Answer
Answer: d
Answer: d
Explanation: The oxidative dealkylation is carried out
Explanation: The trimerization of a part of a nitrile
either using air over vanadium(V) oxide catalyst, by vapor-
molecule and two parts of acetylene into pyridine is called
dealkylation on nickel-based catalyst, or hydrodealkylation
Bönnemann cyclization.
with a silver- or platinum-based catalyst. There are no
evidences found when copper is used as catalyst in this 13. What is the name reaction of the following reaction?
reaction.

10. What is the name reaction of the following reaction?

a) Chichibabin synthesis
b) Ciamician–Dennstedt rearrangement
c) Kröhnke pyridine synthesis
d) Bönnemann cyclization
a) Chichibabin synthesis View Answer
b) Dealkylation of alkylpyridines
c) Hantzsch pyridine synthesis Answer: b
d) Bönnemann cyclization Explanation: The Ciamician–Dennstedt rearrangement
View Answer entails the ring-expansion of pyrrole with dichlorocarbene
to 3-chloropyridine.
Answer: c
Explanation: The Hantzsch pyridine synthesis typically uses
a 2:1:1 mixture of a β-keto acid (often acetoacetate), an
ELECTROPHILIC SUBSTITUTION IN PYRIDINE
aldehyde (often formaldehyde), and ammonia or its salt as
the nitrogen donor. 1. Electrophilic substitution reaction of pyridine is most
effective in which of the conditions?
11. Which of the following catalyst can be used in the
a) In slightly acidic conditions
synthesis of pyridine by Bönnemann cyclization?
b) In slightly basic conditions
a) Vanadium oxide
c) In neutral medium
b) Nickel based catalyst
d) In vigorous conditions
c) Silver or platinum-based catalyst
View Answer
d) Cobalt catalyst
View Answer Answer: d
Explanation: When electrophilic substitution reaction of
Answer: d
pyridine is carried out in acidic conditions then pyridine
Explanation: The trimerization of a part of a nitrile
ring will further get deactivated forming pyridinium ion.
molecule and two parts of acetylene into pyridine is done
However, under more vigorous conditions the usual
with CoCp2(cod) (Cp = cyclopentadienyl, cod = 1,5-
electrophilic substitution reaction can be possible but yield at 3-position is more stable as it will have 3-resonating
will be less. structure and none of will have positive charge on N.

2. Which of the following electrophilic substitution 5. Which of the following is the product for the below
reaction is not possible in pyridine? reaction?
a) Nitration
b) Sulphonation
c) Bromination
d) Friedel craft reaction
a) 3- bromopyridine
View Answer
b) 2- bromopyridine
Answer: d c) 2- bromopyridine and 3- bromopyridine
Explanation: Common alkylations and acylations, such as d) 3- bromopyridine and 3,5- dibromo pyridine
Friedel–Crafts alkylation or acylation, usually fail for View Answer
pyridine because they lead only to the addition at the
Answer: d
nitrogen atom. Substitutions usually occur at the 3-
Explanation: Electrophilic substitution reaction at position
position, which is the most electron-rich carbon atom in
the 3-position 5 position is preferred over attack at 2 and
the ring and is, therefore, more susceptible to an
4-position because the intermediate found by electrophilic
electrophilic addition.
addition at 3-position is more stable as it will have 3-
3. At which position of pyridine electrophilic substitution resonating structure and none of will have positive charge
reaction is most preferred? on N.
a) First
6. Which of the following is the product for the below
b) Second
reaction?
c) Third
d) Forth
View Answer

Answer: c
a) 3- pyridinesulphonic acid
Explanation: Electrophilic substitution reaction at position
b) 2- pyridinesulphonic acid
the 3-position is preferred over attack at 2 and 4-position
c) 4- pyridinesulphonic acid
because the intermediate found by electrophilic addition
d) 2,4- pyridinedisulphonic acid
at 3-position is more stable as it will have 3-resonating
View Answer
structure and none of will have positive charge on N.
Answer: a
4. Which of the following is the product for the below
Explanation: Electrophilic substitution reaction at position
reaction?
the 3-position is preferred over attack at 2 and 4-position
because the intermediate found by electrophilic addition
at 3-position is more stable as it will have 3-resonating
structure and none of will have positive charge on N.
a) 3- Nitropyridine
7. Which of the following is the product for the below
b) 2- Nitropyridine
reaction?
c) 4- Nitropyridine
d) 2,4- dinitropyridine
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Electrophilic substitution reaction at position a) 3- methyl-pyridine-5-sulphonic acid
the 3-position is preferred over attack at 2 and 4-position b) 3- methyl-pyridine-4-sulphonic acid
because the intermediate found by electrophilic addition c) 3- methyl-pyridine-6-sulphonic acid
d) 3- methyl-pyridine-1-sulphonic acid
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Alkyl group activate the pyridine ring towards
electrophilic substitution, however, directive influence of a) 4-amino -pyridine-5-sulphonic acid
the ring predominates regardless of the position of b) 4- amino -pyridine-3-sulphonic acid
alkylation i.e. attack at 3-position. c) 4- amino -pyridine-6-sulphonic acid
d) 4- amino -pyridine-2-sulphonic acid
8. Which of the following is the product for the below View Answer
reaction?
Answer: a
Explanation: Amino group dominates the ring orientation
effect and direct the incoming electrophile to o– and p–
position. 4-amino group directs the incoming electrophile
a) 5- bromo-2-aminopyridine predominantly to the 3-position.
b) 3- bromo-2-aminopyridine
c) 4- bromo-2-aminopyridine
d) 6- bromo-2-aminopyridine NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION IN PYRIDINE
View Answer
1. At which position of pyridine nucleophilic substitution
Answer: a reaction is most preferred?
Explanation: Amino group dominates the ring orientation a) First and third
effect and direct the incoming electrophile to o- and p- b) Second
position. 2-amino group directs the incoming electrophile c) Third
predominantly to the 5-position. d) Second and Forth
View Answer
9. Which of the following is the product for the below
reaction? Answer: d
Explanation: When the nucleophile is at the 2 and 4
positions, the intermediate anion is stabilized by the
electronegative nitrogen atom. This results in a more
stable anion as compared to the intermediate anion when
a) 2- Nitro-3-aminopyridine
the nucleophile is at the 3 positions. Hence, the 2 and 4
b) 4- Nitro-3-aminopyridine
positions is preferred for nucleophilic substitution.
c) 5- Nitro-3-aminopyridine
d) 6- Nitro-3-aminopyridine 2. Pyridine undergoes nucleophilic substitution with
View Answer NaNH2 at 100℃ to give which of the following?
a) 3-aminopyridine
Answer: a
b) 2-aminopyridine
Explanation: Amino group dominates the ring orientation
c) 3,5-diaminopyridine
effect and direct the incoming electrophile to o- and p-
d) 2,5-diaminopyridine
position. 3-amino group directs the incoming electrophile
View Answer
predominantly to the 2-position.
Answer: b
10. Which of the following is the product for the below
Explanation: Here, sodium amide is used as the
reaction?
nucleophile yielding 2-aminopyridine. The hydride ion
released in this reaction combines with a proton of an
available amino group, forming a hydrogen molecule.
3. Pyridine undergoes nucleophilic substitution with excess followed by aromatic nucleophilic substitution.
of NaNH2 at 100℃ to give which of the following?
a) 3-aminopyridine
b) 2,6-diaminopyridine
c) 3,5-diaminopyridine
d) 2,5-diaminopyridine
View Answer

Answer: b 6. Nucleophilic substitution reaction of pyridine is most

Explanation: Sodium amide in excess is used as the effective in which of the conditions?
nucleophile yielding 2,6-diaminopyridine. The hydride ion a) In slightly acidic conditions
released in this reaction combines with a proton of an b) In slightly basic conditions
available amino group, forming a hydrogen molecule. c) In neutral medium
d) No specific condition requirements
4. What will be the product of the following reaction?
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The nitrogen atom makes pyridines more
reactive towards nucleophilic substitution, particularly at
a) 3-aminopyridine
the 2- and 4-positions, by lowering the LUMO energy of
b) 2-aminopyridine
the π system of pyridine.
c) 3,5-diaminopyridine
d) 2,5-diaminopyridine 7. What is the name of the following reaction?
View Answer

Answer: b
Explanation: We can see the ease of replacement of
halogens in these positions by nucleophiles. The a) Chichibabin reaction
intermediate anion is stabilized by electronegative b) Dealkylation of pyridine
nitrogen and by delocalization round the ring. c) Hantzsch pyridine synthesis
d) Bonnemann cyclisation
View Answer

Answer: a
5. What will be the product of the following reaction? Explanation: The Chichibabin reaction is a method for
producing 2-aminopyridinederivatives by the reaction of
pyridine with sodium amide. The direct amination of
pyridine with sodium amide takes place in liquid ammonia.
Following the addition elimination mechanism first, a
nucleophilic NH2− is added while a hydride (H−) is leaving.

a) 3-chloropyridine 8. Electron-withdrawing groups inhibit the Chichibabin

b) 2-dichloropyridine reaction. Which of the following statement is not true
c) 3,5-dichloropyridine about this fact?
d) 2,5-dichloropyridine a) they increase the basicity of the ring nitrogen
View Answer b) these electron-withdrawing groups can also form
complexes with sodium amide
Answer: b
c) for single electron transfer pathway, altering the
Explanation: This is the direct conversion to
distribution of spin density of the intermediate radical
chloropyridines with POCl3. The reaction starts by attack of
anion
the oxygen atom at phosphorus to create a leaving group,
d) they slow down the sorption on sodium amide dihydropyridine when undergoes partial hydrogenation of
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: Electron-withdrawing groups inhibit the
pyridine take place.
Chichibabin reaction they decrease the basicity of the ring
nitrogen by decreasing the density of electron on nitrogen. 4. When Lithiumtetrahydroborate in the presence of water
So the donation of an electron is less. reacts with pyridine, which product is formed?
a) Piperidine
b) 1,4-dihydropyridine
REDUCTION OF PYRIDINE c) 1,2-dihydropyridine
d) 2,5-dihydropyridine
1. What will be the product if reaction with hydrogen gas View Answer
in the presence of Raney nickel takes place?
a) Pyrimidine Answer: b
b) Piperdine Explanation: Selective synthesis of 1,4-dihydropyridine is
c) Pyrylium salt achieved in the presence of organometallic complexes of
d) Pentazine magnesium and zinc, and Lithiumtetrahydroborate in the
View Answer presence of Water.

Answer: a 5. When lithium aluminium hydride reacts with pyridine,

Explanation: Hydrogen-saturated piperidine is obtained which product is not formed?
through reaction with hydrogen gas in the presence of a) Piperidine
Raney nickel. b) 1,4-dihydropyridine
c) 1,2-dihydropyridine
2. What is name of the reaction when piperdine is d) 2,5-dihydropyridine
converted by pyridine commercially? View Answer
a) Dehydrogenation
b) Hydrogenation Answer: a
c) Hydrogenolysis Explanation: Partially hydrogenated derivatives are
d) Transfer hydrogenation obtained under milder conditions, reduction with lithium
View Answer aluminium hydride yields a mixture of 1,4-dihydropyridine,
1,2-dihydropyridine, and 2,5-dihydropyridine.
Answer: b
Explanation: Piperidine is commercially obtained by the 6. What will be the product of the following reaction?
hydrogenation of pyridine using nickel catalyst at about
200℃.

3. By which of the following agent there will be incomplete

reduction of pyridine?
a) Na-NH2, EtOH
b) H2/RaNi, 200℃
c) Na/C2H5OH
a)
d) NaBH3
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: NaNH2 in presence of ethanol will form 1, 4- b)
 gives you 3-aminopyridine.The mechanism finishes when
the basic reactant donates electrons to acquire a proton
and regenerate the reactant NH−2. This is obviously hard
(you’re generating an extremely strong base, which
prefers not to be free!), so it’s one of the reasons why heat
c)
is needed.

POLYMERISATION & BIOMOLECULES

d)
MACROMOLECULES – 1
View Answer
1. Macromolecule described as large molecules built up
Answer: b
from small repeating units called as which of the
Explanation: Hydrogen-saturated piperidine is obtained
following?
through reaction with hydrogen gas in the presence of
a) Biopolymer
Raney nickel. Group –COOH will remain same.
b) Dimers
7. Pyridine undergoes nucleophilic substitution with c) Monomers
phenyl lithium at 100℃ to give which of the following? d) Metamers
a) 3-phenylpyridine View Answer
b) 2-phenylpyridine
Answer: c
c) 3,5-diphenylpyridine
Explanation: Monomer is a molecule that “can undergo
d) 2,5-diaphenylpyridine
polymerization thereby contributing constitutional units to
View Answer
the essential structure of a macromolecule.
Answer: b
2. Carbohydrates are polyhydroxy compounds of
Explanation: Nucleophilic substitution takes place
_______________
preferentially at the 2- and 4- positions as the
a) Glucose
intermediate anion is stabilised by the electronegative
b) Oligosaccharides
c) Aldehyde and ketone
d) Glyceraldehyde
View Answer
nitrogen.
Answer: c
8. What will be the product of the following reaction? Explanation: The carbohydrates contain a chemically
reactive group that is either an aldehyde group or a keto
group, they are frequently referred to as aldopentoses or
ketopentoses or aldohexoses or ketohexoses.
a) 3-phenylpyridine
3. There are several levels of protein structure, which is
b) 4-phenylpyridine
the most complex protien?
c) 3-phenylpyridine and 4-phenylpyridine
a) Primary
d) No reaction
b) Secondary
View Answer
c) Tertiary
Answer: c d) Quaternary
Explanation: A benzyne intermediate is generated when View Answer
bromide leaves. This intermediate can be attacked on
Answer: d
either carbon-3 or carbon-4, giving you both possible
Explanation: Many proteins are actually assemblies of
products. Path 1 gives you 4-aminopyridine, and path 2
multiple polypeptide chains. The quaternary structure hydroxyl groups on other molecules to form two ester
refers to the number and arrangement of the protein bonds, as in nucleic acid.
subunits with respect to one another. Examples of
proteins with quaternary structure include hemoglobin, 7. Animals store glucose in the form of which
DNA polymerase, and ion channels. macromolecule?
a) Amylose
4. Amylose is soluble in which of the following solvent? b) Glycogen
a) Water c) Glycerol
b) Alcohol d) Cellulose
c) Partially soluble in alcohol View Answer
d) Soluble in acidic solution
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: Glycogen is a multibranched polysaccharide
Answer: a of glucose that serves as a form of energy storage in
Explanation: A dry form of amylose has been prepared humans, animals, fungi, and bacteria. The polysaccharide
that is easily soluble in water at all temperatures. It can go structure represents the main storage form of glucose in
into solution even at high concentrations (up to 10%), the body.
forming very viscous liquids that are indistinguishable in
appearance and properties from those prepared by 8. In the formation of a macromolecule, what type of bond
autoclaving amyloses. would join two amino acid subunits?
a) Ionic bond
5. Proteins, which are tremendously complex molecules, b) Phosphodiester bond
what are their basic units or building blocks? c) Hydrogen bond
a) Carbohydrates d) Peptide bond
b) NH2 View Answer
c) Polypeptides
d) Amino acids Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: The bond that holds together the two amino
acids is a peptide bond, or a covalent chemical bond
Answer: d between two compounds (in this case, two amino acids). It
Explanation: The basic building block of a protein is called occurs when the carboxylic group of one molecule reacts
an amino acid. There are 20 amino acids in the proteins with the amino group of the other molecule.
you eat and in the proteins within your body, and they link
together to form large protein molecules. The variety of 9. In the formation of a macromolecule, what type of
ways they mix and match allows for the great diversity of reaction would join two subunits together?
proteins in nature. a) Hydrophobic reaction
b) Hydrolysis reaction
6. Nucleic acids are chains of 5-carbon sugars linked by c) Dehydration reaction
which type of bonds with an organic base protruding from d) Denaturation reaction
each sugar? View Answer
a) Amino
b) Phophodiester Answer: c
c) Carbonyl Explanation: A dehydration reaction is a chemical reaction
d) Phosphate that involves the loss of a water molecule from the
View Answer reacting molecule. Dehydration reactions and dehydration
synthesis has the same meaning, and are often used
Answer: b interchangeably. Two monosaccharaides, such as glucose
Explanation: A phosphodiester bond occurs when exactly and fructose, can be joined together (to form sucrose)
two of the hydroxyl groups in phosphoric acid react with using dehydration synthesis. The new molecule, consisting
of two monosaccharides, is called a disaccharide.
10. Assuming that all of the below given compound had a) C and O
the same number of carbon atoms, which of the following b) OH and H
has the most C-H bonds? c) CH and NH2
a) Unsaturated fat d) COOH and H
b) Polysaturated fat View Answer
c) Polysaccharide
d) Saturated fat Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: Hydrolysis, which means to split water, a
reaction in which a water molecule is used during the
Answer: d breakdown. Dehydration reaction is a chemical reaction
Explanation: From a chemical standpoint, saturated fats that involves the loss of a water molecule from the
are simply fat molecules that have no double bonds reacting molecule.
between carbon molecules because they are saturated
with hydrogen molecules. So, saturated fat will have a 4. What type of macromolecule carries out catalysis in
maximum number of C-H bonds. biological systems?
a) proteins called enzymes
b) carbohydrates called starches
c) lipids called steroids
MACROMOLECULES – 2 d) nucleic acids called DNA
1. What happens when a macromolecule undergoes View Answer
hydrolysis reaction? Answer: a
a) protein coils into its secondary structure Explanation: Enzymes are proteins functioning as catalysts
b) the bond between two subunits of a macromolecule is that speed up reactions by lowering the activation energy.
broken A simple and succinct definition of an enzyme is that it is a
c) a bond is formed between two subunits of a biological catalyst that accelerates a chemical reaction
macromolecule without altering its equilibrium.
d) water breaks ionic bonds
View Answer 5. Amino acids and proteins are ionized at typical
biological pH such that both the amino group and the
Answer: b carboxyl group gain hydrogen ions to become -NH3+ and -
Explanation: Macromolecules (Polymers) are broken down COOH, respectively.
into monomers in a process known as hydrolysis, which a) True
means to split water, a reaction in which a water molecule b) false
is used during the breakdown. View Answer
2. Which of the following is not a disaccharide? Answer: a
a) Sucrose Explanation: An amino acid has both a basic amine group
b) Maltose and an acidic carboxylic acid group. There is an internal
c) Lactose transfer of a hydrogen ion from the -COOH group to the -
d) Amylose NH2 group to leave an ion with both a negative charge and
View Answer a positive charge, called as zwitterion. If we increase the
Answer: d pH of a solution of an amino acid by adding hydroxide
Explanation: Amylose is a polysaccharide made of α-D- ions, the hydrogen ion is removed from the -NH3+ group. If
glucose units, bonded to each other through α(1,4) we decrease the pH by adding an acid to a solution of an
amino acid, the -COO– part of the zwitterion picks up a
glycosidic bonds.
hydrogen ion.
3. Dehydration and hydrolysis reactions involve removing
6. What are the most diverse macromolecules in the cell?
or adding which of the following to macromolecule
a) lipids
subunits?
b) mineral salts a) lipid molecules are hydrophilic
c) proteins b) lipid molecules are hydrophobic
d) carbohydrates c) lipid molecules are neutral
View Answer d) lipid molecules are zwitterions
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Proteins show enormous diversity because of Answer: b
different proportions and sequences of 20 amino acids Explanation: Insolubility of lipids in water is due to the fact
within the protein molecule. Proteins are the most that the polar groups they contain are
abundant and most varied of the macromolecules having much smaller than their nonpolar portions. The nonpolar
one or more polypeptides (chains of amino acids). The chains are long complex hydrophobic hydrocarbon chains.
proteins constitute almost 50% of the total dry weight of If shaken in water lipids often form small droplets or
the cell. micelles.

7. In which of the following groups are all polysaccharides? 10. Macromolecules like Enzymes, vitamins and hormones
a) sucrose, glucose and fructose can be classified into a single category of biological
b) maltose, lactose and fructose chemicals. Why?
c) glycogen, sucrose and maltose a) all of these help in regulating metabolism
d) glycogen, cellulose and starch b) all of these are exclusively synthesized in the body of a
View Answer living organism as at present
c) all of these are conjugated proteins
Answer: d d) all of these enhance oxidative metabolism
Explanation: Polysaccharides are complex long chain View Answer
carbohydrates which are formed by dehydrate synthesis or
polymerisation of more than 10 but generally very large Answer: c
number of units called monosaccharide. Starch, glycogen Explanation: A conjugated protein is a protein that
and cellulose are all polysaccharides. functions in interaction with other (non-polypeptide)
chemical groups attached by bonding or weak
8. Cellulose is the most important constituent of plant cell interactions. Enzymes, vitamins and hormones are
wall. What are its constituents? conjugate proteins.
a) branched chain of glucose molecules linked by (3-1, 4
glycosidic bond in straight chain and a-1, 6 glycosidic bond
at the site of branching
b) unbranched chain of glucose molecules linked by (3-1, 4 FREE RADICAL VINYL POLYMERISATION
glycosidic bond) 1. Which of the following is an initiator molecule in the
c) branched chain of glucose molecules linked by a-1, 6 free radical polymerisation?
glycosidic bond at the site of branching a) Benzoyl peroxide
d) unbranched chain of glucose molecules linked by a-1, 4 b) Sulphuric acid
glycosidic bond
c) Potassium permanganate
View Answer d) Chromium oxide
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: Cellulose molecule is composed of 1600 to Answer: a
6000 glucose molecules joined together. Those polymers Explanation: The whole process of free radical
form long twisting macromolecules of cellulose. The chains polymerisation starts off with a molecule called an
are unbranched and linear, which are linked by 3-1, 4
initiator. This is a molecule like benzoyl peroxide. When
glycosidic bond. they split, the pair of electrons in the bond which is broken
9. Lipids are insoluble in water because of which of the will separate. This is unusual as electrons like to be in pairs
following reason? whenever possible. When this split happens, we’re left
with two fragments, called initiator fragments.
2. Why is vinyl polymerization also known as addition Answer: d
polymerization? Explanation: Termination reaction in which our unpaired
a) monomers are unsaturated compounds electrons can shut down the polymerization: it’s is called
b) it is a chain reaction disproportionation. This is a rather complicated way in
c) most monomers contain (CH2=CH─) group which two growing polymer chains solve the problem of
d) it proceeds through radical their unpaired electrons.
View Answer
6. Which of the following reagents may be used to initiate
Answer: c radical polymerization of styrene?
Explanation: In addition polymerisation, polymer are a) HCl
formed by simple linking of monomers without the co- b) Peroxides
generation of other products. Most of the monomers c) Hydroxide ion
involves in chain polymerization contains (CH2=CH─) d) BF3
group, known as vinyl group. View Answer

3. Which of the following happens in initiation step of the Answer: b

free radical polymerisation? Explanation: The whole process of free radical
a) Decomposition of initiator polymerisation starts off with a molecule called an
b) Renewal of inhibitor initiator. This is a molecule like peroxide or AIBN.
c) Addition of monomer molecules to the growing chains
d) Disproportionation 7. Which polymer will be formed when vinyl acetate reacts
View Answer with peroxides?

Answer: a
Explanation: The breakdown of the initiator molecule to
form radicals, followed by the radical’s reaction with a a)
monomer molecule is called the initiation step of the
polymerization.

4. Which of the following happens in propagation step of

b)
the free radical polymerisation?
a) Decomposition of initiator
b) Renewal of inhibitor
c) Addition of monomer molecules to the growing chains c)
d) Disproportionation
View Answer

Answer: b d)
Explanation: The adding of more and more monomer View Answer
molecules to the growing chains, is called propagation.
Self-perpetuating reactions like this one are called chain Answer: a
reactions. Explanation: Polyvinyl acetate, or PVA for short, is one of
those low-profile behind-the-scenes polymers. It is found
5. Which of the following happens in termination step of in the case with polyethylene or polystyrene.
the free radical polymerisation?
a) decomposition of initiator
b) addition of free radical to monomer
c) addition of monomer molecules to the growing chains
d) disproportionation
View Answer
8. What is the name for polymers with Z groups only on repeat units together successively along the chain,
one side of the carbon chain? therefore, here number of monomers are four.
a) Enatiometric
b) Atactic
c) Syndiotactic
COPOLYMERISATION
d) Isotactic
View Answer 1. Which of the following is true about copolymerisation?
a) radical, coordination, anionic, or cationic
Answer: d polymerization, depending on the type of initiation
Explanation: Isotactic polymers are composed of isotactic
b) addition of monomer to a metal complex, propagation
macromolecules. In isotactic Macromolecules all the is by successive insertion of monomer at the metal, and
substituents are located on the same side of the termination occurs when the metal complex separates
macromolecular backbone. from the polymer
9. Which of the following is the structure of the radical c) monomers react by eliminating small molecules like
intermediate formed in the first propagation step of the H2O, NH3, CH2O and NaCl in a repetitive manner, Indefinite
polymerization of methyl methacrylate? growth of the polymer occurs at both ends
d) a mixture of more than one (or different) monomeric
species is allowed to polymerize
View Answer
a)
Answer: d
Explanation: When two or more different monomers unite
together to polymerize, the product is called a copolymer
b) and the process is called copolymerization. If M and N are
present together, Random type MM MN NNN MM N M
MM N N…… and Alternating type M N M N M N M N M
………
c)
2. Gradient copolymer comers under which of the
following copolymer category?
a) Linked copolymer
d) b) Branched copolymer
View Answer c) Terepolymer
d) Brush copolymer
10. How many monomer units of ethylene are present in View Answer
the given polyethylene formed by?
Answer: a
Explanation: Linear copolymers consist of a single main
chain and gradient copolymers are single chain of polymer
in which the monomer composition changes gradually
a) 1 along the chain.
b) 2
c) 3 3. Which of the following copolymers is the copolymer
d) 4 with regular alternating A and B units?
View Answer a) Alternating copolymer
b) Periodic copolymer
Answer: d c) Statistical copolymer
Explanation: A repeat unit or repeating unit is a part of a d) Block copolymer
polymer whose repetition would produce the complete View Answer
polymer chain (except for the end-groups) by linking the
Answer: a —- B-B-B-B-B-A-A-A-A-A-B-B-B-B-B—-
Explanation: Alternating copolymers are with regular
alternating A and B units, as shown below. This sequence 7. Which of the following copolymers is the copolymer in
will not change. which the main chain is formed from one type of
—- A-B-A-B-A-B-A-B-A-B-A-B-A-B-A-B-A-B—- monomer A and branches are formed from another
monomer B?
4. Which of the following copolymers is the copolymer a) Terepolymer copolymer
with A and B units arranged in a repeating sequence? b) Graft copolymer
a) Alternating copolymer c) Statistical copolymer
b) Periodic copolymer d) Star copolymer
c) Statistical copolymer View Answer
d) Block copolymer
View Answer Answer: b
Explanation: Copolymers in which the main chain is
Answer: b formed from one type of monomer A and branches are
Explanation: Copolymers with A and B units arranged in a formed from another monomer B, are called as graft
repeating sequence are periodic polymers as shown copolymer, as shown in below. This sequence will not
below. This sequence will repeat itself to form a polymer. change.
(A-B-A-B-B-A-A-A-A-B-B-B)n

5. Which of the following copolymers is the copolymer

with sequence of monomer residues follows a statistical
rule? 8. Which of the following copolymers is the copolymer
a) Alternating copolymer with several polymer chains connected to a central core?
b) Periodic copolymer a) Terepolymer copolymer
c) Statistical copolymer b) Graft copolymer
d) Block copolymer c) Statistical copolymer
View Answer d) Star copolymer
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Copolymers with sequence of monomer Answer: d
residues follows a statistical rule, are called as statistical Explanation: Copolymers with several polymer chains
copolymer, as shown in below. This sequence will not connected to a central core, are called as star copolymer
change. as it is in star shape, as shown in below. This sequence will

—- A-B-B-B-A-B-A-B-A-B-A-A-B-B-B-A-A-B—-

6. Which of the following copolymers is the copolymer

which comprises two or more homopolymer subunits
linked by covalent bonds?
a) Alternating copolymer not change.
b) Periodic copolymer
c) Statistical copolymer 9. Which of the following copolymers is the copolymer
d) Block copolymer consisting of three distinct monomers?
View Answer a) Terepolymer copolymer
b) Graft copolymer
Answer: d c) Statistical copolymer
Explanation: Copolymers which comprises two or more d) Star copolymer
homopolymer subunits linked by covalent bonds, are View Answer
called as block copolymer, as shown in below. This
sequence will not change.
Answer: a termination occurs when the metal complex separates
Explanation: Copolymers copolymer consisting of three from the polymer.
distinct monomers, are called as terepolymer copolymer
as it is in star shape, as shown in below. This sequence will 2. Which catalyst is commonly used in coordination chain
not change. polymerization?
a) nickel
b) ziegler- Natta catalyst
c) zeolite
d) platinum
View Answer
10. Which of the following is the condition for ideal
copolymerization? Answer: b
a) r1r2=1 Explanation: A Ziegler–Natta catalyst, named after Karl
b) r1r2=0 Ziegler and Giulio Natta, is a catalyst used in the synthesis
c) r1=r2 of polymers of 1-alkenes (alpha-olefins).
d) r1=1
3. Which of the following is true about homogenous
View Answer
Ziegler Natta polymerisation?
Answer: a a) This is based on titanium tetrachloride
Explanation: The composition and structural type of the organoaluminium co-catalyst
copolymer depend on the reactivity ratios r1 and b) This is based on Kaminsky catalyst
r2according to the Mayo–Lewis equation also called the c) This is based on neodymium-based catalyst
copolymerization equation. d) This is based on organoaluminium co-catalyst
Ideal copolymerisation happens when chain radicals have View Answer
equal preference to add one of the monomers over the
Answer: b
other.
Explanation: The Homogenous Ziegler Natta coordination
polymerization is done with the help of homogenous
catalyst such as the Kaminsky catalyst. Kaminsky catalysts
COORDINATION POLYMERISATION are based on metallocenes of group 4 metals (Ti, Zr, Hf)
activated with methylaluminoxane (MAO).
1. Which of the following is true about coordination
polymerisation? 4. Which of the following olefine undergo coordination
a) radical, coordination, anionic, or cationic polymerisation in the presence of Ziegler-Natta catalysts?
polymerization, depending on the type of initiation a) vinyl chloride
b) polymerization that is catalysed by transition metal salts b) vinyl ethers
and complexes c) acrylate esters
c) monomers react by eliminating small molecules like d) ethylene
H2O, NH3, CH2O and NaCl in a repetitive manner, Indefinite View Answer
growth of the polymer occurs at both ends
d) a mixture of more than one (or different) monomeric Answer: d
species is allowed to polymerize Explanation: The mixing of TiCl4 with trialkylaluminium
View Answer complexes produces Ti(III)-containing solids that catalyze
the polymerization of ethylene. Many alkenes do not
Answer: b polymerize in the presence of Ziegler-Natta or Kaminsky
Explanation: Coordination polymerisation is a form of catalysts. This problem applies to polar olefins such as
polymerization that is catalysed by transition metal salts vinyl chloride, vinyl ethers, and acrylate esters.
and complexes. In this addition of monomer to a metal
complex take place, followed by propagation is by 5. Which of the following is true about heterogeneous
successive insertion of monomer at the metal, and Ziegler Natta polymerisation?
a) This is based on titanium tetrachloride
b) This is based on Kaminsky catalyst a) Ziegler-Natta polymerization
c) This is based on neodymium-based catalyst b) Anionic vinyl polymerization
d) This is based on titanium tetrachloride organo- c) Free-radical polymerization
aluminium co-catalyst d) Metathesis polymerization
View Answer View Answer

Answer: d Answer: a
Explanation: Coordination polymerization with Explanation: Coordination polymerization with
heterogeneous Ziegler-Natta catalysts is based on titanium heterogeneous Ziegler-Natta catalysts is based on titanium
tetrachloride and organoaluminium co-catalyst. The tetrachloride and organo-aluminium co-catalyst. The
mixing of TiCl4 with trialkylaluminium complexes produces mixing of TiCl4 with trialkylaluminium complexes produces
Ti(III)-containing solids that catalyse the polymerization of Ti(III)-containing solids that catalyse the polymerization of
ethylene and propylene. ethylene and propylene.

6. Homogenous Ziegler Natta coordination polymerization

occurs via which mechanism?
a) Cossee–Arlman mechanism STEP REACTION POLYMERISATION
b) Mechanism of free-radical polymerization 1. Which of the following is true about Step-growth
c) Cationic polymerization mechanism polymerisation?
d) Anionic polymerization mechanism a) radical, coordination, anionic, or cationic
View Answer
polymerization, depending on the type of initiation
Answer: a b) polymerization that is catalysed by transition metal salts
Explanation: The Cossee–Arlman mechanism is the and complexes
pathway for the formation of C–C bonds in the c) monomers react by eliminating small molecules like
polymerization of alkenes. The mechanism features an H2O, NH3, CH2O and NaCl in a repetitive manner, Indefinite
intermediate coordination complex that contains both the growth of the polymer occurs at both ends
growing polymer chain and the monomer (alkene), these d) monomers react to form first dimers, then trimmers,
ligands combine within the coordination sphere of the longer oligomers and eventually long chain polymers
metal to form a polymer chain that is elongated by two View Answer
carbons.
Answer: d
7. Which catalyst is used for the coordination Explanation: Step-growth polymerization refers to a type
polymerisation of polybutadiene? of polymerization mechanism in which bi-functional or
a) titanium tetrachloride organo-aluminium co-catalyst multifunctional monomers react to form first dimers, then
b) kaminsky catalyst trimmers, longer oligomers and eventually long chain
c) neodymium-based catalyst polymer.
d) organo-aluminium co-catalyst 2. Which of the following is not true about step growth
View Answer
polymerisation?
Answer: c a) Molar mass of backbone chain increases rapidly at early
Explanation: The salt of neodymium has been widely used stage and remains approximately the same throughout the
in industrial polymerization of 1,3-butadiene. The polymerization
neodymium catalyst causes high catalytic activity during b) Similar steps repeated throughout reaction process
the polymerization of dienes, however good control has c) Initiator are required for the step growth polymerisation
not been achieved with regard to molecular weight and d) Rapid loss of monomer early in the reaction
molecular weight distribution. View Answer

8. Titanium tetrachloride organoaluminium co-catalyst is Answer: c

used in which of the following polymerisation? Explanation: Initiator is not required for the step growth
polymerisation. Step-Growth polymerization occurs by
consecutive reactions in which the degree of group. The monomer units are linked to each other by the
polymerization and average molecular weight of the a 1,2,3-triazole group; which is produced by the 1,3-
polymer increase as the reaction proceeds. Dipolar cycloaddition, also called the Azide-alkyne Huisgen
cycloaddition.
3. Which of the following is polymer formed by step-
growth polymerization is not classified under 6. How does the reaction rate vary with increasing extent
condensation polymerisation? of reaction beyond 94% conversion in self catalyzed
a) Polyester reaction?
b) Polyurethane a) decreases
c) Polysiloxane b) increases
d) Polyamide c) remains same
View Answer d) first increases than decreases
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Most step-growth polymers are classified as Answer: a
condensation polymers, but not all step-growth polymers. Explanation: The kinetics of the step-growth
Polyurethanes formed from isocyanate and alcohol polymerization can be described with Flory’s equal
bifunctional monomers) release condensates; in this case, reactivity principle. If the polymerization is carried out in
we talk about addition polymers. the presence of a strong acid (sulfonic acids) and if the
catalyst concentration is kept constant throughout the
4. Which monomers are required for the formation of process the average degree of polymerization increases
Bakelite via a typical step-growth polymerization? linearly with the reaction time, which is a much more
a) phenol and formaldehyde favorable situation for obtaining high average molecular
b) isocyanate and alcohol weight polymers than the weak-acid catalyzed third-order
c) diamine and formaldehyde reaction.
d) ester and phenol
View Answer 7. What is the trend in the molecular weight of step
growth polymer at lower conversion and higher
Answer: a conversion respectively?
Explanation: The synthesis of first truly synthetic polymeric a) Increase then decrease
material, Bakelite, was announced by Leo Baekeland in b) Decreases an increases
1907, through a typical step-growth polymerization c) Remains same
fashion of phenol and formaldehyde. d) Can’t say about molecular weight
5. Formation of polytriazole polymers via step-growth View Answer
polymerization is produced from which of the following Answer: b
monomers? Explanation: Step-growth polymers increase in molecular
a) Compound which bears both alkyne and azide weight at a very slow rate at lower conversions and reach
functional group moderately high molecular weights only at very high
b) Compound which bears both alkene and azide conversion (i.e., >95%).
functional group
c) Compound which bears both alkane and azide 8. Which of the following is not prepared by Ziegler-Natta
functional group coordination polymerisation?
d) Compound which bears both vinyl and azide functional a) High density Polyethylene (HDPE)
group b) Ultrahigh molecular weight Polyethylene (UHMWPE)
View Answer c) Ethylene-1-alkenebcopolymer (linear low density
polyethylene, LLDPE)
Answer: a d) Polyvinyl acetate (PVAc)
Explanation: Poly-Triazole polymers are produced from View Answer
monomers which bear both an alkyne and azide functional
Answer: d 4. To which of the following does thymine form hydrogen
Explanation: Vinyl chloride is polar olefins and such bonds in DNA?
alkenes do not polymerize in the presence of Ziegler-Natta a) adenine
or Kaminsky catalysts. b) thymine
c) cytosine
d) guanine
View Answer
AMINO ACIDS, DNA AND RNA

1. In double helix of DNA, the two DNA strands show Answer: a

Explanation: In molecular biology, two nucleotides on
which type of characteristics?
a) coiled around a common axis opposite complementary DNA strands that are connected
b) coiled around each other via hydrogen bonds are called a base. In the Watson-Crick
c) coiled differently DNA base pairing, Adenine (A) forms a base pair with
Thymine (T) and Guanine (G) forms a base pair with
d) coiled over protein sheath
View Answer Cytosine (C).

5. What term is used to describe the process by which

Answer: a
Explanation: The DNA molecule consists of two long, DNA is copied to produce two daughter DNA molecules?
parallel chains which are joined together by short a) reproduction
crossbars at regular intervals. The two chains are spirally b) replication
c) translation
coiled around a common axis in a regular manner to form
d) transcription
a right handed double helix.
View Answer
2. A nucleotide is formed of which of the following units?
a) nitrogen base and phosphate Answer: b
Explanation: Replication is the copying of DNA into two
b) nitrogen base, sugar and phosphate
c) nitrogen base and sugar daughter DNA molecules. Translation is the process by
which the genetic code for a specific protein (carried in
d) sugar and phosphate
View Answer messenger RNA) is used for the synthesis of a new protein.

Answer: b 6. What term is used to describe the process by which a

Explanation: Nucleotide is an organic compound consisting segment of DNA is copied to produce a molecule of
of a nitrogen-containing purine or pyrimidine base linked messenger RNA?
to a sugar (ribose or deoxyribose) and a phosphate group. a) reproduction
b) replication
3. Which of the following nitrogenous base is not present c) translation
in RNA? d) transcription
a) adenine View Answer
b) thymine
Answer: d
c) cytosine
d) guanine Explanation: Transcription is the term used to describe
View Answer how the genetic code relevant for the synthesis of one
protein (a gene) is copied from DNA to form messenger
Answer: a RNA.
Explanation: Though both RNA and DNA contain the
nitrogenous bases adenine, guanine and cytosine, RNA 7. What amino acid is coded by the triplet of bases UAU?
contains the nitrogenous base uracil instead of thymine. a) phenylalanine
Uracil pairs with adenine in RNA, just as thymine pairs with b) serine
c) tyrosine
adenine in DNA.
d) cysteine phosphate molecule, a 5-carbon deoxyribose sugar and a
View Answer nitrogenous base.

Answer: c 11. Glycine and proline are the most abundant amino acids
Explanation: The triplet code for phenylalanine can be in which of the following structure?
UUU or UUC. For serine it can be UCU, UCC, AGU or AGC. a) Hemoglobin
For tyrosine, it is UAU or UAC. For cysteine it can be UGU b) Myoglobin
or UGC. c) Insulin
d) Collagen
8. To which of the following does guanine form hydrogen View Answer
bonds in DNA?
a) adenine Answer: d
b) thymine Explanation: Glycine and proline are the most abundant
c) cytosine amino acids in collagen. The most common motifs in the
d) guanine amino acid sequence of collagen are glycine-proline-X and
View Answer glycine-X-hydroxyproline, where X is any amino acid other
than glycine, proline or hydroxyproline.
Answer: c
Explanation: In molecular biology, two nucleotides on 12. Which of the following statements about amino acids
opposite complementary DNA strands that are connected is correct?
via hydrogen bonds are called a base. In the Watson-Crick a) Amino acids are uncharged at neutral pH
DNA base pairing, Adenine (A) forms a base pair with b) Amino acids are classified according to the structures
Thymine (T) and Guanine (G) forms a base pair with and properties of their side chains
Cytosine (C). c) Amino acids in proteins are mainly in the D-
configuration
9. A nucleoside is formed of which of the following units? d) Twenty four amino acids are commonly used in protein
a) nitrogen base and phosphate synthesis
b) nitrogen base, sugar and phosphate View Answer
c) nitrogen base and sugar
d) sugar and phosphate Answer: b
View Answer Explanation: Amino acids are usually classified by the
properties of their side chain into four groups. The side
Answer: c chain can make an amino acid a weak acid or a weak base,
Explanation: A nucleoside consists simply of a nucleobase and a hydrophile if the side chain is polar or a hydrophobe
(also termed a nitrogenous base) and a five-carbon sugar if it is nonpolar.
(either ribose or deoxyribose).
13. Which of the following amino acids is mostly likely to
10. DNA is composed of repeating units of disrupt an alpha helix?
a) ribonucleosides a) Proline
b) deoxyribonucleosides b) Leucine
c) ribonucleotides c) Glycine
d) deoxyribonucleotides d) Valine
View Answer View Answer
Answer: d Answer: a
Explanation: It is a long, double” chain of Explanation: Certain amino acids with simple side chains,
deoxyribonucleotide, or deoxyribotide, units. The two such as alanine, are very favorable for formation of alpha
deoxyribonucleotide chains are twisted around a common helices, whereas cyclic amino acids like proline tend to
axis to form a right-handed double helix (spiral) that disrupt alpha helices.
encloses a cylindrical space in it. Each deoxyribonucleotide
unit, in turn, consists of three different molecules:
14. Which amino acid can form disulphide bonds? REACTIVITY OF MOLECULES REACTION MECHANISM
a) Proline
b) Leucine INDUCTIVE EFFECT
c) Cysteine 1. Electronegativity is defined as the power of an atom in a
d) Valine
molecule to
View Answer a) Repel electrons towards itself
Answer: c b) Attract electrons towards itself
Explanation: Cysteine aminoacid can form disulphide c) Expand itself
bond(bond which joins two atoms of sulphur atom) d) All of the mentioned
because this is the only amino acid with a sulphydryl group View Answer
in its side chain is cysteine. Answer: b
15. Which of the following amino acid is a limiting amino Explanation: Electronegativity is defined as the power of
acid in pulses? an atom in a molecule to attract electrons towards itself.
a) Leucine Fluorine is the most electronegative element.
b) Lysine
2. The factors on which electronegativity depends upon
c) Methionine a) Valence state of atom
d) Glutamine b) Hybridisation
View Answer c) Both valence state and hybridisation
Answer: c d) None of the mentioned
Explanation: Amino acids that are present in low View Answer
proportion limit the functioning of the proteins, and are so Answer: c
called limiting amino acids of those particular proteins. Explanation: The factors on which electronegativity
Generally proteins in pulses like beans are limited in
depends upon is valence state of atom and hybridisation.
methionine.
3. How does the electronegativiy gets affected with the
16. Which of the characteristics below apply to amino acid
negative oxidation state?
Glycine?
a) It decreases
a) Optically inactive b) It increases
b) Hydrophilic, basic and charged c) It remains constant
c) Hydrophobic d) None of the mentioned
d) Hydrophilic, acidic and charged View Answer
View Answer
Answer: a
Answer: a Explanation: Electronegativity decreases with the negative
Explanation: The entire class of amino acids has a common oxidation state since the tendency to attract an electron
backbone of an organic carboxylic acid group and an
will decrease with the negative charge of the anion.
amino group attached to a saturated carbon atom. The
simplest member of this group is glycine, where the 4. The electronegativity of sp2 hybridised atom will be
saturated carbon atom is unsubstituted, rendering it a) 3.29
optically inactive. b) 2.48
c) 3.69
d) 2.75
View Answer

Answer: d
Explanation: The electronegativity of sp2 hybridised atom
will be 2.75. Fluorine is the most electronegative element.
5. Which of the following is a permanent electron 9. Relative basic strength of amines does not depend upon
displacement effect? a) Inductive effect
a) Inductomeric b) Mesomeric effect
b) Electromeric c) Steric effect
c) Inductive d) Stabilisation of cation by hydration
d) All of the mentioned View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: c Explanation: Relative basic strength of amines does not
Explanation: Inductive effect is the permanent electron depend upon mesomeric effect. This effect is used in a
displacement effect and inductomeric and electromeric qualitative way and describes the electron withdrawing or
are temporary electron displacement effect. releasing properties of substituents based on relevant
resonance structures.
6. Arrange the following groups in the order of decreasing
(+I) effect. 10. Due to presence of C – X polar bond in alkyl halide,
a) C6H5O– > COO– > CR3 > CHR2 > H alkyl halides are
b) C6H5O– > H > CR3 > CHR2 > COO– a) More reactive than corresponding alkane
c) CR3 > C6H5O– > H > COO– > CHR2 b) Less reactive than corresponding alkane
d) C6H5O– > COO– > CHR2 > CR3 > H c) Equally reactive as corresponding alkane
View Answer d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The correct order is- C6H5O– > COO– > CR3 > Answer: a
CHR2 > H. Explanation: Due to presence of C – X polar bond in alkyl
halide, alkyl halides are more reactive than corresponding
7. Arrange the following groups in the order of decreasing alkane.
(-I) effect.
a) CN > F > Br > Cl > COOH > I > H
b) COOH > CN > F > Br > Cl > I > H
c) H > COOH > CN > I > Cl > F > Cl ELECTROMERIC EFFECT
d) CN > COOH > F > Cl > Br > I > H 1. Which of the following is a temporary effect brought
View Answer into play at the requirement of attacking reagent?
Answer: d a) Inductive effect
Explanation: The correct order is- CN > COOH > F > Cl > Br b) Mesomeric effect
> I > H. c) Electromeric effect
d) Inductomeric effect
8. Which of the following is an application of inductive View Answer
effect?
a) Bond length Answer: c
b) Dipole moment Explanation: Electromeric effect is a temporary effect
c) Strength of carboxylic acids brought into play at the requirement of attacking reagent.
d) All of the mentioned Electromeric effect refers to a molecular polarizability
View Answer effect occurring by an intra-molecular electron
displacement.
Answer: d
Explanation: Bond length, dipole moment and strength of 2. Select the correct statement from the following option
carboxylic acids are some of the applications of inductive a) When multiple bonds are present between two
effect. different atoms, electromeric shift towards the more
electronegative atom takes place
b) When multiple bonds are present between two similar
atoms, the first possibility is symmetric alkenes or alkynes d) All of the mentioned
c) When multiple bonds are present between two similar View Answer
atoms, the second possibility is asymmetric alkenes or
alkynes Answer: a
d) All of the mentioned Explanation: The positively charged and electron deficient
View Answer compounds which have a tendency to form a bond by
accepting the electron pair are known as electrophiles.
Answer: d
Explanation: When multiple bonds are present between 6. Which of the following is an example of lewis base?
two different atoms, electromeric shift towards the more a) ZnCl2
electronegative atom takes place. When multiple bonds b) BF3
are present between two similar atoms, the first possibility c) NH3
is symmetric alkenes or alkyne and the second possibility is d) FeCl2
asymmetric alkenes or alkynes. View Answer

3. Select the correct statement from the following option. Answer: c

a) Conjugate effect is stronger than (-I) effect Explanation: NH3 is an example of lewis base and ZnCl2,
b) Conjugate effect is weaker than (-I) effect BF3 and FeCl2 are the examples of lewis acid.
c) Conjugate effect is same as (-I) effect 7. Which of the following is an incorrect statement about
d) None of the mentioned the nucleophiles?
View Answer
a) They are electron rich
Answer: a b) They possess an empty orbital to receive the electron
Explanation: Conjugate effect is stronger than (-I) effect. pair
Conjugate effect (or delocalization) is an effect in which c) They attack electron deficient centres
molecular orbitals (MOs) are conjugated to new molecular d) Examples are: OH–, NH3, H2O etc
orbitals that are more delocalized and therefore generally View Answer
lower in energy.
Answer: b
4. When the complete transfer of π-electrons take place Explanation: Nucleophiles possess an unshared electron
away from the atom at the requirement of attacking pair which is not firmly held to the nucleus. All the other
agent, it is called options are correct. They are electron rich and attack on
a) (-E) effect electron deficient centres. Examples are: OH–, NH3, H2O
b) (+E) effect etc.
c) (-I) effect 8. Lewis acids are the examples of nucleophilic reagents.
d) (+I) effect a) True
View Answer b) False
Answer: b View Answer
Explanation: When the complete transfer of π-electrons
Answer: b
take place away from the atom at the requirement of Explanation: Lewis acids are the examples of electrophilic
attacking agent, it is called (+E) effect. reagents and Lewis bases are the examples of nucleophilic
5. The positively charged and electron deficient reagents.
compounds which have a tendency to form a bond by 9. Those groups which are electron repelling and have
accepting the electron pair are known as lesser electron attracting power than hydrogen show
a) Electrophiles a) (+E) effect
b) Nucleophiles b) (-E) effect
c) Homophiles
c) (-I) effect
d) (+I) effect 3. The phenomenon in which 2 or more structures,
View Answer involving identical position of atoms can be written for a
particular molecule, is called
Answer: d a) Conjugation
Explanation: Those groups which are electron repelling b) Resonance
and have lesser electron attracting power than hydrogen c) Hyper conjugation
show (+I) effect. d) Vibration
10. Which of the following molecule will show highest View Answer
dipole moment? Answer: b
a) CH3Cl Explanation: The phenomenon in which 2 or more
b) CH3Br structures, involving identical position of atoms can be
c) CH3F written for a particular molecule, is called resonance. The
d) CH3I mesomeric effect is a permanent effect and operates in
View Answer compounds containing at least one double bond.
Answer: c 4. Select the incorrect option from the following option.
Explanation: CH3F will show the highest dipole moment a) Resonating structures have a real existence
because it is the most electronegative compound. b) The actual structure lies between various possible
resonating structures
c) Resonating structures are useful as they allow us to
MESOMERIC EFFECT describe molecules
d) None of the mentioned
1. In mesomeric effect, the electrons are transferred from View Answer
a) A multiple bonds to an atom
b) A multiple bonds to a single covalent bond Answer: a
c) An atom with a lone pair to the adjacent single covalent Explanation: Resonating structures have no real existence.
bond All the other options are correct. The actual structure lies
d) All of the mentioned between various possible resonating structures,
View Answer resonating structures are useful as they allow us to
describe molecules.
Answer: d
Explanation: In mesomeric effect, the electrons are 5. The resonance energy is defined as a difference in
transferred from a multiple bonds to an atom, a multiple energy between
bond to a single covalent bond and an atom with the lone a) Two consecutive resonating structures
pair to the adjacent single covalent bond. b) Resonance hybrid and most unstable resonating
structure
2. Which of the following is a resonance effect? c) Resonance hybrid and most stable resonating structure
a) Inductive effect d) First and last resonating structures
b) Electromeric effect View Answer
c) Mesomeric effect
d) Inductomeric effect Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: The resonance energy is defined as a
difference in energy between resonance hybrid and most
Answer: c stable resonating structure. The resonance energy of a
Explanation: Mesomeric effect is also known as resonance compound is a measure of the extra stability of the
effect. The mesomeric effect is a permanent effect and conjugated system compared to the corresponding
operates in compounds containing at least one double number of isolated double bonds.
bond.
6. Which of the following is an application of mesomeric 10. Phenyl group show
effect? a) (+M) effect
a) Dipole moment b) (+E) effect
b) Strength of acids and bases c) (+I) effect
c) Bond length d) (-M) effect
d) All of the mentioned View Answer
View Answer
Answer: d
Answer: d Explanation: Phenyl group show (-M) effect. The phenyl
Explanation: Dipole moment, strength of acids and bases group or phenyl ring is a cyclic group of atoms with the
and bond length are some of the applications of formula C6H5.
mesomeric effect.

7. Dipole moment of CH3-CH2-Cl > CH2=CH-Cl.

a) True HYPERCONJUGATION
b) False 1. Which of the following is known as Baker-Nathan
View Answer
effect?
Answer: a a) Mesomeric effect
Explanation: Dipole moment of CH3-CH2-Cl > CH2=CH-Cl. b) Inductive effect
This is due to resonance in vinyl chloride. c) Hyperconjugation
d) Electromeric effect
8. Select the correct statement from the following option. View Answer
a) Benzene ring has two different types of bond length for
single and double bonds Answer: c
b) All the bond length in benzene ring is equal due to Explanation: Hyperconjugation is also known as Baker-
hyperconjugation Nathan effect. Hyperconjugation is the stabilising
c) All the bond length in benzene ring is equal due to interaction that results from the interaction of the
resonance electrons in a ς-bond (usually C-H or C-C) with an adjacent
d) All of the mentioned empty or partially filled p-orbital or a π-orbital to give an
View Answer extended molecular orbital that increases the stability of
the system.
Answer: c
Explanation: All the bond length in benzene ring is equal 2. Hyperconjugation involves the delocalisation of
due to resonance. All the bond lengths are equal in a) ς bond orbital
benzene ring i.e. double bond as well as single bond due to b) π bond orbital
resonance. c) Both ς and π bond orbital
d) None of the mentioned
9. Greater the number of resonating structures for a given View Answer
intermediate,
a) Less will be its stability Answer: a
b) More will be its stability Explanation: Hyperconjugation involves the delocalisation
c) It will not affect its stability of ς bond orbital. It is the stabilising interaction that
d) None of the mentioned results from the interaction of the electrons in a ς-bond
View Answer (usually C-H or C-C) with an adjacent empty or partially
filled p-orbital or a π-orbital to give an extended molecular
Answer: b orbital that increases the stability of the system.
Explanation: Greater the number of resonating structures
for a given intermediate, more will be its stability. More 3. Number of hyperconjugation structures in isopropyl
resonating structure increases the stability. radical is
a) 3
b) 6 7. On increasing the number of α-hydrogens, the number
c) 9 of hyperconjugation structures will
d) 12 a) Decrease
View Answer b) Increase
c) Remains same
Answer: b d) None of the mentioned
Explanation: Number of hyperconjugation structures in View Answer
isopropyl radical is 6. Isopropyl is C3H7.
Answer: b
4. The resonance energy (kCal/mol) of tertiary butyl is Explanation: On increasing the number of α-hydrogens,
a) 9 the number of hyperconjugation structures will increase.
b) 10 Hyperconjugation is directly proportional to the number of
c) 11 α-hydrogens. α-hydrogen is the hydrogen atom attached
d) 12 to the carbon which is attached to a functional group.
View Answer
8. When the contributing structure contains the same
Answer: d number of two-electron bonds as the normal lewis
Explanation: The resonance energy of tertiary butyl is 12 formula, it will be
kCal/mol. It is also called tert-butanol, is the simplest a) Heterovalent hyperconjugation
tertiary alcohol, with a formula of (CH3)3COH It is one of b) Sacrificial hyperconjugation
the four isomers of butanol. c) Isovalent hyperconjugation
d) All of the mentioned
5. Larger the number of hyperconjugation structures, the
View Answer
stability of free radicals will
a) Increase Answer: c
b) Decrease Explanation: When the contributing structure contains the
c) Remains same same number of two-electron bonds as the normal lewis
d) None of the mentioned formula, it will be isovalent hyperconjugation.
View Answer
9. The compound that can be most readily sulphonated is
Answer: a a) Benzene
Explanation: Larger the number of hyperconjugation b) Toluene
structures, greater will be the stability of free radicals. c) Nitrobenzene
6. Which of the following is a consequence of Baker- d) Chlorobenzene
Nathan effect? View Answer
a) It is helpful in explaining the directive influence of alkyl Answer: b
groups in aromatic alkyl benzene Explanation: The compound that can be most readily
b) It is helpful in explaining the relative stability of alkenes sulphonated is toluene. Toulene contains a methyl group
c) It is helpful in explaining the relative stabilities of alkyl with benzene ring and is a colorless, water-insoluble liquid
carbocations with the smell associated with paint thinners.
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer 10. Ethene is devoid of any alpha hydrogen so
hyperconjugation is not possible.
Answer: d a) True
Explanation: Baker-Nathan effect is helpful in explaining b) False
the directive influence of alkyl groups in aromatic alkyl View Answer
benzene. It is helpful in explaining the relative stability of
alkenes and relative stabilities of alkyl carbocations. Answer: a
Explanation: Ethene is devoid of any alpha hydrogen so
hyperconjugation is not possible because the presence of
alpha hydrogen is the necessary condition for pair is called homolytic fission. Homo refers to same and in
hyperconjugation. this fission every atom has same number of electrons.

4. The breaking of a covalent bond in such a way that both

the electrons of shared pair are carried away by one of
FISSION OF COVALENT BOND atom is called
1. A covalent bond between two atoms may be broken in a) Morpholytic fission
b) Monolytic fission
different ways depending upon
a) Nature of given organic compound c) Heterolytic fission
d) Homolytic fission
b) Nature of attacking reagent
c) Reaction conditions View Answer
d) All of the mentioned Answer: c
View Answer Explanation: The breaking of a covalent bond in such a way
that both the electrons of shared pair are carried away by
Answer: d
Explanation: A covalent bond between two atoms may be one of atom is called heterolytic fission. Hetero refers to
different and in this fission every atom has different
broken in different ways depending upon nature of given
organic compound, nature of attacking reagent and number of electrons.
reaction conditions. 5. Heterolytic fission takes place between two atoms of
widely different
2. Select the incorrect statement from the following
a) Conductivity
option.
a) Fission of covalent bond leads to the generation of b) Viscosity
intermediate organic species c) Electronegtivity
b) They are stable and long-lived d) All of the mentioned
View Answer
c) The presence of reactive intermediates is confirmed by
their detection by spectroscopic methods Answer: c
d) None of the mentioned Explanation: Heterolytic fission takes place between two
View Answer atoms of widely different electronegativity. The more
Answer: b electronegative atom will not attract the electron as
Explanation: The intermediate species are unstable and compared to less electronegative atom.
short-lived. All the other options are correct. Fission of 6. Select the incorrect statement from the following
covalent bond leads to the generation of intermediate option.
organic species. The presence of reactive intermediates is a) Heterolytic fission takes place generally in a polar
confirmed by their detection by spectroscopic methods. solvent
3. The breaking of a covalent bond in such a way that each b) Heterolytic fission takes place usually at higher
temperatures
atom separates with one electron of the shared pair is
c) Cations and anions formed are generally carbon-based
called
a) Homolytic fission d) None of the mentioned
b) Heterolytic fission View Answer
c) Monolytic fission Answer: b
d) Morpholytic fission Explanation: Heterolytic fission takes place usually at
View Answer lower temperatures. All the other options are correct.
Answer: a Heterolytic fission takes place generally in a polar solvent
Explanation: The breaking of a covalent bond in such a way and cations and anions formed are generally carbon-
based.
that each atom separates with one electron of the shared
7. Which of the following is intermediate organic species CARBOCATIONS
based on carbon formed by homolytic fission?
a) Carbenes 1. Stability of free radicals can be explained on the basis of
b) Carbo-cations a) Inductive effect
c) Carbanions b) Electromeric effect
d) Free radicals c) Hyperconjugation
View Answer d) Mesomeric effect
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Free radicals are intermediate organic species Answer: c
based on carbon formed by homolytic fission. Free radicals Explanation: Stability of free radicals can be explained on
are different from cations and anions. They do not carry the basis of hyperconjugation effect and ease of
any charge with them. formation.

8. Which of the following is intermediate organic species 2. The hybridisation of carbocation is

based on carbon formed by photolysis? a) Sp
a) Carbenes b) Sp2
b) Carbo-cations c) Sp3
c) Carbanions d) Sp3d
d) Free radicals View Answer
View Answer
Answer: b
Answer: a Explanation: The hybridisation of carbocation is sp2. A
Explanation: Carbenes are intermediate organic species carbocation is molecule in which a carbon atom bears
based on carbon formed by photolysis. A carbene is a three bonds and a positive charge.
molecule containing a neutral carbon atom with a valence
3. Arrange the following carbocations in the order of
of two and two unshared valence electrons. increasing stability.
9. Triplet carbene is more stable than singlet carbene. a) Benzyl > 30 > 20 > 10
a) True b) Benzyl > 10 > 20 > 30
b) False c) 30 > 20 > 10 > Benzyl
View Answer d) 10 > 20 > 30 > Benzyl
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Triplet carbene is more stable than singlet Answer: a
carbene. A carbene is a molecule containing a neutral Explanation: The correct stability order of carbocation is-
carbon atom with a valence of two and two unshared Benzyl > 30 > 20 > 10. Benzyl carbocation is the most stable
valence electrons. and 10 carbocation is least stable.

10. The shape of carbanion is 4. The shape of carbocation is

a) Linear a) Pyramidal
b) Trigonal planar b) Bent
c) Pyramidal c) Linear
d) Bent d) Trigonal planar
View Answer View Answer

Answer: c Answer: d
Explanation: The shape of carbanion is pyramidal. A Explanation: The shape of carbocation is trigonal planar. It
carbanion is an anion in which carbon has an unshared is sp2 hybridised. A carbocation is molecule in which a
pair of electrons and bears a negative charge usually with carbon atom bears three bonds and a positive charge.
three substituents for a total of eight valence electrons.
5. Carbonium ions are the intermediates in which the to +1. A carbocation is molecule in which a carbon atom
positive charge is carried by the carbon atom with bears three bonds and a positive charge.
___________ electrons in the valence shell.
a) 6 9. The homolytic bond dissociation energy is inversely
b) 5 proportional to the
c) 4 a) Bond length
d) 3 b) Ease of formation
View Answer c) Dipole moment
d) All of the mentioned
Answer: a View Answer
Explanation: Carbonium ions are the intermediates in
which the positive charge is carried by the carbon atom Answer: b
with six electrons in the valence shell. It is an organic Explanation: The homolytic bond dissociation energy is
cation in which the positive charge is located on a carbon inversely proportional to the ease of formation of free
atom. radicals. Free radicals do not carry any charge.

6. Positive charge of carbocations can be dispersed by 10. Which of the following free radical has the maximum
a) (+I) effect of alkyl group ease of formation?
b) Resonance in allyl or benzyl carbocation a) 10
c) Hyperconjugation in 10, 20 and 30 carbocations b) 20
d) All of the mentioned c) 30
View Answer d) CH3
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Positive charge of carbocations can be Answer: c
dispersed by (+I) effect of alkyl group or by resonance in Explanation: 30 free radical has the maximum ease of
allyl or benzyl carbocation or by hyperconjugation in 10, formation. Free radicals do not carry any charge.
20 and 30 carbocations.

7. Alkyl substitution at the carbon bearing positive charge

CARBANIONS
stabilizes carbocations.
a) True 1. Select the correct statement from the following option.
b) False a) Carbanion is the intermediate compound
View Answer b) In carbanion, central carbon atom carries negative
charge
Answer: a c) It possess an unshared pair of electron
Explanation: Alkyl substitution at the carbon bearing d) All of the mentioned
positive charge stabilizes carbocations. Carbocation is a View Answer
molecule in which a carbon atom bears three bonds and a
positive charge. Answer: d
Explanation: Carbanion is the intermediate compound in
8. The formal charge at the carbocation is equal to which central carbon atom carries a negative charge and it
a) -1
possess the unshared pair of electron. It is an anion in
b) 0
which carbon has an unshared pair of electrons and bears
c) +1 a negative charge usually with three substituents for a
d) +2 total of eight valence electrons.
View Answer
2. The hybridisation of carbanion is
Answer: c a) Sp
Explanation: The formal charge at the carbocation is equal b) Sp2
c) Sp3 b) (-I) effect and resonance
d) Sp3d c) Hyperconjugation
View Answer d) (+M) effect and resonance
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The hybridisation of carbanion is sp3. A Answer: b
carbanion is an anion in which carbon has an unshared Explanation: Negative charge of carbanion can be
pair of electrons and bears a negative charge usually with dispersed by (+I) effect and resonance. A carbanion is a
three substituents for a total of eight valence electrons. nucleophile. The stability and reactivity of a carbanion is
determined by several factors.
3. The formal charge at the carbanion is
a) +1 7. Which of the following carbanion is least stable?
b) -1 a) 10
c) 0 b) 20
d) +2 c) 30
View Answer d) CH3
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The formal charge at the carbanion is -1. A Answer: c
carbanion is an anion in which carbon has an unshared Explanation: 30 carbanion is the least stable carbanion. The
pair of electrons and bears a negative charge usually with same factors that determine the stability of the carbanion
three substituents for a total of eight valence electrons. also determine the order in pKa in carbon acids.

4. The geometry of carbanion is 8. Which of the following carbanion is most stable?

a) Pyramidal a) 10
b) Linear b) 20
c) Tetrahedral c) 30
d) Trigonal planar d) CH3
View Answer View Answer

Answer: a Answer: d
Explanation: The geometry of carbanion is pyramidal. A Explanation: CH3 carbanion is the most stable carbanion.
carbanion is an anion in which carbon has an unshared The same factors that determine the stability of the
pair of electrons and bears a negative charge usually with carbanion also determine the order in pKa in carbon acids.
three substituents for a total of eight valence electrons.
9. On increasing the number of alkyl groups, the stability
5. The structure of carbanion is pyramidal but it undergoes of carbanions
rapid inversion similar to those of amines. a) Increases
a) True b) Decreases
b) False c) Remains same
View Answer d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The structure of carbanion is pyramidal but it Answer: b
undergoes rapid inversion similar to those of amines. The Explanation: On increasing the number of alkyl groups, the
carbanion exists in a trigonal pyramidal geometry. stability of carbanions decreases. The alkyl groups have (-I)
Formally, a carbanion is the conjugate base of a carbon effect.
acid.
10. Due to (+I) effect, the methyl groups are electron
6. Negative charge of carbanion can be dispersed by accepting in nature.
a) (+I) effect and resonance a) True
b) False Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: The halide ion is an extremely weak base
because hydrogen halide are acidic as they release a
Answer: b proton.
Explanation: Due to (+I) effect, the methyl groups are
electron releasing in nature. The same factors that 4. When the nucleophile :OR attacks the RX, the resultant
determine the stability of the carbanion also determine product will be
the order in pKa in carbon acids. a) R – OH
b) ROR
c) R:CN
NUCLEOPHILLIC SUBSTITUTION REACTION d) RNHR
View Answer
1. The atom which defines the structure of a family of
organic compounds and their properties is called Answer: b
Explanation: When the nucleophile :OR attacks the RX, the
a) Resonating structure
b) Homologous structure resultant product will be ROR. X will be separated.
c) Functional group 5. Select the correct statement from the following option.
d) Nucleophile a) SN2 reaction follows second order kinetics
View Answer b) No intermediate is involved in SN2 mechanism
c) SN2 reactions are one-step reaction
Answer: c
d) All of the mentioned
Explanation: The atom which defines the structure of a
family of organic compounds and their properties is called View Answer
a functional group. Functional groups are specific groups Answer: d
of atoms or bonds within molecules that are responsible Explanation: SN2 reaction follows second order kinetics
for the characteristic chemical reactions of those and no intermediate is involved in it. So, SN2 reactions are
molecules. one-step reaction.
2. The functional group in alkyl halide is 6. The reactivity order of alkyl halides in SN2 is
a) Hydroxyl group a) CH3 X > 10 > 20 > 30
b) Halogen atom b) CH3 X > 20 > 10 > 30
c) Inert gas c) CH3 X > 30 > 10 > 20
d) All of the mentioned d) CH3 X > 30 > 20 > 10
View Answer View Answer
Answer: b Answer: a
Explanation: The functional group in alkyl halide is a Explanation: The correct order of reactivity in alkyl halide
halogen atom. Halide refers to halogen. Halogens are a is- CH3 X > 10 > 20 > 30. CH3 X is most reactive whereas 30 is
group in the periodic table consisting of five chemically least reactive.
related elements: fluorine (F), chlorine (Cl), bromine (Br),
iodine (I), and astatine (At). 7. SN1 reaction involves heterolysis to form the
carbocation as an intermediate.
3. The halide ion is an extremely a) True
a) Weak base b) False
b) Weak acid View Answer
c) Strong base
d) Strong acid Answer: a
View Answer Explanation: SN1 reaction involves heterolysis to form the
carbocation as an intermediate.
8. Which step in SN1 reaction is a slow rate determining b) SN2
step? c) SNAr
a) Attack of nucleophile d) SNi
b) Formation of a racemic mixture View Answer
c) Formation of a transition state
d) All of the mentioned Answer: d
View Answer Explanation: Reaction of alcohol with SOCl2 proceeds with
retention of configuration via substitution nucleophilic
Answer: c internal (SNi) mechanism.
Explanation: The first step of formation of the transition
state is a slow rate determining step in SN1 reaction. 13. The nucleophilic substitutions do not occur in
haloarenes because
9. A low concentration of nucleophile favours the a) The carbon-halogen bond is much shorter
a) SN2 reaction b) The carbon-halogen bond is stronger compared to that
b) SN1 reaction in haloalkanes
c) Both SN1 and SN1 reaction c) The lone pair of electrons on the halogen participates in
d) None of the mentioned delocalisation with the π-electrons of benzene ring
View Answer d) All of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: A low concentration of nucleophile favours Answer: d
the SN1 reaction but high concentration of nucleophile Explanation: The nucleophilic substitutions do not occur in
favours the SN2 reaction. haloarenes because the carbon-halogen bond is much
shorter and stronger compared to that in haloalkanes and
10. Which of the following reactions are favoured by polar the lone pair of electrons on the halogen participates in
aprotic solvent? delocalisation with the π-electrons of benzene ring.
a) SN1 reactions
b) SN2 reactions 14. Which of the following drastic condition is required for
c) Both SN1 and SN1 reactions the substitution in haloarenes?
d) None of the mentioned a) High temperature
View Answer b) High pressure
c) Strong concentrated reagent
Answer: b d) All of the mentioned
Explanation: SN1 reactions are favoured by polar protic View Answer
solvents whereas SN2 reactions are favoured by polar
aprotic solvent. Answer: d
Explanation: Drastics conditions like high temperature,
11. Arrange the following in the decreasing order of high pressure and strong concentrated reagents are used
leaving group in nucleophilic substitution reaction. to carry substitution in haloarenes.
a) H– > Cl– > HO– > Br– > CH3COO–
b) Cl– > Br– > HO– > H– > CH3COO– 15. The rate of nucleophilic substitution reactions are
c) Cl– > Br– > CH3COO – > HO– > H– higher in the presence of
d) HO– > CH3COO – > H– > Br– > Cl– a) Electron withdrawing groups
View Answer b) Electron releasing groups
c) Both electron withdrawing and releasing groups
Answer: c d) None of the mentioned
Explanation: The correct order is- Cl– > Br– > CH3COO – > View Answer
HO– > H–.
Answer: a
12. Reaction of alcohol with SOCl2 is Explanation: The rate of nucleophilic substitution reactions
a) SN1 are higher in the presence of electron withdrawing groups.
ELECTROPHILLIC SUBSTITUTION REACTION – I Answer: a
Explanation: The necessary condition for desulphonation
1. Which of the following is rate determining step in is- Use dilute acid, high concentration of water and
electrophilic substitution reaction? remove volatile hydrocarbon by steam distillation.
a) Generation of electrophile
b) Attack by an electrophilic reagent on benzene ring 5. Which of the following act as electrophile in
c) Formation of product halogenation?
d) All of the mentioned a) Nitronium ion
View Answer b) Sulphonium ion
c) Halonium ion
Answer: b d) Acylium ion
Explanation: Attack by an electrophilic reagent on benzene View Answer
ring is a rate determining step in electrophilic substitution
reaction. It is also the slowest step of the reaction. Answer: c
Explanation: Halonium ion act as electrophile in
2. Which of the following act as a catalysis in the nitration halogenation. Nitronium ion is used in nitration.
of benzene? Sulphonium ion is used in sulphonation. Acylium ion is
a) Conc. HCl used in acylation.
b) Dil. HCl
c) Conc. H2SO4 6. Aromatic bromination catalyzed by the Lewis acid
d) Dil. H2SO4 thalium acetate gives
View Answer a) Para isomer
b) Ortho isomer
Answer: c c) Meta isomer
Explanation: Conc. H2SO4 act as a catalysis in the nitration d) Para and ortho isomer
of benzene. Benzene is treated with a mixture of View Answer
concentrated nitric acid and concentrated sulphuric acid at
a temperature not exceeding 50°C. Answer: a
Explanation: Aromatic bromination catalyzed by the Lewis
3. Fuming sulphuric acid is the solution of _________% acid thalium acetate gives only para isomer. It is not Ortho
SO3 in conc. H2SO4. and meta directing.
a) 10
b) 9 7. The reaction in which benzene reacts with alkyl halide in
c) 8 presence of a lewis acid as a catalyst to produce
d) 7 alkylbenzene is known as
View Answer a) Nitration
b) Halogenation
Answer: d c) Friedel-Crafts Acylation
Explanation: Fuming sulphuric acid is the solution of 7% d) Friedel-Crafts Alkylation
SO3 in conc. H2SO4. It is also called Oleum which is View Answer
produced in the contact process, where sulphur is oxidized
to sulphur trioxide which is subsequently dissolved in Answer: d
concentrated sulphuric acid. Explanation: The reaction in which benzene reacts with
alkyl halide in presence of a lewis acid as a catalyst to
4. Which of the following is the necessary condition for produce alkylbenzene is known as Friedel-Crafts
desulphonation? Alkylation. With anhydrous ferric chloride as a catalyst, the
a) Remove volatile hydrocarbon by steam distillation alkyl group attaches at the former site of the chloride ion.
b) Low concentration of water
c) High concentration of sulphonating agent 8. Which of the following is not a product of the reaction
d) A large excess of fuming sulphuric acid of benzene with CH3Cl and AlCl3?
View Answer a) Toulene
b) Isopropyl benzene Answer: b
c) O-xylene Explanation: An activating substituent group activates the
d) P-xylene ortho and para positions. It does not activate the meta
View Answer position.

Answer: b 2. A deactivating substituent group directs

Explanation: p-xylene is not a product of reaction of a) Ortho position
benzene with CH3Cl and AlCl3. Toulene, isopropyl benzene b) Para position
and O-xylene are the products of such reaction. c) Both ortho and para positions
d) Meta position
9. The product of Friedel-Crafts Acylation reactions are View Answer
a) Alkylbenzene
b) Alkylamine Answer: d
c) Arylketone Explanation: A deactivating substituent group directs only
d) Halobenzene meta position. It does not activates ortho or para
View Answer positions.

Answer: c 3. Which of the following is ortho-para directing group?

Explanation: The product of Friedel-Crafts Acylation a) –NHCOCH3
reactions are Arylketone. The acylated products may easily b) –NO2
be converted to the corresponding alkanes via c) –CN
Clemmensen Reduction or Wolff-Kishner Reduction. d) –CHO
View Answer
10. How will you convert benzene into n-propyl benzene?
a) Friedel-Crafts Alkylation Answer: a
b) Friedel-Crafts Acylation Explanation: NHCOCH3 is ortho-para directing group. NO,
c) Friedel-Crafts Alkylation followed by clemmensen CN and CHO are meta-directing groups.
reduction
d) Friedel-Crafts Acylation followed by clemmensen 4. Which of the following is meta directing group?
reduction a) –NHCOCH3
View Answer b) –COOH
c) –OH
Answer: d d) –OCH3
Explanation: Friedel-Crafts Acylation followed by View Answer
clemmensen reduction of ketone will give n-propyl
benzene. Clemmensen reduction is a chemical reaction Answer: b
described as a reduction of ketones (or aldehydes) to Explanation: -COOH is meta directing group. All the other
alkanes using zinc amalgam and hydrochloric acid. options are ortho-para directing groups.

5. The most stable carbonium ion is

a) Methyl carbonium ion
ELECTROPHILLIC SUBSTITUTION REACTION – II b) 20 carbonium ion
c) 10 carbonium ion
1. An activating substituent group activates d) 30 carbonium ion
a) Ortho position View Answer
b) Para position
c) Both ortho and para positions Answer: d
d) Meta position Explanation: The most stable crbonium ion is 30carbonium
View Answer ion. The least stable is primary or 10carbonium ion.
6. Which of the following has the highest activation of
benzene ring?
a) – NHCOCH3
b) –OH
c) –NH2
d) –C6H5
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: –NH2 among the following has the highest
activation of benzene ring. In cases where the substituents
is esters or amides, they are less activating because they
form resonance structure that pull the electron density
away from the ring.

7. HBr reacts fastest with

a) 2-methylpropan-2-ol
b) Propan-1-ol
c) Propan-2-ol
d) 2-methylpropan-1-ol
View Answer

Answer: a
Explanation: HBr reacts fastest with 2-methylpropan-2-ol.
Hydrogen bromide is the diatomic molecule and a
colorless compound.

8. The compound that can be most readily sulphonated is

a) Benzene
b) Nitrobenzene
c) Toluene
d) Chlorobenzene
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: The compound that can be most readily
sulphonated is toluene. Toulene contains CH3 group.

9. In Cannizaro reaction, two molecules of aldehydes are

reacted to produce
a) Alcohol only
b) Carboxylic acid only
c) Alcohol and carboxylic acid
d) Alcohol, carboxylic acid and ketone
View Answer

Answer: c
Explanation: In Cannizaro reaction, two molecules of
aldehydes are reacted to produce alcohol and carboxylic
acid using a hydroxide base.